Двусторонний перевод общественно-политических текстов

Е.В. Терехова
ДВУСТОРОННИЙ ПЕРЕВОД
ОБЩЕСТВЕННО-ПОЛИТИЧЕСКИХ ТЕКСТОВ
(с элементами скорописи в английском языке)
Учебное пособие
2-е издание, стереотипное
Москва
Издательство «Флинта»
2012
УДК 811.111=161.1=03(075.4)
ББК 81.2Англ-7
Т35
Т35
Терехова Е.В.
Двусторонний перевод общественно-политических текстов (с элементами скорописи в английском языке) [Электронный ресурс] : учеб. пособие / Е.В. Терехова. – 2-е изд., стер. – М. : Флинта, 2012. – 320 с.
ISBN 978-5-89349-955-1
Цель пособия — помочь студентам развить умения и навыки двустороннего
письменного и устного перевода. Пособие содержит элементы скорописи, упражнения, тексты для самостоятельного анализа и перевода.
Для студентов, аспирантов, преподавателей вузов, переводчиков практиков.
УДК 811.111=161.1=03(075.4)
ББК 81.2Англ-7
ISBN 978-5-89349-955-1
© Издательство «Флинта», 2012
ÎÃËÀÂËÅÍÈÅ
Введение . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Ãëàâà I. Ïîëèòè÷åñêèå ïðîáëåìû ñòðàí ÀÒÐ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
1. География/политика стран АТР . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2. Политика и история стран ACEAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
3. Страны АТР: политика в действии . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
4. Гуманитарные проблемы стран АТР . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Тексты для самостоятельного чтения и перевода . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Ãëàâà II. Ýêîíîìè÷åñêèå ïðîáëåìû ñòðàí ÀÒÐ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
1. Индонезия:
Chinese Bear The Brunt Of Anger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
2. Япония:
Finance Scandal Tars Mr. Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
3. Индонезия:
1.Economic Slump Makes Boomers Nervous: Poll . . . . . . . . . . .113
2. U.S. Hypocrisy in Indonesia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
4. Страны АТР:
1. Exxon Mobil Not Ready To Resume Aceh,
Indonesia Gas Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
2. Новые проекты Exxon Mobil в странах АТР . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Тексты для самостоятельного чтения и перевода . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Ãëàâà III. Îðãàíèçàöèÿ îáúåäèíåííûõ íàöèé è åå ìèññèÿ . . . . . . . . .140
1. ООН, её цели, задачи, структура . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
2. Деятельность ООН по поддержанию мира в Азии . . . . . . . . .158
3. ООН и её участие в экономическом развитии
стран АТР: АСЕАН, АПЕК . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Тексты для самостоятельного чтения и перевода . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Приложения . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Иллюстративный материал . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
I. Основные дефиниции переводческих трансформаций . . .250
II. Диагональная система записи текста . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
III. Компрессия как способ избежать многословия в тексте . . .264
IV. Скоропись в английском языке. 100 наиболее часто
используемых скорописных знаков . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
V. Словарь минимум лексики общественно политических
и экономических текстов с синонимическими рядами
(для студентов по специальностям международные
отношения и политология) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Библиография . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
3
ÂÂÅÄÅÍÈÅ
Цель данного учебного пособия — развитие умений и на
выков двустороннего письменного перевода у студентов гума
нитариев университетов и вузов, избравших своей основной
специальностью политические науки, международные отно
шения, регионоведение и т.д. Трудно представить себе сего
дняшнего студента, не владеющего хотя бы элементарными
умениями и навыками перевода, так как специализация сту
дентов в вышеуказанных областях настоятельно требует от них
освоения основ перевода с английского языка на русский и
наоборот.
Такая постановка задачи отнюдь не означает, что автор
учебника полностью отказалась от развития и укрепления
лингвистической базы учащихся. Вы, конечно же, согласитесь
с современными положениями науки о языке, в пользу кото
рых высказываются многие лингвисты и переводчики про
фессионалы, что не следует смешивать и/или подменять по
нятия владения основными ÿçûêîâûìè íàâûêàìè и ïåðåâîä÷åñêèìè óìåíèÿìè è ïðèåìàìè. Тем не менее автор данного
пособия исходит из предпосылки, что в процессе обучения пе
реводческим приемам также имеет место и наращивание сло
варя, и укрепление языковой базы студентов, и, наконец, по
вторение и закрепление определенных лексико грамматичес
ких моделей. Нет китайской стены между лингвистическими
умениями и навыками и переводческими подходами и при
емами, а если она, стена, и существует, так она прозрачная,
пропускающая процессы обучения языкам и переводу в обоих
направлениях. Многолетний опыт преподавания в универси
тете, в Российской Академии наук, а также опыт работы в ка
честве профессионального переводчика в самых различных
областях убедил автора книги лишь в одном: не может быть
хорошего переводчика, как и переводчика вообще, если
он/она не владеют äâóìÿ языками в равной степени для осу
ществления двустороннего перевода.
4
Но вернемся к структуре пособия. В нем недаром выделе
но слово «двумя» языками: в рассматриваемом случае эта пара
представлена русским и английским языками, однако она
могла быть представлена любым другим сочетанием двух язы
ков. Автор книги полагает, что подача текстов в виде ìîäóëåé
будет отвечать поставленным целям и задачам. В ïåðâîì ìîäóëå сгруппированы тексты, затрагивающие политические, соци
альные, гуманитарные и демографические проблемы региона.
Здесь же приводится историческая справка создания отдельных
группировок и политических блоков, рассматриваются при
кладные аспекты, связанные с политическим многообразием
стран Тихоокеанского региона. В упражнениях первого моду
ля делается упор на восстановление и закрепление языковых
навыков владения английским и русскими языками, фонети
ческих (только для английского языка), грамматических и
синтаксических. Основные предтекстовые задания и после
текстовые упражнения нацелены на создание и/или закрепле
ние у студентов синонимических рядов, которые в процессе
последующих лексико грамматических трансформаций по
служат теми кирпичиками (если это слово) или целыми блока
ми (если это словосочетание или целое предложение) при
компрессии текста. Отсюда появление таких заданий к упраж
нениям, как то:
ü
Äàéòå àíãëèéñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ íàçâàíèé îðãàíèçàöèé.
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ê ñëåäóþùèì ñëîâàì è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì.
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ êàðòó ñòðàíû (ñì. íèæå), íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ íàçâàíèé ãîðîäîâ.
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ê ñëîâàì è ñëåäóþùèì ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì. Çàïîëíèòå òàáëèöó è ò.ä.
Появляются первые упражнения на компрессию текста.
Методически автор решила проблему ввода основных пере
5
водческих приемов следующим образом: она вынесла в При
ложение основные определения и примеры того, ÷òî òàêîå
ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèå, ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå è ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèå
òðàíñôîðìàöèè; ÷òî òàêîå ìíîãîñëîâèå; ÷òî òàêîå äèàãîíàëüíàÿ ñèñòåìà çàïèñè òåêñòà ñ öåëüþ êîìïðåññèè, êàêèå èìåþòñÿ
çíàêè çàïèñè ñêîðîïèñüþ. Так как данное учебное пособие не
претендует на научную монографию, более того, по своему
жанру от него весьма отличается, автор считает возможным и
целесообразным лишь пунктирно обозначить и с помощью
примеров разъяснить сложные вышеназванные лингвистичес
кие понятия. При работе с двумя другими модулями учащиеся
смогут самостоятельно обращаться к разъяснениям в Прило
жении в процессе выполнения домашних заданий.
В первом модуле вводятся понятия грамматических пре
образований текста, цель которых научить студентов исполь
зовать причастные, деепричастные или предложные сочета
ния (сочетания с предлогами with, under) вместо придаточного
предложения. Слияние двух или более простых предложений
в одно сложноподчиненное или сложносочиненное, или на
оборот. Отсюда появление таких заданий и упражнений как,
например:
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà åãî ñèíòàêñè÷åñêèå îñîáåííîñòè.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëåäóþùèå ôðàçû, èñïîëüçóÿ ïðèåì êîìïðåññèè
òåêñòà. Êàêèå ñïîñîáû êîìïðåññèè âû ïðèìåíèëè.
В первом модуле студентов также просят выполнить зада
ния, связанные с компрессией текста, диагональной записью,
а все объяснения этих явлений вынесены в Приложение.
Во âòîðîì ìîäóëå рассматриваются экономические вопро
сы стран АТР. Как первый, так и второй модули, несмотря на
различие изучаемого материала, ставят своей задачей освое
ние и закрепление переводческих умений и навыков, хотя
первый модуль отличается большим числом упражнений, на
целенных на построение и укрепление словаря студентов. Вто
6
рой и третий модули в основном уделяют внимание заданиям,
цель которых произвести переводческие трансформации, син
таксические, лексико семантические и стилистические, добить
ся компрессии текста, произвести парафраз, избавиться от мно
гословия. Студентам предлагаются следующие упражнения:
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå ê ñëîâàì â ðàìêå ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèå äåôèíèöèè.
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå ðóññêèå âàðèàíòû ïåðåâîäà ìåòàôîð ñ àíãëèéñêîãî ÿçûêà íà ðóññêèé. Îáúÿñíèòå èñïîëüçîâàííûå òðàíñôîðìàöèè. Âûáåðèòå ëó÷øèé âàðèàíò èëè ïðåäëîæèòå ñâîé.
Îáîñíóéòå âàøå ðåøåíèå.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ, îáðàùàÿ âíèìàíèÿ íà ïåðåâîä àáñîëþòíûõ êîíñòðóêöèé (ïðåäëîæíàÿ êîíñòðóêöèÿ, ïðèâîäÿùàÿ ê
êîìïðåññèè òåêñòà).
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ
ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå âûñêàçûâàíèÿ ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå èõ.
Òðåòèé ìîäóëü посвящен вопросам структуры и функцио
нирования Организации Объединенных Наций как Междуна
родного форума, который играет исключительно важную роль
в Азиатско Тихоокеанском регионе. На материале оригиналь
ных текстов автор показывает схему деятельности ООН, вер
нее её специализированных подразделений АСЕАН и АПЕК,
в деле поддержания мира и содействия экономическому раз
витию стран Тихоокеанского региона. Среди основных зада
ний к текстам здесь можно встретить, например, следующие:
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà. Çà ñ÷åò êàêèõ ñðåäñòâ, ëåêñè÷åñêèõ, ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ èëè ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ âû ýòî ñäåëàëè?
ü
 ÷åì, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, âûðàæåíî ìíîãîñëîâèå òåêñòà? Êàê
èçìåíèòü ñòðóêòóðó òåêñòà, èçáåæàâ ïðè ýòîì ìíîãîñëîâèÿ?
В конце каждого модуля приводятся òåêñòû äëÿ ñàìîñòîÿòåëüíîãî ÷òåíèÿ è ïåðåâîäà, которые могут быть по желанию
7
преподавателя и студентов либо переведены, либо проанали
зированы на предмет выявления использованных переводчес
ких трансформаций. К некоторым текстам приданы упражне
ния, основная цель которых — показать, что учащиеся освои
ли переводческие трансформации и научились правильно их
применять в текстах.
Данное учебное пособие отличается от уже имеющихся
учебников тем, что в его основе лежит логико смысловой,
лексико семантический и семантико синтаксический анализ
текстов по вышеупомянутым специальностям. Корпус анали
зируемых текстов регионально ориентирован, практически
все тексты, предлагаемые автором учебника, посвящены по
литическим, экономическим и социально демографическим
проблемам стран Азиатско Тихоокеанского региона (АТР).
Такое «пристрастие» автора вполне объяснимо: она в течение
многих лет обучала студентов Владивостокского института
международных отношений Дальневосточного госуниверси
тета (ВИМО ДВГУ). Однако процесс создания учебного посо
бия, главная цель которого — развивать переводческие умения
на базе оригинальных подходов, сам диктует и ведет за собой.
Автор выражает надежду, что и тексты, и упражнения, и под
ходы, которые она применила в данной книге, позволят ис
пользовать данное пособие далеко за пределами Дальневос
точного региона. Не последнюю роль при системном отборе
такого корпуса текстов для перевода сыграл и тот фактор, что
аутентичные материалы стран АТР довольно редко встречают
ся в уже опубликованных книгах подобного плана. К тому же
страны эти — наши ближайшие соседи с наиболее развитыми
экономиками — являются членами определенных политико
экономических блоков или союзов.
Еще одной специфической особенностью предлагаемого
учебного пособия являются элементы скорописи, а также на
выки правильной записи монологов и/или диалогов, знание и
овладение которыми просто необходимы как маститому, так и
начинающему переводчику для одновременного ведения
краткой записи прослушанного или прочитанного материала.
8
Все эти материалы вынесены в Приложение этой книги, а
именно:
ü
ïðàâèëà çàïèñè íà îñíîâå ñêîðîïèñè;
ü
ïðàâèëî äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè ïðåäëîæåíèÿ;
ü
ñòî íàèáîëåå ÷àñòî âñòðå÷àþùèõñÿ ñóôôèêñîâ, ïðèñòàâîê,
ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé, èñïîëüçóåìûõ â àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå;
ü
÷òî òàêîå ìíîãîñëîâèå òåêñòà è êàê ìîæíî êîìïðåññèðîâàòü
òåêñò;
ü
ñëîâàðü-ìèíèìóì ñ ñèíîíèìàìè îáùåñòâåííî-ïîëèòè÷åñêîé
ëåêñèêè.
Материалы текстов для анализа были заимствованы из
следующих оригинальных источников: The Newsweek, The
Economist, The Far East Economic Review, The Far East Update,
The International Herald Tribune, Christian Science Monitor,
Forbes, а также из Интернета и/или любезно были предостав
лены Генеральным Консульством США во Владивостоке. В
данном пособии приводится тематическая подборка и харак
теристика государственного устройства около 10 стран Азиат
ско Тихоокеанского региона, при этом автор не задавалась це
лью подбирать тексты так, чтобы каждый текст имел бы свое
го «близнеца»: русский текст — английского, английский
текст — русского. Данная книга рассчитана на студентов стар
шекурсников и аспирантов гуманитарных специальностей,
которые в достаточной степени овладели английским языком,
чтобы приступить к освоению переводческих приемов. Это
пособие также можно рекомендовать для переводчиков прак
тиков, самостоятельно изучающих англо русские и русско
английские комбинации двустороннего перевода.
Автор книги надеется, что ее коллеги, как преподаватели
английского языка, так и профессиональные переводчики,
смогут использовать данное пособие на занятиях в группах
и/или самостоятельно. И автор будет искренне благодарен
9
тем, кто, работая с пособием, найдет возможности его улуч
шения и возьмет на себя труд сделать это, написав в изда
тельство.
Искреннюю благодарность хочу выразить своему другу и
коллеге доценту кафедры иностранных языков Дальневосточ
ного отделения Российской Академии наук (КИЯ ДВО РАН)
Г.Я. Тарасовой за помощь и поддержку в написании этой кни
ги. Я не менее благодарна коллективу кафедры иностранных
языков ВИМО ДВГУ за их посильный вклад в создание этой
книги. Слова глубокой признательности я хотела бы также вы
разить рецензентам данной книги, профессору кафедры ино
странных языков РАН, доктору филологических наук Разин
киной Н.М. и профессору, доктору филологических наук, за
ведующей кафедрой теории и практики перевода Института
иностранных языков ДВГУ З.Г. Прошиной. Я не могу не выра
зить искреннюю признательность переводческому факультету
Монтерейского института международных исследований
(МИИС), на базе которого мне удалось выполнять работу по
гранту Фулбрайта, полученному мною от Института Между
народного образования США, и руководителю русской пере
водческой школы Александру Михееву за их понимание и
дружеское участие во время моей исследовательской работы
в МИИС.
Êàíäèäàò ôèëîëîãè÷åñêèõ íàóê, ïðîôåññîð,
çàâåäóþùàÿ ÊÈß ÄÂÎ ÐÀÍ
Å.Â. Òåðåõîâà
Ãëàâà I
ÏÎËÈÒÈ×ÅÑÊÈÅ ÏÐÎÁËÅÌÛ ÑÒÐÀÍ ÀÒÐ
1. ÃÅÎÃÐÀÔÈß / ÏÎËÈÒÈÊÀ ÑÒÐÀÍ ÀÒÐ
THAILAND
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 1
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà öèôðîâîé ìàòåðèàë (÷èñëàì, îáîçíà÷àþùèì ïëîùàäü, ïðåäøåñòâóþò ÷èñëà, îáîçíà÷àþùèå íàñåëåíèå)
Thailand [’taIlnd] n. (см. рис. 1–2, стр. 245) 1. Formerly,
Siam. a kingdom in SE Asia: official name of Siam 1939–45 and
since 1949. 40,000,000; 198,242 sq. mi. (513,445 sq. km). Cap.:
Bangkok. 2. Gulf of. Also called Gulf of Siam. an arm of the South
China Sea, S. of Thailand.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 2
ü
Äàéòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé:
sq.mi. —
Сиамский залив (2) —
the arm (of the sea) —
S. of Thailand —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 3
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ê ñëîâàì è ñëåäóþùèì ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà ïðåäëîãè:
11
географическое положение —
the heart of the mainland —
to cover an area of —
простираться —
to border smth (to the North/South/West/East) —
humid tropical country —
monsoon climate —
составлять в среднем —
total religious freedom —
all faiths are allowed to practice —
to be an upholder of all religions —
избирать —
to be selected from among smb. —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 4
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ êàðòó ñòðàíû (ñì. ðèñ. 2, ñòð. 245), íàéäèòå ðóññêèå
ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ íàçâàíèé ãîðîäîâ:
Savankhalok, Uttaradit, Sukhothai, Phitsanulok, Nakhon
Sawan, Kanchnaburi, Maha Sarakham, Phuket, Chon Buri, Samut
Sakhon, Surat Thani, Nakhon Si Thammarat, Pattani, Narathiwat,
Chanthaburi, Songkhla, Phatthalung.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 5
ü
Èçó÷èòå ñëîâàðü.
Vocabulary 1
National Assembly
House of Representatives
Senate
His Majesty the King
Bangkok Metropolitan Administration
province, district, sub district, village
12
Национальное Собрание
Палата Представителей
Сенат
Его Величество Король
администрация столицы
провинция, округ, община,
деревня
GENERAL INFORMATION
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà:
Location: Thailand is situated in the heart of the Southeast
Asian mainland, covering an area of 513,115 sq.km. and extends
about 1,620 kilometres from north to south and 775 kilometres from
east to west. Thailand borders the Lao People’s Democratic
Republic and the Union of Myanmar to the North, the Kingdom of
Cambodia and the Gulf of Thailand to the East, the Union of
Myanmar and the Indian Ocean to the West, and Malaysia to the
south.
Capital: Bangkok.
Major Cities: North: Chiangmai, South: Songkia, Central
region: Ayutthaya and Chonburi, North Eastern: Nakhon
Ratchasima and Khon Kaen
Climate: Thailand is a warm and rather humid tropical country
with monsoonal climate. Temperatures are highest in March and
April with average temperature of 28 degree Celsius to 38 degrees
Celsius and humidity averaging between 82.8 percent to 73 percent.
Seasons: Dry: March to May; Rainy: June to October; Cool:
November to February.
Population: The population in Thailand is approximately 60
million, of which around 6 million live in the capital city, Bangkok.
Language: The national and official language is Thai while
English is widely spoken and understood in major cities, particular
ly in Bangkok and in business circles.
Religion: Buddhism is the national religion. In Thailand, there
is total religious freedom and all faiths are allowed to practice.
Under the Thai constitution, the King is Buddhist and upholder of
all religions: Buddhism (95 per cent); Islam (3.9 per cent);
Christianity (0.5 per cent); and others (0.6 per cent).
Government: Thailand is governed by a democratically elected
government with H.M. Bhumibol Adulyadej as Head of State.
Under the constitution, the Parliament comprises 270 appointed
senators and 391 elected Members of Parliament. The Prime
13
Minister is an elected MP and is selected from among the members
of the House of Representatives. Bangkok Metropolitan
Administration comes under an elected governor and is divided into
36 districts. Besides Bangkok, there are 76 provinces, administered
by appointed governors and divided into districts, sub districts, and
villages.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 6
ü
Èçó÷èòå ñëîâàðü.
Vocabulary 2
accession to the throne (of smb)
to commemorate
to be revered (for smth)
well being
tranquility
public welfare
bicameral
to exercise executive/judicial
powers (through)
a subject
to embrace
14
вступление (в должность, на
престол и т.п.)
1. а) ссылаться, упоминать; на
поминать, служить напомина
нием;
б) почтить память (в письмен
ном обращении или каким либо
другим образом); 2. отмечать,
праздновать
быть уважаемым, почитаемым
(материальное) благосостояние,
достаток, благополучие, процве
тание, благоденствие
спокойствие, уравновешен
ность, невозмутимость, безмя
тежность
благоденствие, благополучие,
благосостояние общества
двухпалатный
осуществлять исполнитель
ную/судебную власть (посредст
вом)
подданный
включать, заключать в себе, со
держать
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 7
ü
Äàéòå íà ñëóõ ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëîâ è ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé, îïèðàÿñü íà ñëîâàðü:
to be revered (for smth) —
tranquility —
to embrace —
accession to the throne (of smb) —
public welfare —
to commemorate —
to embrace —
a subject —
well being —
to exercise executive/judicial powers (through) —
bicameral —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 8
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå ýêâèâàëåíòû ê ñëåäóþùèì ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì, à çàòåì âûïîëíèòå óñòíûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà THAILAND’S
MONARCHY (ñì. íèæå).
править, царствовать (2) —
the ruler and the ruled —
to live a virtuous life —
духовный —
конституционная монархия с демократической формой
правления —
first hand understanding of the assets and hardships of smb —
по рекомендации —
to alleviate disease —
выполнять обязанности в чьих либо интересах —
to enjoy enviable growth —
оказывать влияние —
bedrock —
15
финансировать —
to boast a complex export led economy —
THAILAND’S MONARCHY
ü
à)
b)
c)
d)
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà åãî ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèå îñîáåííîñòè.
*Ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ, â êîòîðûõ ïðèâîäÿòñÿ êðàòêèå îïðåäåëåíèÿ è ïðèìåðû:
ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ îñîáåííîñòåé;
ïîíÿòèé òðåõ îñíîâíûõ âèäîâ ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ òðàíñôîðìàöèé;
äèàãîíàëüíîé ñèñòåìû çàïèñè òåêñòà ñ öåëüþ åãî êîìïðåññèè);
ìíîãîñëîâèÿ è ñïîñîáîâ åãî óñòðàíåíèÿ (äîñòèæåíèÿ êîìïðåññèè òåêñòà).
On June 9,1996, citizens of Thailand celebrated the 50th
anniversary of the accession to the throne of His Majesty King
Bhumibol Adulyadej. The Royal Thai Government, the Thai peo
ple, and friends around the world have organized year long to com
memorate this joyful and auspicious event. Having reigned for half a
century, His Majesty is the longest reigning Thai monarch.
The ninth king of the Chakri Dynasty, established in the 18th
century, King Bhumibol is revered for His intelligence, vision,
grace, and for His concern for all His subjects. As the supreme
guardian of Thailand’s Buddhist religion, the King is the symbol of
Thailand’s cultural identity. A widely accepted Thai view is that the
well being and tranquillity of the nation mostly depend upon the
morality of the ruler and the ruled. In this connection, the Thai peo
ple can consider themselves blessed since, throughout His reign, His
Majesty has lived a virtuous life and devoted Himself to promoting
public welfare, both material and spiritual.
Thailand is a constitutional monarchy with a democratic form
of government. Since 1932, kings of Thailand have exercised their
constitutional legislative powers through a bicameral National
Assembly comprised of a House of Representatives elected by pop
ular vote and a Senate appointed by the King upon recommendation
of the Prime Minister. Thai kings exercise executive powers through
16
the cabinet headed by a prime minister, and judicial powers through
the law courts. While not directly involved in Thailand’s political
life, the King exerts a strong moral influence on carefully selected
issues.
His Majesty the King was born in Cambridge, Massachusetts on
December 5, 1927. Married to Queen Sirikit, King Bhumibol is the
father of four grown children. Like the King, all members of His
royal family perform duties in the interest and welfare of the Thai
people.
Known to many as the «working monarch», King Bhumibol
travels the remote rural areas of the vast reaches of His country to
develop more complete and first hand understanding of the assets
and hardships of His subjects. During His time on the throne, His
Majesty has launched a multitude of development projects alleviat
ing disease, promoting a better rural economy, and preserving and
protecting Thailand’s natural environment. A large number of proj
ects result from His Majesty’s own experimentation and are funded
from His private funds. Projects showing satisfactory results are
passed on to the Government for further development.
During the 50 years of King Bhumibol’s reign, Thailand has
enjoyed enviable economic growth. With its agrarian base and
dynamic private sector as its bedrock, Thailand boasts a complex
export led economy which embraces the latest technologies and
includes tourism, agriculture, manufacturing, minerals, and com
munications.
MYANMAR
Myanmar [‘mjnmə] n.Union of, official name of Burma (см.
рис. 3–4, стр. 246).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 9
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ êàðòó ñòðàíû (ñì. ðèñ. 4, ñòð. 246), íàéäèòå ðóññêèå
ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ íàçâàíèé ãîðîäîâ:
17
Myitkyina; Henzada; Bhamo; Tavoy; Pakokku; Mandalay; Loi
kaw; Taunggyi; Yangon; Pegu; Toungoo; Moulmein
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 10
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
ü
Îáðàòèòå âíèìàíèå íà ëåêñè÷åñêèå ïðèåìû ïåðåâîäà (òðàíñêðèïöèþ, êàëüêèðîâàíèå è äð.).
ü
Êàêèå âèäû êîìïðåññèè âû èñïîëüçóåòå?
ÌÜßÍÌÀ, (см. рис. 4, стр. 246) Союз Мьянма (бывшая
Бирма), государство в Юго Восточной Азии. Площадь
676 577 кв. км. Численность населения 46,8 млн человек
(1997). На западе омывается водами Бенгальского залива и
граничит с Бангладеш и Индией, на севере и северо востоке —
с Тибетским автономным районом и провинцией Юньнань
(Китай), на востоке — с Лаосом и Таиландом. Столица Янгон
(бывш. Рангун) расположена на восточном краю дельты Ира
вади. Эта река, текущая с севера на юг, служит главной транс
портной артерией и источником влаги для орошения полей.
Мьянма обладает большими резервами неосвоенных земель,
богатыми лесными и минеральными ресурсами. Мьянма —
один из центров буддийской культуры.
Êëèìàò. Высокие горы на севере препятствуют проник
новению на ее территорию холодных воздушных масс из
Центральной Азии, поэтому на большей части страны преоб
ладает тропический и субтропический климат, формирую
щийся под влиянием муссонов. Выделяются три сезона:
влажный, длящийся с конца мая по конец октября; прохлад
ный — с конца октября по середину февраля и жаркий — с
середины февраля по конец мая. На низменностях высокие
температуры воздуха наблюдаются круглый год, так что по
нятие «прохладный» сугубо относительное. В Янгоне в янва
ре средняя месячная температура составляет 24°С, летом
18
столбик термометра никогда не поднимается выше 41°С.
Наибольшее значение имеет влажный сезон, который длит
ся с мая по октябрь с максимумом осадков в июле. Количе
ство осадков варьирует в зависимости от высоты и экспози
ции склонов по отношению к влагонесущим муссонным ве
трам, дующим с юго запада.
Íàñåëåíèå. Демографическая характеристика. В 1997 в
Мьянме проживало 46,8 млн человек. Демографический рост
в середине 1990 х годов исчислялся в 2% ежегодно, детская
смертность составляла 81%, продолжительность жизни для
женщин — 59, а для мужчин — 56 лет.
Ðàçìåùåíèå íàñåëåíèÿ. Мьянма — страна деревень и не
больших городов. В середине 1990 х годов уровень урбаниза
ции достигал всего 24%. Более половины населения занято в
сельском хозяйстве. Поэтому наиболее заселены районы с
лучшими пахотными землями. Самая высокая плотность на
селения — в дельте Иравади и на равнинах Сухого пояса в цен
тральной части страны (ок. 100 человек на 1 кв. км).
Êîíôåññèîíàëüíûé ñîñòàâ íàñåëåíèÿ. Около 89% бирман
цев — буддисты. Примерно 5% всего населения — анимисты.
Около 4% населения — мусульмане, 5% — христиане, среди
которых много каренов. Религиозная деятельность христиан
ской общины, особенно миссионеров, в 1965–1966 сущест
венно ограничивалась властями. Выходцы из Индии и Китая
придерживаются религии своих предков.
Ãîðîäà Мьянмы немногочисленны, крупных городов ма
ло. Выделяется столица Рангун, в 1989 переименованная в Ян
гон. В конце 1990 х годов ориентировочные оценки численно
сти населения города колебались от 3,8 до 4,0 млн человек.
Второй по численности населения город — Мандалай, за ним
следует Моламьяйн.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 11
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå â ñëîâàðå àíãëèéñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ê ñëåäóþùèì
ñëîâàì è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì:
19
играть выдающуюся роль —
положить начало —
движение неприсоединения —
оказаться под огнем критики —
расправа с диссидентами —
последовало официальное заявление —
осудить военный режим —
Комиссия по правам человека ООН —
нарушение прав человека —
объявить о запрете —
возобновить режим санкций против военной хунты —
свобода вероисповедания—
национальные меньшинства —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 12
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëåäóþùèå ôðàçû, èñïîëüçóÿ ïðèåìû êîìïðåññèè
òåêñòà (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Êàêèå âèäû êîìïðåññèè âû ïðèìåíèëè?
Комиссия по правам человека ООН опубликовала специ
альный отчет, в котором указывала на серьезные нарушения
прав граждан в Мьянме.
В 1997 президент США Б. Клинтон объявил о запрете для
американских граждан вкладывать деньги в предприятия
Мьянмы.
Правительство объявило, что разрешает газеты лишь на
бирманском и английском языках, подвергая тем самым на
циональные меньшинства дискриминации.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 13
ü
Äàéòå àíãëèéñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ íàçâàíèé îðãàíèçàöèé:
ООН —
Всемирный банк —
20
Международный валютный фонд —
Всемирная торговая организация —
Международная группа по защите прав человека —
Европейский cоюз —
«Эмнести интернешнл» —
«Эйша уотч» —
ÃÎÑÓÄÀÐÑÒÂÅÍÍÛÉ ÑÒÐÎÉ È ÏÎËÈÒÈÊÀ
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå, çàïèøèòå è ïðàâèëüíî ïðîèçíåñèòå âñþ
ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó (èíîñòðàííûå èìåíà, íàçâàíèÿ ñòðàí è
îðãàíèçàöèé è ò.ä.), âñòðå÷àþùóþñÿ â òåêñòå.
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
Ìåæäóíàðîäíûå îòíîøåíèÿ. Мьянма является членом
ООН, Всемирного банка, Международного валютного фонда,
Всемирной торговой организации и других международных
организаций. В 1955 У Ну сыграл выдающуюся роль наряду с
индийским премьер министром Неру, главой китайского пра
вительства Чжоу Эньлаем, президентом Египта Абдель Насе
ром, президентом Индонезии Сукарно и президентом Юго
славии Тито в проведении Бандунгской конференции, поло
жившей начало движению неприсоединения. Страна
оказалась под огнем критики в 1988, после расправы с дисси
дентами, преимущественно студентами, и последовавших ре
прессий. Важные программы иностранной помощи были пре
кращены или ограничены, последовали официальные заявле
ния таких организаций, как «Эмнести интернешнл», «Эйша
уотч» и Международной группы по защите прав человека, ко
торые осудили военный режим и обвинили его в совершении
жестоких и беззаконных деяний. В марте 1991 комиссия по
правам человека ООН опубликовала специальный отчет, в ко
тором указывала на серьезные нарушения прав граждан в
Мьянме. В 1997 президент США Б. Клинтон объявил о запре
те для американских граждан вкладывать деньги в предприя
21
тия Мьянмы, а Европейский Союз возобновил режим санк
ций против военной хунты. Однако Мьянма получила под
держку от правительств соседних Таиланда и Китая. Лесозаго
товительные компании, связанные с армией, получили разре
шение на практически неограниченные заготовки древесины
тика, а СВГП расходовал значительную часть этих средств на
импорт военной техники из Китая.
Ðåëèãèÿ. 85% всего населения придерживаются буддизма.
Идеи буддизма нашли отражение в разработанной после 1962
официальной государственной доктрине «Бирманский путь к
социализму». Однако свобода вероисповедания формально
гарантирована конституцией 1974.
Ïå÷àòü. До 1962 в стране существовала активная и сравни
тельно свободная пресса. При генерале Не Вине были введены
ограничения печати. Правительство объявило, что разрешает
газеты лишь на бирманском и английском языках, подвергая
тем самым национальные меньшинства дискриминации. За
прету подверглись англоязычные газеты, издававшиеся иност
ранцами, и периодические издания политических партий, за
исключением Партии бирманской социалистической про
граммы. Государство монополизировало телекоммуникации,
радиовещание и прессу, которые служат главными орудиями
пропаганды для режима. Материалы каждого издания подвер
гаются государственной цензуре. Свободную от официально
го контроля информацию большинство жителей страны полу
чают, слушая по радио передачи Би би си и «Голоса Америки».
MALAYSIA
(ñì. ðèñ. 5–6, ñòð. 247)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 14
ü
22
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà öèôðîâîé ìàòåðèàë (÷èñëàì, îáîçíà÷àþùèì ïëîùàäü, ïðåäøåñòâóþò ÷èñëà, îáîçíà÷àþùèå íàñåëåíèå).
Malaysia [mə’leiziə] n.1. a constitutional monarchy in SE
Asia: a federation, comprising the former British territories of
Malaya, Sabah, and Sarawak: member of the Commonwealth of
Nations. 12,100,000; 126,310 sq. mi. (327,143 sq. km) . Cap.: Kuala
Lumpur. 2. See Malay Archipelago.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 15
ü
Èçó÷èòå ñëîâàðü.
Vocabulary 3
give one’s formal recog
nition to smb/smth
emergency government
parliamentary rule
to succeed smb as smb
to take over
to make considerable
progress towards (these)
ends
to assert the interests of
smb/smth
the ruling coalition (of
parties)
non aligned countries
to resume smth
официально признать
кризисное правительство
парламентское правление
сменить кого л. на посту (в качестве)
1. принимать (должность и т.п.) от дру
гого; 2. вступать во владение (вместо
другого лица); 3. наследовать
(кому л. — from)
добиться значительных успехов в до
стижении (этих) целей
1. утверждать, заявлять, объявлять, дек
ларировать, провозглашать; 2. обеспе
чивать, отстаивать, защищать (свои
права и т. п.), доказывать
правящая коалиция
неприсоединившиеся страны
1. возобновлять, продолжать (после пе
рерыва), начинать снова; 2. а) получать
обратно, возвращаться на старую пози
цию; б) обретать вновь; 3. подводить
итог, резюмировать
23
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 16
ü
Äàéòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ âûðàæåíèé:
политика конфронтации —
land frontiers —
bring to an end —
сохранить большинство в парламенте —
to lose one’s two thirds majority —
communal tensions —
the New Economic Policy —
политика, целью которой является (политика, направлен
ная на) —
to eradicate poverty regardless of race —
to eliminate the identification of occupation with race —
процветание —
the Look East Policy —
oil refinery —
господствовать на политической арене —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 17
ü
Äàéòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëîâ POLICY è POLITICS.
ü
Îáúÿñíèòå ðàçíèöó â çíà÷åíèè ýòèõ ñëîâ.
ü
Êàê îíà îòðàæåíà â ïåðåâîäå?
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëåäóþùèå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ:
Malaysia established a more independent foreign policy, help
ing found ASEAN in 1967, recognising Communist China in 1974,
and identifying the nation with the non aligned countries of the
Third World.
The ruling coalition of parties in the Barisan Nasional contin
ues to dominate the political arena but a number of developments,
including the coming of age of a new generation of voters, suggest
24
that there may be changes in the traditional pattern of Malaysian
politics.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 18
ü
Çàïèøèòå äâà ïðåäëîæåíèÿ, ïðèâåäåííûå íèæå, â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè.
Confrontation was finally brought to an end by an agreement
signed in Bangkok in 1966.
In the meantime, however, (i.e. in 1965) Singapore ceased to be a
member of the Malaysian federation and became an independent state.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 19
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå, êàêèå ëåêñè÷åñêèå òðóäíîñòè âñòðå÷àþòñÿ â ñëåäóþùèõ ïðåäëîæåíèÿõ.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ.
à) Polysemous words
The 1980s have brought new political directions and economic
challenges.
These new arrangements met with considerable Malaysian
opposition.
In the meantime slower constitutional progress had been taking
place under British colonial rule in Singapore, Sarawak and Sabah.
In 1874 the British took the first steps towards bringing the
peninsular States under their direct supervision when they imposed
the Pangkor Treaty on the rulers of Perak and made similar arrange
ments in Selangor.
The ruling coalition of parties in the Barisan Nasional contin
ues to dominate the political arena but a number of developments,
including the coming of age of a new generation of voters, suggest
that there may be changes in the traditional pattern of Malaysian
politics.
25
b) Ëîæíûå äðóçüÿ ïåðåâîä÷èêà / Çàìåñòèòåëè
The administration of Dato’ Seri Dr. Mahathir Mohamad
(1981) has seen the search for new sources of support and develop
ment (the Look East Policy), the initiation of a bold policy of
heavy industrialization (the national car, steel industry and oil
refineries) and an aggressive foreign policy asserting the interests
of the undeveloped South versus those of the developed nations of
the north.
Consequently, on 16 September 1963, Malaysia was formally
promulgated, although without Brunei which by this time had
declined to join.
The first few years of Malaysia were taken up by a serious chal
lenge to its survival, mainly from Indonesia whose policy of con
frontation took the form of armed attacks on the Peninsula and
across the land frontiers of Sabah and Sarawak.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 20
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå, êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ôîðìû ïðåäñòàâëÿþò
òðóäíîñòè äëÿ ïåðåâîäà â ñëåäóþùèõ ïðåäëîæåíèÿõ.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå, âûïîëíÿÿ íåîáõîäèìûå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè.
Pronouns
The first Malay settlers (the Proto Malays) had probably estab
lished themselves here by 1000 BC. This movements were followed
by other waves of immigrants (the Deutero Malays) over the next
few centuries, who came equipped with more advanced farming
techniques and new knowledge of metals.
Although Chinese contacts started as early as, if not predating
those of India, it was the Hindu and Buddhist elements of Indian
culture which made a major impact on the region.
Although the culture of the Malays in particular came to be
overlaid by Hinduism and then pervaded by Islam, elements of this
basic culture still persist.
26
The most tangible evidence of the Hindu Buddhist period in
Malaysian history is now to be found in the temple sites of Lembah
Bujang and Kuala Merbok in Kedah.
Emphatic structures, ellipsis
Brought primary by Indian and Arab traders, there is evidence
of the presence of the new religion in the region as early as the thir
teenth century.
Once established as the religion of the Malays, Islam profound
ly affected Malay society and the Malay way of life.
Singapore became a separate crown colony and so did both
Sarawak and British north Borneo in place of the former Brooke and
Chartered Company regimes.
Non-finite forms
Pulau Pinang and Melaka were joined with the Malay States of
the Peninsular to form a new Malay Union.
Over a period of a thousand years these influences gradually
made themselves be felt, and have left their marks in the native lan
guage, literature and social custom.
In the seven general elections, which have been held since the
formation of Malaysia (the most recent being in 1990), the ruling
coalition of political parties — formerly the Alliance, but expanded
in 1971 to become the Barisan Nasional — has easily retained its
majority in parliament.
MALAYSIA, 1963 — …
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
The first few years of Malaysia were taken up by a serious chal
lenge to its survival, mainly from Indonesia whose policy of con
frontation took the form of armed attacks on the Peninsula and
across the land frontiers of Sabah and Sarawak. Confrontation was
finally brought to an end by an agreement signed in Bangkok in
1966, while the Philippines gave its formal recognition to Malaysia
27
the same year. In the meantime, however, (i.e. in 1965) Singapore
ceased to be a member of the Malaysian federation and became an
independent state.
In the seven general elections, which have been held since the for
mation of Malaysia (the most recent being in 1990), the ruling coali
tion of political parties — formerly the Alliance, but expanded in 1971
to become the Barisan Nasional — has easily retained its majority in
parliament. However, in 1969 for the first and up till now the only time,
the coalition lost its overall two thirds majority. Communal tensions
resulted in the 13 May 1969 incident in Kuala Lumpur, leading to the
establishment of an emergency government the National Operations
Council. Parliamentary rule was resumed in 1971. Since then the
broad aim of the administration has been the fulfilment of the New
Economic Policy, which is designed to eradicate poverty regardless of
race, and to eliminate the identification of occupation with race.
The economic prosperity achieved in the 1970s enabled the
administration of Tun Abdul Razak, who succeeded Tunku Abdul
Rahman as premier in 1970, and Tun Hussein Onn, who took over
on the death of Tun Razak in 1976, to make considerable progress
towards these ends. At the same time, Malaysia established a more
independent foreign policy, helping found ASEAN in 1967, recog
nising Communist China in 1974, and identifying the nation with
the non aligned countries of the Third World. The 1980s have
brought new political directions and economic challenges. The
administration of Dato’ Seri Dr. Mahathir Mohamad (1981) has
seen the search for new sources of support and development (the
Look East Policy), the initiation of a bold policy of heavy industri
alisation (the national car, steel industry and oil refineries) and an
aggressive foreign policy asserting the interests of the undeveloped
South versus those of the developed nations of the North. The rul
ing coalition of parties in the Barisan Nasional continues to domi
nate the political arena but a number of developments, including the
coming of age of a new generation of voters, suggest that there may
be changes in the traditional pattern of Malaysian politics.
Source from Information Malaysia 1997 Yearbook17.12.96 11:21
28
INDONESIA
(ñì. ðèñ. 7–8, ñòð. 248)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 21
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà öèôðîâîé ìàòåðèàë (÷èñëàì, îáîçíà÷àþùèì ïëîùàäü, ïðåäøåñòâóþò ÷èñëà, îáîçíà÷àþùèå íàñåëåíèå).
Indonesia [,ində(u)’nzjə],[,ində(u)’nə] n.1. See East
Indies (def. 1) 2. Republic of. Formerly, Netherlands East Indies,
Dutch East Indies, a republic in the Malay Archipelago consisting of
13,677 islands, including Sumatra, Java, Sulawesi, the S. part of
Borneo, the W. part of New Guinea, the Moluccas, the Lesser Sunda
Islands, Bali, and Madura: gained independence from the Netherlands
in 1949. 179,100,000; 741,098 sq. mi. (1,919,443 sq. km). Cap.: Jakarta.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 22
ü
Èçó÷èòå ñëîâàðü.
Vocabulary 4
a constraint on smth
to convey smth
to abide by smth
1. принуждение; оказывание давления
(на кого л., что л.); 2. а) принужден
ность, стеснение, стеснительность;
б) напряженность, скованность, неес
тественность
выражать, передавать (идею, смысл и
т.п.), (юр.) передавать имущество, пра
во (to)
1. оставаться верным, неизменным;
придерживаться; выполнять (обеща
ния); 2. следовать чему л., выполнять
что л.; действовать в соответствии с
чем л.; придерживаться чего л.; 3. при
нимать что л. во внимание; (быть вы
нужденным) считаться с чем л.
29
adherence to smth
to convene (a meeting)
to cope with smth
the concept of (national
and regional) resilience
1. приверженность, верность; 2. строгое
соблюдение (правил, принципов и т. п.)
созывать, собирать (заседание, встре
чу), собираться (о съезде и т.п.)
справиться, выдержать, совладать
концепция (национальной и регио
нальной) устойчивости (к внешним
воздействиям)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 23
ü
Äàéòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé, ñíà÷àëà ñ
îïîðîé íà òåêñò, çàòåì íà ñëóõ.
a)
institutional constraints —
under the umbrella of smth —
to postpone smb’s membership —
to convey the impression that —
to claim the right to do smth —
rules of the game —
salutary situation —
b)
the dream of «One Southeast Asia» —
co premiers —
Post Cold War Southeast Asia —
the 1991 Paris Pease Agreement —
a Zone of Peace Freedom and Neutrality (ZOPFAN) —
the (1976) Treaty of Amity and Cooperation (TAC) —
the Treaty on the Establishment of a Southeast Asian Nuclear
Weapon Free Zone (SEANWFZ) —
the ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF) —
ASEAN’s Dialogue Partner Countries —
Consultative Partner —
observer countries —
the AEAN Free Trade Area (AFTA) —
Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) —
30
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 24
ü
Ðàñøèôðóéòå ñëåäóþùèå ñîêðàùåíèÿ; äàéòå èõ ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû.
ASEAN, ZOPFAN, TAC, SEANWFZ, ARF, AFTA, APEC
ASEAN’S CONTRIBUTION TO INTERNATIONAL SECURITY
ü
Ïðîñëóøàéòå òåêñò â ÷òåíèè ïðåïîäàâàòåëÿ.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå íåîáõîäèìûå çàìåòêè, èñïîëüçóÿ äèàãîíàëüíóþ çàïèñü è çíàêè ñêîðîïèñè (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå òåêñò.
Note: This paper contains my personal views and does not represent my
Indonesian Government views.
The outbreak of the Cambodian crisis has served as a constraint
on the fulfillment of the dream of “One Southeast Asia” under the
umbrella of ASEAN regional cooperation. Indeed, that crisis forced
ASEAN to postpone Cambodian membership in the association for
a number of reasons. Firstly, ASEAN clearly does not want to be
seen as supporting one of the conflicting parties. Admitting
Cambodia under the ‘present circumstances would inevitably con
vey the impression that ASEAN has recognized Hun Sen as the de
facto government of the country. The decision to postpone
Cambodia’s membership was, therefore, intended to demonstrate
the neutral position of ASEAN in the conflict. ASEAN has made it
clear that it continues to recognize both Hun Sen and Norodom
Ranariddh as co premiers of the country.
Secondly, the decision had to be taken in order to avoid the pos
sibility of ASEAN becoming a new element in the Cambodian con
flict and vice versa. It is very likely that Him Sen and Ranariddh
would each have claimed the right to represent Cambodia in the
association, making ASEAN one of the focal points in a contest for
31
recognition between the two leaders ASEAN itself could not afford
to bring the Cambodian conflict into its own house for it would
complicate not only ASEAN diplomatic efforts to help find a solu
tion to the crisis, but also its role in creating a more predictable and
stable regional order in post Cold War Southeast Asia.
Thirdly, ASEAN’s decision indirectly indicates the associa
tion’s reluctance to accept the use of force by any Cambodian party
in imposing a political change. Here, ASEAN insists that the two
conflicting parties should abide by the 1991 Paris Peace Agreement
as the main mechanism for settling the remaining political problems
in that country. This clearly indicates ASEAN’s adherence to the
need to respect an international agreement. The current crisis in
Cambodia, regardless of the question of who provoked whom, con
stitutes a clear violation of that agreement. In this context, ASEAN
has clearly maintained that a sensible peaceful settlement should be
based on the Paris Peace Agreement.
Finally, it is also imperative for ASEAN to demonstrate that it is
capable of deciding its own destiny. The decision conveys two
important messages to the outside world. Firstly, it suggests
ASEAN’s willingness and capability to reverse its previous decision
to admit Cambodia, Laos, Myanmar simultaneously in July 1997
when the need to do so arose, without any pressure from outside.
Secondly, it seems that through this decision ASEAN wants to make
it clear that prospective member should conform to ASEAN’s own
“rules of the game” before joining the association. Indeed,
ASEAN’s response to the Cambodian crisis has been unprecedent
ed. ASEAN Foreign Ministers, in this regard, managed at short
notice to convene a special meeting in Kuala Lumpur to address the
problem and quickly readied a unanimous decision.
The decision also demonstrates the association’s growing abili
ty to deal with a crisis in an appropriate way. ASEAN’s quick reac
tion constitutes an advance in the decision making process, which is
often characterised by institutional constraints. This salutary situa
tion is due to ASEAN’s basic approach to peace and security, which
is based on a comprehensive idea of security embracing not only the
military dimensions, but also the political, economic and socio cul
32
tural aspect of security. ASEAN is convinced that the best way to
ensure security is to develop, separately as individual nations and
jointly as a regional organization, the political, economic and socio
cultural strengths which, apart from military capability, make up a
nation’s true capability to cope with any internal or external securi
ty threat. This is the concept of national and regional resilience,
which has guided much of the work of ASEAN.
Since the concept of resilience is largely an internal directed
approach, logically it should be complemented by an externally
directed approach. This is the concept of a Zone of Peace, Freedom
and Neutrality (ZOPFAN) in Southeast Asia as the blueprint of a
code of conduct governing relations among the states within the
zone as well as those outside it. It envisions the states in the zone as
well as the outside powers committing themselves to a set of
restraints necessary to ensure peace and forestall armed conflicts.
When all concerned states have committed themselves to these
restraints, it would be entirely unnecessary for the major powers to
resort to military intervention and the regional states would have no
cause to ever again invite or provoke major power intervention in
their bilateral problems. Although ZOPFAN has not yet become a
reality due to Cambodian crisis, some of its elements have already
been incorporated in the 1976 Treaty of Amity and Cooperation
(TAC) to which all ASEAN countries, Cambodia and Papua New
Guinea have subscribed. Non Southeast Asians powers, who wish to
associate themselves with the principles and purposes of the TAC,
will soon be able to do so as the Treaty is opened for accession.
All ten Southeast Asian nations considerably advanced the
cause of disarmament and peace when in 1995 they signed the
Treaty on the establishment of a Southeast Asian Nuclear Weapon
Free Zone (SEANWFZ). ASEAN senior officials are now working
feverishly so that the Treaty would become a much more effective
instrument of peace if the nuclear powers endorsed it by acceding to
its protocol. As it is now, however, it has already helped make the
region appreciably safer from nuclear war.
Earlier, in 1994, ASEAN launched a major exercise in preven
tive diplomacy, the ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF). The purpose of
33
the ARF is to ensure that through dialogue and consultation, strate
gic change in the region could be managed in such a way that a sta
ble relationship among the major powers as well the regional powers
can evolve peacefully over the next decade. Besides the ASEAN
countries, ARF participants comprise ASEAN’s Dialogue Partner
Countries, which include Russian Federation, Consultative Partner
and Observer countries. Today the ARF is undertaking a wide range
of confidence building measures that will make the security doc
trines and postures of the countries involved much more transpar
ent. Indeed, the ARF process does not only prevent disastrous mis
calculations but it also positively builds goodwill and trust among
the participating states.
Since the beginning, ASEAN was also developing as a regional
association for economic and socio cultural cooperation These
remain principal spheres of ASEAN activity even today. As the organ
ization gained in confidence, intra ASEAN economic cooperation
began to be complemented with economic cooperation with other
countries and other regional organizations. One of ASEAN’s major
contributions toward the achievement of free trade in the region is its
current determined endeavors to establish the ASEAN Free Trade
Area (AFTA) by the year 2003. Since long before ASEAN undertook
the pursuit of AFTA, ASEAN have always been very much aware of the
growing interdependence and globalization of the world economy.
Fortunately, Australia in 1989 was taking the initiative in organizing a
consultative forum that would be called Asia Pacific Economic
Cooperation (APEC). The timing was perfect and ASEAN countries
at once indicated their readiness to participate in the forum.
Furthermore, mainly since 1996, ASEAN cooperation in sci
ence and technology, culture and information, social development,
and drugs and narcotics control has been intensified. The focus of
the Plans of Action for these cooperative have been sharpened, and
a theme “Shared prosperity through human development, techno
logical competitiveness, and social cohesiveness” was adopted as a
framework for creating a caring, cohesive and technologically com
petitive ASEAN society that is able to face the challenges and seize
the opportunities of the next century.
34
Considering all of these, the ARF and APEC, together with
others processes and arrangements in which ASEAN is involved,
such as the SEANWFZ, the AFTA, the TAC, and the Plans of
Action for functional cooperation support and complement each
other and form a vital security web in Asia Pacific region. Therefore,
due to its involvement and contributions to global stability and eco
nomic development, ASEAN has been cited in global forums as one
of the most successful sub regional organizations in the world today.
The paper was presented by Partogi J. Sainosir, Third Secretary Embassy
of the Republic of Indonesia — Moscow at the International Conference
“ASEAN — 30 years. Achievements and Prospects” organized by Moscow
State Institute of International Relations of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs
of Russia Federation
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 25
ü
Ïîâòîðèòå ñëåäóþùèå ðÿäû ÷èñåë âñëåä çà ïðåïîäàâàòåëåì:
a) íà ðóññêîì ÿçûêå;
b) íà àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå.
38; 126; 570; 1946
27; 300; 609; 1959
91; 287; 500; 1965
87; 110; 297; 1963
69; 104; 866; 1910
14; 326; 708; 1895
38; 103; 995; 1935
34; 542; 600; 1948
36; 114; 830; 1938
94; 416; 795; 1898
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 26
ü
Ñëóøàÿ â ÷òåíèè ïðåïîäàâàòåëÿ ðÿäû ÷èñåë èç ïðåäûäóùåãî
óïðàæíåíèÿ, ïåðåâåäèòå èõ:
35
a) ñ ðóññêîãî ÿçûêà íà àíãëèéñêèé;
b) ñ àíãëèéñêîãî íà ðóññêèé.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 27
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà öèôðîâîé ìàòåðèàë (÷èñëàì, îáîçíà÷àþùèì ïëîùàäü, ïðåäøåñòâóþò ÷èñëà, îáîçíà÷àþùèå íàñåëåíèå).
Singapore [,sigə’p] n.1. an island on the Strait of Singapore,
off the S. tip of the Malay Peninsula. 2. an independent republic
comprising this island and a few adjacent islets: member of the
Commonwealth of Nations; formerly a British crown colony (1946–
59) and member of the federation of Malaysia (1963–65). 2,300,000;
220 sq. mi. (570 sq. km). Cap.: Singapore. 3. a seaport in and the capi
tal of this republic. 1,400,000. — Sin gaopo reoan, n., adj.
Vietnam [’vjet’nm], [’vjet’nm] n.1. Official name,
Socialist Republic of Vietnam. a country in SE Asia, comprising the
former states of Annam, Tonkin, and Cochin China: formerly part
of French Indochina; divided into North Vietnam and South
Vietnam during the Vietnam War but now reunified. 49,200,000;
126,104 sq. mi. (326,609 sq. km). Cap.: Hanoi. Cf. North Vietnam,
South Vietnam. 2. See Vietnam War.
Brunei [br ’nei] n.a sultanate under British protection on the
NW coast of Borneo: formerly a British protectorate; gained inde
pendence 1984. 235,000; 2220 sq. mi. (5750 sq. km). Cap.: Bandar
Seri Begawan. Official name, Brunei — Daressalam, Dar es Salaam
[’dressə’lm] — Bruonei an, adj., n.
Philippines [‘filipnz] n. (used with a pl. v.) an archipelago of
7083 islands in the Pacific, SE of China: formerly (1898–1946)
under the guardianship of the U.S.; now an independent republic.
48,098,460; 114,830 sq. mi. (297,410 sq. km). Cap.: Manila. Also
called Philippine Islands. Formerly (1935 46), Commonwealth of
the Philippines. Official name, Republic of the Philippines.
36
Laos [‘lauz], [‘leioz] n.a country in SE Asia: formerly part of
French Indochina. 2,900,000; 91,500 sq. mi. (236,985 sq. km).
Cap.: Vientiane.
Cambodia [km’bəudiə] n.a republic in SE Asia: formerly part
of French Indochina. 8,110,000; 69,866 sq. mi. (180,953 sq. km).
Cap.: Phnom Penh. Formerly, People’s Republic of Kampuchea,
Khmer Republic.
China [‘ ainə] n.1. People’s Republic of, a country in E. Asia.
1,008,175,288; 3,691,502 sq. mi. (9,560,990 sq. km). Cap.: Beijing.
2. Republic of. Also called Nationalist China. a republic consisting
mainly of the island of Taiwan off the SE coast of mainland China:
under Nationalist control since 1948 but claimed by the People’s
Republic of China. 16,100,000; 13,885 sq. mi. (35,960 sq. km).
Cap.: Taipei.
Taiwan [tai’wn] n. Wade Giles, Pinyin. a Chinese island sep
arated from the SE coast of China by Taiwan Strait: a possession of
Japan 1895 1945; restored to China 1945; seat of the Republic of
China since 1949. Cap.: Taipei. Also called Formosa.
Australia [ɔ’streiliə] n.1. a continent SE of Asia, between the
Indian and the Pacific oceans. 14,576,330; 2,948,366 sq. mi.
(7,636,270 sq. km). 2. Commonwealth of, a member of the
Commonwealth of Nations, consisting of the federated states and
territories of Australia and Tasmania. 14,995,287; 2,974,581 sq. mi.
(7,704,165 sq. km). Cap.: Canberra.
New Zealand [‘nj ’zlənd] a country in the S. Pacific, SE of
Australia, consisting of North Island, South Island, and adjacent
small islands: a member of the Commonwealth of Nations.
3,129,383; 103,416 sq. mi. (267,845 sq. km). Cap.: Wellington. —
New Zea landoer.
Japan [ ə’pn] n.1. a constitutional monarchy on a chain of
islands off the E. coast of Asia: main islands, Hokkaido, Honshu,
37
Kyushu, and Shikoku. 120,020,000; 141,529 sq. mi. (366,560 sq.
km). Cap.: Tokyo. Japanese, Nihon, Nippon. 2. Sea of, the part of
the Pacific Ocean between Japan and mainland Asia. Japan.
Japanese.
Korea [kə’riə] n.1. a former country in E. Asia, on a peninsula
SE of Manchuria and between the Sea of Japan and the Yellow
Sea: a kingdom prior to 1910; under Japanese rule 1910–45; now
divided at 38° N. into North Korea and South Korea. Cf. Korean
War. 2. Democratic People’s Republic of, official name of North
Korea. 3. Republic of, official name of South Korea. Cf. North
Korea, South Korea.
North Korea a country in E. Asia: formed 1948 after the divi
sion of the former country of Korea at 38° N. 16,000,000; 50,000 sq.
mi. (129,500 sq. km). Cap.: Pyongyang. Cf. Korea. Official name,
Democratic People’s Republic of Korea. — North Kore an. South
Korea a country in E Asia: formed 1948 after the division of the for
mer country of Korea at 38° N. 34,708,542; 36,600 sq. mi. (94,795
sq. km). Cap.: Seoul. Cf. Korea. Official name, Republic of Korea. —
South Kore an.
2. ÏÎËÈÒÈÊÀ È ÈÑÒÎÐÈß ÑÒÐÀÍ ACEAH
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 28
ü
Âûó÷èòå ñëåäóþùèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû è ïðèãîòîâüòåñü ê èõ áûñòðîìó óñòíîìó ïåðåâîäó.
(ASEAN [‘siən]) Association of
South East Asian Nations
The (Bali) Treaty of Amity and
Cooperation in Southeast Asia.
38
Ассоциация стран государств
Юго Восточной Азии
Договор о Дружбе и Сотрудни
честве в Юго Восточной Азии
(на о. Бали в 1976)
SAARK (South Asia Association
of Regional Cooperation)
EAGA (East Asean Growth
Area)
AFTA ASEAN Free Trade Area
ARF ASEAN Regional Forum
The Paris Peace Agreement
The 1991 Paris International
Conference on Cambodia.
ZOPFAN — the concept of a
Zone of Peace, Freedom and
Neutrality (in South East Asia)
the Pacific Rim
The 5th ASEAN Summit
The treaty on a Non Nuclear
Weapon Zone in S.E. Asia
СААРК Ассоциация региональ
ного сотрудничества (стран)
Южной Азии (с 1986)
ВАЗР Восточно Асеановская
зона развития/роста.
АФТА Асеановская зона свобод
ной торговли
АРФ Ассоциация Асеановского
регионального форума по про
блемам безопасности или Асеа
новский региональный форум
Парижское мирное соглашение
Международная Парижская
конференция (1991)
ЗОПФАН (концепция зоны ми
ра, свободы и нейтралитета
1971)
страны Азиатско Тихоокеан
ского региона (АТР)
5 я встреча в верхах стран СЕ
АН (14–15 дек. 1995, Бангкок)
Договор о зоне, свободной от
ядерного оружия (Thailand 1996)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 29
ü
Ñèíõðîííî ïîâòîðèòå, à ïîòîì ïåðåâåäèòå.
à)
Singaporean, Malay, Indonesian, Vietnamese; Chinese, Thai,
Malays, Filipinos, Laotian, Cambodians, Kampuchean (Khmer);
Indochina, Vietnam, Brunei, Indonesia, Malaysia, Cambodia
(Kampuchea), Laos, the Philippines, Singapore, Vietnam,
Myanmar, Papua New Guinea, Thailand; Manila, Jakarta, Hanoi,
Bangkok, Kuala Lumpur, Bandar Seri Begawan, Phnom Penh.
Filipinos (an Indo Polynesian ethnic grouping) are 95% of the
Philippines population. Pilipino is the official language of the
Philippines. It is based on Tagalog.
39
b)
Cингапурец, малаец, китаец, лаосец, тайцы, филиппин
цы, вьетнамцы, кампучийцы (кхмеры); Мьянма, Бали, Банг
кок, Манила, Пном Пень, Бандар Сери Бегаван, Бруней.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 30
ü
Èçó÷èòå ñî÷åòàåìîñòü ñëîâ SECURITY è PEACE.
security n. [‘safety’] 1. to ensure, provide ~ 2. to strengthen, tighten ~
3. to compromise; undermine ~ 4. collective; internal; maximum;
national; personal ~ (to compromise national ~) 5. ~ against
(~ against attack) 6. (misc.) a feeling, sense of ~ [‘system of insur
ance’] 7. social ~.
peace n. 1. to achieve, bring about ~ 2. to make ~ with 3. to negoti
ate (a) ~ with 4. to impose a ~ on 5. to keep the ~ 6. to break, disturb,
shatter the ~ 7. a durable, lasting, permanent; fragile ~ 8. ~ reigns.
9. at ~ with (we were at ~ with our neighbours) 10. in ~ (to live in ~)
11. (miscellaneous) a breach of the ~; ~ and quiet; a ~ march.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñíà÷àëà ñî÷åòàíèÿ ñëîâ, à çàòåì è ïðåäëîæåíèÿ,
èñïîëüçóÿ ïðèâåäåííûå âûðàæåíèÿ ñî ñëîâàìè SECURITY è
PEACE, áåçîïàñíîñòü è ìèð.
to ensure security —
to provide security —
to strengthen security —
to tighten security —
сохранить безопасность —
обеспечить безопасность —
поставить под угрозу безопасность страны —
подрывать безопасность —
to compromise national security —
in the interest of state/national security —
способствовать/содействовать безопасности —
40
укрепить безопасность —
обеспечить длительный мир —
вести переговоры о мире —
for security reasons —
maximum security measures —
предпринять все возможные меры безопасности —
поддерживать безопасность в регионе —
to undermine security —
Strict security measures were in force during the president’s
visit.
The terrorists somehow slipped through the tight security net.
Начавшийся Камбоджийский кризис 1997 года (The out
break of the 1997 Cambodian crisis) ïîäðûâàë áåçîïàñíîñòü и
ñòàâèë ïîä óãðîçó ìèð в Юго Восточном регионе.
Первое десятилетие деятельности АСЕАН связано с мера
ми по ñîçäàíèþ ñèñòåìû áåçîïàñíîñòè внутри самой организа
ции. Второе десятилетие в деятельности АСЕАН по îáåñïå÷åíèþ áåçîïàñíîñòè — это реакция Ассоциации на события в Ин
докитае и камбоджийскую проблему — involved ensuring
security within the Association itself.
ASEAN’s basic approach to peace and security is based on a
comprehensive idea of security, which embraces not only the mili
tary dimensions, but also the political, economic and socio cultural
aspect of security.
ASEAN maintains that the best way to ensure security is to
develop, separately as individual nations and jointly as a regional
organization, the political, economic and socio cultural strength,
which, apart from military capability, make up a nation’s true capa
bility to cope with any internal or external security threat.
ASEAN should continue with the important task of helping
maintaining regional peace and stability, and enhancing the econom
ic development and political stability of its members.
Recent years have seen some mutual security discussions.
41
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 31
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå ðóññêèå âàðèàíòû ïåðåâîäà ìåòàôîð ñ àíãëèéñêîãî ÿçûêà íà ðóññêèé (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Îáúÿñíèòå èñïîëüçîâàííûå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè.
ü
Âûáåðèòå ëó÷øèé âàðèàíò èëè ïðåäëîæèòå ñâîé.
ü
Îáîñíóéòå âàøå ðåøåíèå.
The seeds of a plan for regional cooperation were sown in the
early 1950s, as the scars of colonial conquest and exploitation had
imprinted a shared perception among Southeast Asian countries.
В начале 50 х годов, впервые возникает идея регионально
го сотрудничества, поскольку колониальное владычество и
эксплуатация одинаково повлияли на настроения в странах
Юго Восточной Азии (demetaphorization)
Ïî÷âà для разработки плана регионального сотрудничест
ва áûëà ïîäãîòîâëåíà (remetaphorization) в начале 1950 х годов,
поскольку îïûò прошлого колониального гнета и эксплуата
ции одинаково îòðàçèëñÿ (demetaphorization) на умонастрое
ниях в странах ЮВА.
В начале 50 х годов возникает благодатная почва для раз
работки плана регионального сотрудничества, поскольку по
сле колониального гнета и эксплуатации у стран ЮВА оста
лись одинаковые шрамы (metaphorization)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 32
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ, îáðàùàÿ âíèìàíèÿ íà ïåðåâîä àáñîëþòíûõ êîíñòðóêöèé.
ü
Êàêèì ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì ïðè¸ìîì âû âîñïîëüçóåòåñü ïðè ïåðåâîäå äàííûõ êîíñòðóêöèé? Îáúÿñíèòå ñâîé âûáîð (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèå).
ASEAN countries were amongst the founding members of
APEC, with a current membership of 18 regional countries.
42
With the establishment of the ASEAN Russia Fund (amount
ing to approximately US$500,000) by Russia, and the joint working
group on scientific and technological cooperation, interesting and
useful projects should emerge.
Chinese Prime Minister (PM) Li Peng noted that ASEAN ranks
as the fifth trading partner of China, with total trade amounting to
US$ 20bn.
The official language in Thailand is Thai, or Siamese, with
English being used as a universal second language.
Economically, despite current difficulties, ASEAN is confident
of its future, with growth forecast to reach between 7 and 8 percent
this year, bolstered by investment, exports and consumer spending.
The primacy of ethnic Malays has been built into the constitu
tion, with the offices of head of state and prime minister being open
only to this community.
A month later saw the establishment of Maphilindo, with its
membership (as the name suggests) made up of Malaysia, the
Philippines, and Indonesia.
Vietnam’s commercial links began to be established with
ASEAN states, with plans being made for Vietnam to join this
organization.
ASEAN: AN OUTLINED HISTORY
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
ü
Ê êàêîìó ïåðåâîä÷åñêîìó ïðèåìó âû ïðèáåãíèòå ïðè ïåðåâîäå
âûðàæåíèé (***) “The seeds of Unity/The seeds of a plan… were
sown…”?
Much of the world has seen the promotion and development of
supranational levels of organization during the past fifty years. The
preeminent and most successful example of these organizations has
been the European Community. Various other regions of the world—
North America, Africa, and Central America are examples—have
been experimenting with forms and arrangements aimed at econom
43
ic, political, social, and cultural frameworks of supranational scope.
Asia and the Pacific Rim have also been the scene of such efforts.
ASEAN, the Association of Southeast Asian Nations, was found
ed in 1967. It has managed to last for more than a quarter of a centu
ry with the support of its six members—Brunei, Indonesia, Malaysia,
the Philippines, Singapore, and Thailand. The seventh member
state—the erstwhile opponent,Vietnam— joined ASEAN in 1995.
The Seeds of Unity
(***) The seeds of a plan for regional cooperation were sown in
the early 1950s, as the scars of colonial conquest and exploitation
had imprinted a shared perception among Southeast Asian coun
tries. (Many current problems are, or were, a consequence of colo
nialism, in fact).
A Brief History
ASEAN’s history may be divided into three phases:
I. 1967 to 1977
This started with the foundation of ASEAN in 1967, a child of
the Cold War. The objective was to accelerate the economic
growth, social progress and cultural development of the region.
The initial members were Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines,
Singapore and Thailand. All five countries were facing common
threats of communist insurgencies. ASEAN wisely began with
low expectations and proceeded gradually. Frequent meetings
and consultations fostered the ASEAN practice of seeking con
sensus. Indonesia—the largest member—contributed greatly, as
its political culture was also based on consensus and dialogue
(called musyawarah and mufakat, in Indonesian).
II. 1978 to 1991
This period began with the fall of Indochina and the invasion of
Cambodia by Vietnam. ASEAN reacted to these political chal
44
lenges by convening the First ASEAN Summit (Bali, 1976). A
regional code of conduct, the Treaty of Amity and Cooperation
in South East Asia was signed. The Vietnamese invasion tested
the resolve of ASEAN, which decided to fully support Thailand,
the ASEAN frontline stage. The twelve year political struggle
over Cambodia, culminating in the 1991 Paris International
Conference on Cambodia, and in UNTAC, forged the practice
of political solidarity amongst ASEAN members.
III. 1992 till Present
To cope with the uncertainties and challenges, the Post Cold
War world, ASEAN set up new institutions—AFTA (proposed
by Thailand and set up in Jan.92 in Singapore), ARF (set in
July. 93 in Singapore at the IV ASEAN Summit) and ASEM
(first mooted by Singapore PM Goh Chok Tong, first meeting
held in Bangkok, March 96). ASEAN also played a key role in
supporting the first APEC ministerial meeting, proposed by
Australia (Canberra, 1989, attended by 12 countries). ASEAN’s
objectives in these new ventures included: to meet the needs of
being more competitive (AFTA); to set up a forum for discus
sions on regional security in view of the great global changes and
new security environment after the collapse of the USSR
(ARF); and to create the missing link between Asia and Europe,
amongst the three global power centers (North America,
Europe, East Asia) via ASEM. Previous attempts to foster
ASEAN economic and trade cooperation had not been fully
effective due to an insufficient sense of community and the lack
of a spur of competition from China, NAFTA and the EU.
Previous attempts by Japan and Australia in 1990/91 to launch
regional discussions on security issues had also failed, perhaps
due to wrong timing and suspicions about the motives. It needed
the credibility and impartiality of ASEAN to launch successfully
the ARF. One example of ASEAN’s magic was its ability to let
Vietnam join in 1995, only four years after the end of the long
dispute over Cambodia. Myanmar together with Laos joined it in
45
1977. As for Cambodia, its membership in ASEAN has been
delayed pending a satisfactory solution to its current problems.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 33
ü
Íàéäèòå â àíãëèéñêîì òåêñòå ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ äëÿ ñëåäóþùèõ
ðóññêèõ âûðàæåíèé è âûñêàçûâàíèé.
Ускорить экономическое развитие, столкнуться с, не рассчи
тывать на многое, вынашивать идею, действовать постепенно,
благоприятствовать (способствовать), внести значительный
вклад; государство, граничащее с враждебной страной; из прак
тических соображений / в практических целях было решено, что;
кодекс поведения, оказаться проверкой на прочность для.
Встреча АПЕК на уровне министров государств; предло
женный, премьер министр Сингапура; мероприятия, отвечать
условиям возросшей конкурентоспособности, повысить кон
курентоспособность в соответствии с новыми требованиями;
обсуждение вопросов безопасности в регионе; в условиях/
ввиду, отсутствие, стимул к; надежность; беспристрастность,
Асеановский региональный форум, до того времени как.
Первые попытки наладить сотрудничество в регионе не
увенчались успехом. В это время конкуренция со стороны Ки
тая, Северо Американской свободной торговой зоны (НАФТА)
и Европейского союза не ощущалась в достаточной мере.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 34
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå óñòíî â áûñòðîì òåìïå.
ü
Ðàáîòàéòå â ïàðàõ, ñïðàøèâàÿ ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ, ÷åðåäóÿ
ðóññêèé è àíãëèéñêèé ÿçûêè.
To face threats of communist insurgencies, culminating in, the
invasion of X by Y, begin with low expectations, основан(а), начать
переговоры по вопросам безопасности, появление межнацио
нальных организаций, discussions on regional security, the erstwhile
46
opponent, приведший к, be founded/be set up, бывший против
ник, aimed at, обсуждение вопросов безопасности в регионе,
development of supranational levels of organization, подозрения в
отношении, to meet the needs of being more competitive, wrong tim
ing, suspicions about, to launch discussions on security issues, непод
ходящий момент, неправильно выбранное время вторжение Y в
Х, опасаться опасности возрождения коммунизма/столкнуться
с угрозой возрождения коммунизма, направленных на, frame
works of supranational scope, new security environment after the col
lapse of the USSR, forge the practice of political solidarity amongst, не
рассчитывать на многое, заложить основы политической соли
дарности между, целью которых является.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 35
ü
Ïðî÷èòàéòå ïðèâåäåííûå öèôðîâûå è áóêâåííûå äàííûå äëÿ
ïÿòè íàèáîëåå ýêîíîìè÷åñêè ðàçâèòûõ ñòðàí ÀCÅÀÍ.
ü
Ïîâòîðèòå èõ â ïàðàõ ïî÷òè ñèíõðîííî äðóã çà äðóãîì.
Singapore
gross national/domestic
product (GNP/GDP)
per capita
gross domestic product
growth, 1993
gross domestic product
growth anticipated,
1995
annual population
growth rate
infant mortality per
1,000 births
literacy
people per doctor
people per telephone
population (mln)
national capital
major trading partners
Malaysia
Indonesia
$17,400
$3,230
$720
$850
$1,905
11.0%
8.6%
6.7%
3.8%
7.4%
9.0%
9.1%
6.0%
6.5%
8.5%
2.0%
2.6%
7%
2.3%
1.5%
14
66
40
26
78.5%
2,656
8.8
19.4
Kuala
Lumpur
Japan,
Singapore
81.5
11,641
107.7
191.1
Jakarta
93.5%
1,016
52.5
65.6
Manila
93%
4,361
26.3
59.5
Bangkok
Japan,
U.S.A.
Japan,
U.S.A.
U.S.A,
Japan
5
91.6%
711
2
3.1
Singapore
U.S.A.,
Japan
Philippines
Thailand
47
ÓÏÐÀÆÍÅÍÈÅ 36
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà òåêñòà 1.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà 2, îáðàùàÿ îñîáîå âíèìàíèå íà íàçâàíèÿ ýòíè÷åñêèõ ãðóïï.
1. Ethnic Composition of Thailand
Thailand is one of the largest and economically most influential
ASEAN country states. Seventy five per cent of the population is of
Thai ethnic stock and 14% is ethnic Chinese, one third of whom
reside in Bangkok. Thai Malays constitute the next largest minority,
followed by hill tribes. A substantial Kampuchean (Khmer) refugee
community also resides in the country in border camps. The official
language is Thai, or Siamese, with English being used as a universal
second language.
2. Ethnic Composition of Indonesia
The country is heterogeneous in social composition, comprising
more than 300 ethnic groups, the majority of which are of Malay
stock. The most important Malay communities are the Javanese,
who comprise a third of the population, followed by the Sundanese,
7%, and Madurese, 3%. The Chinese, 2%, constitute the largest
non Malay community, with substantial numbers of Indians,
Melanesians, Micronesians and Arabs, invariably regionally based,
also to be found. The official national language is Bahasa Indonesia,
a form of Trade Malay, but 25 local languages, predominantly
Javanese, Madurese and Sundanese, and 250 local dialects, are also
spoken.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ:
тайского происхождения —
исконные китайцы/малайцы —
поселение/колония беженцев —
тайский или сиамский язык —
национальное меньшинство —
48
неоднородный —
составлять треть населения —
представлять собой —
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà.
ü
Îáúÿñíèòå, êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû ïðè ýòîì
ïðèìåíèëè: ëåêñè÷åñêèå; ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå; ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèå
(ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
Ýòíè÷åñêèé ñîñòàâ Ìàëàéçèè
Пятьдесят девять процентов населения Малайзии — ма
лайцы, из них четыре пятых живут в сельской местности.
32% — этнические китайцы, из которых 4/5 живут в городской
местности. 9% — индийцы, в основном тамилы. Официаль
ный язык — малайский. Но население также говорит на ки
тайском, английском и тамильском языках. Главенствующая
роль малайцев закреплена конституцией, при этом доступ к
постам главы государства и премьер министра имеют предста
вители лишь данной этнической группы.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 37
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà.
ü
Îáðàùàéòå âíèìàíèå íà àêòèâíûé ñëîâàðü, âûäåëåííûé â òåêñòå êóðñèâîì.
bå incorporated in — войти в
seek (good relations) — стремиться к
to rank as the fifth — занимать пятое место среди
Although ZOPFAN has not yet become a reality, due to the
recent Cambodian crisis, some of its elements have already been
incorporated in the 1976 Treaty of Amity and Cooperation (TAC) to
which all ASEAN countries as well as Cambodia and Papua New
Guinea have subscribed (78).
49
Not to be overlooked in this category of regional schemes is
APEC, the Asia Pacific Economic Conference, which held its first
meeting of fifteen Pacific Rim nations in Seattle in late 1993. A sec
ond conference was held in Jakarta in November 1994.
Both ASEAN and China seek good relations. For instance,
Chinese PM Li Peng toured several ASEAN countries and spoke
about ASEAN China cooperation. He noted that ASEAN ranks as
the fifth trading partner of China and ASEAN could cooperate in
infrastructure developments, technology transfer, environment pro
tection, and financial coordination to resist financial speculation.
China had notably contributed US$1 bn to assist Thailand in its
recent financial problems. China would try to promote a joint, new
and fair political and economic offer with ASEAN, he proclaimed.
China also supports PM Dr Mahathir’s attempts to review the
Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Another major event in
ASEAN China relations is the ASEAN China informal summit in
Kuala Lumpur in December 97.
1 августа 1995 года в Брунее состоялся второй Асеановский
региональный форум по безопасности в АТР. В нем приняли
участие (It was attended by) 19 делегаций, представлявших на
уровне министров иностранных дел (at the Ministerial level)
страны Азии, Европы и Северной Америки, включая Евро
пейский Союз, Китай, США, Японию, Россию.
14–15 декабря 1995 года в Бангкоке проходила 5 я встреча
в верхах стран АСЕАН. Важным итогом встречи стало подпи
сание десятью странами субрегиона договора о создании в
ЮВА зоны, свободной от ядерного оружия, что рассматрива
лось как важный и неотъемлемый шаг на пути реализации
идеи ЗОПФАН.
Сегодня ASEAN — это региональное объединение, взяв
шее себе в название географический признак, âêëþ÷àåò â ñåáÿ
все (или почти все: прием Камбоджи — вопрос времени) стра
ны Ю В Азии от Мьянмы до Индонезии.
Являясь одним из инициаторов создания АСЕАН и ее гео
графическим центром, Малайзия всегда оставалась и остается
активным участником организации, âûñòóïàÿ ñ рядом плодо
50
творных инициатив, íàïðàâëåííûõ íà укрепление региональ
ного сотрудничества в экономической и политической сферах
и поддержание безопасности и стабильности в ЮВА.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 38
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä.
ü
Ñôîðìóëèðóéòå íà ðóññêîì è àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêàõ îñíîâíóþ
èäåþ òåêñòà.
ü
Îçàãëàâüòå òåêñò.
Some of the nations of Southeast Asia sought to organize them
selves into an economic and trading bloc. The first of these experi
ments was ASA, the first Association of Southeast Asian Nations,
founded in July 1961. Its members were Malaysia, the Philippines,
and Thailand. A month later saw the establishment of Maphilindo
with its membership (as the name suggests) made up of Malaysia,
the Philippines, and Indonesia. A U.S. sponsored and led security
community, the Southeast Asia Treaty Organization, or SEATO, was
established in the 1950s during the “pactomania” period. This faded
away, however, in the aftermath of the Vietnam War, even though the
United States remains committed by treaty to some of its members,
such as Thailand. All of these organizations were ill fated; but
ASEAN, the Association of Southeast Asian Nations founded in
1967, has managed to last for more than a quarter of a century with
the support of its six members—Brunei, Indonesia, Malaysia, the
Philippines, Singapore, and Thailand. Asserting that this is a region
al organization of great strength, however, would be clearly wrong.
(from Gerald L. Houseman America and the Pacific Rim, 1995).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 39
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä.
ü
Îçàãëàâüòå òåêñò.
Третье десятилетие деятельности АСЕАН — это инициати
ва в вопросах обеспечения региональной в масштабах всей
51
ЮВА безопасности и превращение АСЕАН в инициирующий
фактор создания системы безопасности в АТР. В этот период
АСЕАН действует в качественно новых международных усло
виях прекращения «холодной войны», исчезновения совет
ской и вьетнамской угрозы в регионе, урегулирования камбо
джийского конфликта, который прежде консолидировал
АСЕАН. Ассоциация в целом спокойно пережила окончание
«холодной войны» и крах двухполюсного мира прежде всего
потому, что ей удалось дистанцироваться от борьбы двух сис
тем и играть «свою игру».
Третье десятилетие деятельности АСЕАН — это выход
Ассоциации за рамки региона ЮВА и превращение ее в
важный политический и экономический фактор в АТР. Оп
ределился и новый стимул к поддержанию асеановского
единства. В заключительном документе Сингапурской
встречи в верхах в январе 1992 года, в год 25 летия АСЕАН,
указывается на необходимость защиты коллективных инте
ресов АСЕАН. В ответ на создание крупных и мощных эко
номических группировок развитых стран планировалось
образовать асеановскую зону свободной торговли — АФТА,
создать форум для обсуждения проблем безопасности в ре
гионе ввиду крупных перемен в мире после распада СССР,
активизировать связи с Европой и построить недостающее
звено в своем экономическом треугольнике сотрудничест
ва: «АФТА — НАФТА, АФТА — Япония, АФТА — ЕС», рас
ширить Ассоциацию за счет новых членов из ЮВА, создать
безъядерную зону в регионе и приглушить конфликт вокруг
архипелага Спратли (the Spratlys conflict). И чрезвычайно
важно, что все эти процессы брали под свой контроль главы
государств и правительств АСЕАН, так как отныне их встре
чи должны были проходить на регулярной основе раз в три
года.
Èç äîêëàäà ïðîô. ÌÃÈÌÎ Í.Ï. Ìàëåòèíà
íà ìåæäóíàðîäíîé êîíôåðåíöèè 1997 ã.
ïî ñëó÷àþ 30-ëåòèÿ ÀÑÅÀÍ
52
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 40
ü
Ñäåëàéòå äâóñòîðîííèé ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà
Q.: Â 1967 ãîäó, êîãäà áûëà ñîçäàíà ÀÑÅÀÍ è â åå ñîñòàâ
âõîäèëî ëèøü ïÿòü ñòðàí, ìàëî êòî çíàë î íåé èëè ñåðüåçíî âîñïðèíèìàë åå. ÀÑÅÀÍ — ñïåöèôè÷åñêàÿ è â íàñòîÿùåå âðåìÿ íàèáîëåå ýôôåêòèâíàÿ âî âñåì òðåòüåì ìèðå ðåãèîíàëüíàÿ îðãàíèçàöèÿ, êîòîðóþ õàðàêòåðèçóþò äèíàìè÷íîå ðàçâèòèå è ïîçèòèâíûé âêëàä â óïðî÷åíèå ìèðà, ñòàáèëüíîñòè è ñîòðóäíè÷åñòâà â
ÞÂÀ, ÀÒÐ è âî âñåì ìèðå. Êàêîâû îñíîâíûå äîñòèæåíèÿ ÀÑÅÀÍ çà âåñü ïåðèîä åå ñóùåñòâîâàíèÿ?
A.: ASEAN is a great success. It has been amply demonstrated by
the way it is courted by the Great Powers; by its successful launching
of various initiatives, AFTA (or ASEAN Free Trade Area), ARF
(ASEAN Regional Forum), ASEM (Asia Europe Meeting), its key
role in APEC (Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation); by its productive
dialogue relationships with various cooperation partners, e.g. EU; by
many applications from various countries to join both ASEAN and
the related initiatives, e.g., ARF, ASEM.
Q.: Êàêîâà îñíîâíàÿ öåëü äåÿòåëüíîñòè ÀÑÅÀÍ ñ ìîìåíòà åå
ñóùåñòâîâàíèÿ?
A.: Since its establishment, ASEAN’s activities have been
aimed at establishing political stability as a prerequisite for econom
ic development of the region.
Q.:  äåÿòåëüíîñòè Àññîöèàöèè ñòðàí Þãî-Âîñòî÷íîé Àçèè
çà òðèäöàòü ëåò åå ñóùåñòâîâàíèÿ (1967–1997) ìîæíî óñëîâíî
âûäåëèòü òðè ýòàïà: (1) 1967–1976 ãã.; (2) ñ 1977 ã. äî êîíöà
80-õ ãã.; (3) c êîíöà 80-õ ãã. äî íàñòîÿùåãî âðåìåíè. Ñ ÷åì ñâÿçàíî òàêîå äåëåíèå?
A. These stages are associated with political and economic situa
tion in ASEAN and the goals the member states had to reach as a bloc.
53
Q.: ×òî õàðàêòåðèçîâàëî ñòðàíû ÀÑÅÀÍ íà ìîìåíò ñîçäàíèÿ
àññîöèàöèè?
A.: I should emphasize that the strongest tendency within this
bloc has been for nations to go their own way economically, polit
ically, and militarily. This was most obvious during the early years
of ASEAN, from 1967 to roughly 1976, when the organization
seemed to be operating or, more precisely, not at all operating, in
a more or less dormant phase. Many observers predicted a demise
for ASEAN at that time. A key event in the establishment of
ASEAN in 1967 was the change of government in Indonesia. It
was in fact this government that solicited the nations who eventu
ally became members to work in favor of the idea of regional
cooperation.
Q.: Â ýòîò ïåðèîä ÑØÀ èãðàëè äîìèíèðóþùóþ ðîëü â äàííîì ðåãèîíå. Øëà âîéíà âî Âüåòíàìå, à áëèçëåæàùèå òåððèòîðèè ñòàëè àðåíîé âîåííîãî ïðèñóòñòâèÿ àìåðèêàíñêèõ âîçäóøíûõ, ìîðñêèõ è íàçåìíûõ ñèë. Âîåííûå áàçû íà Ôèëèïïèíàõ, â
Òàèëàíäå è íà ìíîãèõ ïðèëåãàþùèõ ê íèì îñòðîâàõ Òèõîãî îêåàíà áûëè öåíòðîì ðàçâåðòûâàíèÿ àêòèâíûõ êðóïíîìàñøòàáíûõ
îïåðàöèé, ïðîâîäèìûõ ÑØÀ. Êàê ïîâëèÿëî âîåííîå ïðèñóòñòâèå
àìåðèêàíöåâ â ýòîì ðåãèîíå íà ñòðàíû ÀÑÅÀÍ?
A.: The effect of this presence may simply have inhibited any
local development of initiatives, since it probably encouraged
ASEAN members to free ride on the strength and activism of the
Americans. Only with the forced withdrawal of the United States
from Vietnam in 1975 did the leaders of the ASEAN group appear
motivated to reassess the reasons for their union and the possible
future direction it could take. This marked a new period for
ASEAN, lasting until 1987, in which attempts were made to revital
ize group efforts. This was not a wholly successful period by any
means; but the new hopes gained by the great economic perform
ances of Malaysia and Singapore were undoubtedly important in
adding stimulus to these efforts.
54
MALAYSIA’S HISTORY
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ ñâîè âîïðîñû è îòâåòû èç òåêñòà, ñûìèòèðóéòå áåñåäó æóðíàëèñòà ñ àâòîðîì ýññå «Èñòîðèÿ Ìàëàéçèè»;
ü
Ðàáîòàÿ â ãðóïïàõ èç òðåõ ÷åëîâåê, ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä óêàçàííûõ îòðåçêîâ òåêñòà.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction
Early Settlement
Hindu-Buddhist Influences.
Islamisation and the Melaka Sultanate
European Penetration and Colonialism.
The Japanese Conquest and Its Aftermath
Malayan Independence.
Towards Malaysia
Malaysia, 1963 — present day
1. Introduction
The course of Malaysian history has been determined by its
strategic position at one of the world’s major crossroads, its tropical
climate, the surrounding environment and the regime of the North
East and South West monsoons.
Its position and other geographical circumstances made the
country a natural meeting place for traders from the East and the
West. The lush tropical forest and the abundance of life existing in it
and in the surrounding water made Malaysia an easy place for the
settlement and sustenance of small, self supporting human commu
nities. At the same time the thick jungle and mountainous terrain of
the interior inhibited communication, while the absence of broad,
flood phoned river valleys and deltas precluded the development of
elaborate systems of water control such as those upon which the civi
lizations of Java and the Southeast Asian mainland came to be based.
In contrast Malaysia’s development has come from the sea. Its inhab
itants quickly acquired a skill and reputation as sailors and navigators.
Subsequent trading contacts have been responsible for the waves of
outside influences, which have modified their way of life.
55
2. Early Settlement
Nature’s bounty no doubt accounts for the fact that Malaysia
was one of the earliest homes of Man. Stone implements found at
Lenggong in Perak and the remarkable finds in the Niah Cave of
Sarawak provide evidence for this.
The earliest of the present day inhabitants of Malaysia are the
orang asli of the Peninsula and people such as the Penan of Sarawak
and the Rungus of Sabah, many of whom still pursue a largely
nomadic way of life. Their presence in the country probably dates
back to over 5000 years. These early settlers were probably the pio
neers of the movement of peoples southwards from China and Tibet
through Mainland Southeast Asia and the Malay Peninsula to the
Indonesian Archipelago and beyond. The next arrivals to the coun
try, the Malays, represented the second and third wave of this move
ment.
The first Malay settlers (the Proto Malays) had probably estab
lished themselves here by 1000 BC. This movements were followed
by other waves of immigrants (the Deutero Malays) over the next
few centuries, who came equipped with more advanced farming
techniques and new knowledge of metals. The Malay peoples also
spread out into the islands of the archipelago, settling down into
small self contained communities which gave rise to the complex
and variegated ethnic pattern of Malaysia and Indonesia today. The
Malays of the Peninsula had their closest affinities with the Malays
of Sumatra, and for centuries the Straits of Melaka did not form a
dividing line between two nations but served as a corridor linking
different parts of the same family. Until recent times the Malays and
Malay related inhabitants of the area remained politically fragment
ed, but they shared a common culture. Together with the orang asli
they make up the indigenous peoples of Malaysia today, and are
classified as “sons of the soil” or Bumiputera. Despite the consider
able differences between the various Bumiputera groups, they all
share certain characteristics which are the hallmarks of the indige
nous culture of Southeast Asia. These characteristics are rooted in
an agrarian maritime economy and reflected in a village society
56
where leadership was largely through consensus and those attitudes
were informed by a belief in an all pervasive spiritual world.
Although the culture of the Malays in particular came to be overlaid
by Hiduism and then prevaded by Islam, elements of this basic cul
ture still persist.
3. Hindu-Buddhist Influences
A new phase in the historical development of the inhabitants of
Malaysia began around the first century BC with the establishment
of regular trading contacts with the world beyond Southeast Asia,
specifically China and the sub continent of India. Although
Chinese contacts started as early as, if not predating those of India,
it was the Hindu and Buddhist elements of Indian culture which
made a major impact on the region. Over a period of a thousand
years these influences gradually made themselves be felt, and have
left their marks in the native language, literature and social custom.
During this Hindu Buddhist period which was marked by a tremen
dous growth in the East West trade, the shadowy outlines of the first
political units emerged in the Peninsula and in Kalimantan.
However, for the greater part of this time the inhabitants of the area
were subjected to the sway of either Javanese or Sumatran power
The most tangible evidence of the Hindu Buddhist period in
Malaysian history is now to be found in the temple sites of Lembah
Bujang and Kuala Merbok in Kedah.
4. Islamisation and the Melaka Sultanate
The Hindu Buddhist period of Malaysian history ended with
the penetration of Islam into the area. Brought primarily by Indian
and Arab traders, there is evidence of the presence of the new reli
gion in the region as early as the thirteenth century. After 1400,
Islam became a major influence with the conversion of the Malay
Hindu rulers of Melaka. From Melaka, Islam spread to other parts
of the Malay Peninsula and to the Malay states in Sumatra and along
the trade routes throughout the Indonesian archipelago. Once
established as the religion of the Malays, Islam profoundly affected
Malay society and the Malay way of life. After the collapse of
57
Melaka, the sultanate of Brunei in Kalimantan rose to become the
principal agent for the propagation of Islam in that area.
The Malay kingdom of Melaka which dominated both sides of
the Straits of Melaka for a hundred years marked the classical age of
Malay culture. Most of the Malay States of the Peninsula today can
trace their genesis back to the Melaka sultanate. In Kalimantan the
inhabitants of modern Sabah and Sarawak lived an autonomous
existence although the ancient kingdom of Brunei exercised a gen
eral sway over them until the end of the nineteenth century.
5. European Penetration and Colonialism
Both the Melaka and Brunei empires were shattered by the
coming of the Europeans into the region. Melaka fell to a sudden
Portugese assault in 1511. The power of Brunei was crippled in its
infancy by the establishment of the Spaniards in the Philippines and
by the rise of Dutch power in Java. Johor tried to take the place of
Melaka but was restricted not only by the Europeans, but also by the
activities of local rivals such as the Achinese, Minangkabau and the
Bugis. As a result, the present day States of the Peninsula gradually
emerged as sovereign units in their own right.
Despite their technological superiority, European power in the
region remained restricted until the British intrusion at the end of
the eighteenth century which brought the resources and organiza
tion of the Industrial Revolution. From their new bases of Pulau
Pinang (1786), Singapore (1819) and Melaka (1824), which became
known collectively as the Straits Settlements, their influence and
power spread into the Malay Peninsula, and the process of political
integration of the Malay States of the Peninsula into a modern
nation state began. In 1824 the Malay world was arbitrarily divided
into British and Dutch spheres of influence (i.e. by the Anglo Dutch
treaty of that year). In 1874 the British took the first steps towards
bringing the peninsula States under their direct supervision when
they imposed the Pangkor Treaty on the rulers of Perak and made
similar arrangements in Selangor. Meanwhile in Kalimantan, the
States of Sarawak and Sabah were beginning to take shape as British
adventurers acquired the territories at the expense of the Brunei sul
58
tanate. By 1914 the political organization of the present day states of
Malaysia was as follows:
1) The Straits Settlements: British crown colony headed by a
British governor, consisting of Singapore, Melaka, Pulau
Pinang, Labuan, the Cocos Isles and Christmas Isle. Capital:
Singapore.
2) The Federated Malay States: British protectorate headed by
a British High Commissioner (Governor of the Straits
Settlements); consisting of the States of Negeri Sembflan,
Pahang, Perak and Selangor.
3) The Unfederated Malay States: British protectorate under
the tutelage of a British Adviser in each State responsible to
the British Commissioner, consisting of Johor, Kedah,
Kelantan, Perlis and Terengganu.
4) Sarawak: British protectorate ruled by the Brooke family.
Capital: Kuching.
5) Sabah: British protectorate, ruled by the Chartered
Company of the British North Borneo. Capital: Jesselton
(Kota Kinabalu).
6. The Japanese Conquest and Its Aftermath
The Japanese invasion of Malaya and British Borneo in late
1941, which culminated in the humiliating British surrender in
Singapore two and a half months later, shattered Western colonial
supremacy and unleashed the forces of incipient nationalism.
Although the British were able to resume their authority in the
region after the collapse of Japan in 1945, they faced an entirely new
political situation and those circumstances forced them to adopt
new policies. As a result the Straits Settlements were dissolved.
Pulau Pinang and Melaka were joined with the Malay States of the
Peninsula to form a new Malayan Union. Singapore became a sep
arate crown colony and so did both Sarawak and British North
Borneo in place of the former Brooke and Chartered Company
regimes. Labuan was joined to British North Borneo.
These new arrangements met with considerable Malaysian
opposition. In Sarawak a strong campaign developed opposing the
59
crown colony status and culminated in the assassination of the sec
ond British governor (1949). But the most serious opposition was in
the Malay Peninsula against the Malayan Union which reduced the
status of the Malay States virtually to that of a British colony.
Consequently, the British were obliged to abandon the Malayan
Union scheme, and in 1948 in its place established the Federation of
Malaya, after protracted negotiations with the Malay Rulers, the
United Malays National Organisation (UMNO) and other parties
concerned. The new Federation consisted of all the nine Malay
states of the Peninsula, along with Melaka and Pulau Pinang, unit
ed under a federal government in Kuala Lumpur headed by a British
High Commissioner.
7. Malayan Independence
By the Agreement of 1948 the British had committed them
selves to preparing the way for the Federation’s independence.
Under the twin pressures of a communist rebellion (the
Emergency) and the development of a strong Malay nationalist
movement (represented by UMNO), the British introduced elec
tions, starting at local level in 1951. The problem of obtaining
political cooperation among the main ethnic groups in the coun
try to fight for independence was resolved by the successful estab
lishment of an alliance between UMNO and the Malayan Chinese
Association (MCA), the two principal communal parties, in the
same year, which was subsequently joined by the Malayan Indian
Congress (MIC).
When the first federal elections were held in 1955, the UMNO
MCA MIC Alliance, headed by Tunku Abdul Rahman, won an
overwhelming victory (51 out of the 52 seats contested), and the
Tunku was appointed the Federation’s first Chief Minister. The
Alliance was successful in pressuring the British to relinquish their
sovereignty in August 1957.
In the meantime slower constitutional progress had been taking
place under British colonial rule in Singapore, Sarawak and Sabah.
In 1955 Singapore was granted internal autonomy (the Rendel
Constitution) and had its first Chief Minister (David Marshall). By
60
1959 Singapore had achieved full internal self government and was
led by the Peoples’ Action Party (PAP) under Lee Kuan Yew. In
Sarawak local elections were introduced in 1959.
8. Towards Malaysia
The first move towards the formation of Malaysia came in
1961 when the idea for the formation of a wider federation com
prising the Federation of Malaya, Singapore and the Kalimantan
States (including Brunei) was mooted by Tunku Abdul Rahman in
a speech in Singapore. The Tunku’s proposal received mixed
reception. It was generally popular in Malaya and Singapore but
raised doubts in Sabah and Sarawak. It also quickly aroused oppo
sition from the Philippines which asserted a claim over British
North Borneo (Sabah) and from Indonesia where it was viewed as
a “neo colonialist” plot by Sukarno and the powerful Indonesian
Communist Party. However, the proposal had the immediate effect
of accelerating constitutional development in Sarawak, Sabah and
Brunei. Elections were held for the first time in Brunei and in
Sabah in 1962. A joint Anglo Malayan commission headed by a for
mer governor of the Bank of England, Lord Cobbold, visited Sabah
and Sarawak in 1962 and reported that the majority in both states
favoured the formation of Malaysia. However, continued Philippine
and Indonesian opposition led to the sending of a United Nations
mission to Borneo in 1963, which also reported that public opinion
was in favour of joining Malaysia. Consequently, on 16 September
1963, Malaysia was formally promulgated, although without Brunei
which by this time had declined to join.
9. Malaysia, 1963 — Present Day
The first few years of Malaysia were taken up by a serious chal
lenge to its survival, mainly from Indonesia whose policy of con
frontation took the form of armed attacks on the Peninsula and
across the land frontiers of Sabah and Sarawak. Confrontation was
finally brought to an end by an agreement signed in Bangkok in
1966, while the Philippines gave its formal recognition to Malaysia
61
the same year. In the meantime, however, (i.e. in 1965) Singapore
ceased to be a member of the Malaysian federation and became an
independent state.
In the seven general elections which have been held since the
formation of Malaysia (the most recent being in 1990), the ruling
coalition of political parties — formerly the Alliance, but expanded
in 1971 to become the Barisan Nasional — has easily retained its
majority in parliament. However, in 1969 for the first and up till now
the only time, the coalition lost its overall two thirds majority.
Communal tensions resulted in the 13 May 1969 incident in Kuala
Lumpur, leading to the establishment of an emergency government —
the National Operations Council. Parliamentary rule was resumed
in 1971. Since then the broad aim of the administration has been the
fulfilment of the New Economic Policy which is designed to eradi
cate poverty regardless of race, and to eliminate the identification of
occupation with race.
The economic prosperity achieved in the 1970s enabled the
administration of Tun Abdul Razak, who succeeded Tunku Abdul
Rahman as premier in 1970, and Tun Hussein Onn, who took over
on the death of Tun Razak in 1976, to make considerable progress
towards these ends. At the same time, Malaysia established a more
independent foreign policy, helping found ASEAN in 1967, recog
nising Communist China in t974, and identifying the nation with
the non aligned countries of the Third World. The 1980s have
brought new political directions and economic challenges. The
administration of Dato’ Seri Dr. Mahathir Mohamad (1981) has
seen the search for new sources of support and development (the
Look East Policy), the initiation of a bold policy of heavy indus
trialisation (the national car, steel industry and oil refineries) and
an aggressive foreign policy asserting the interests of the undevel
oped South versus those of the developed nations of the North.
The ruling coalition of parties in the Barisan Nasional continues
to dominate the political arena but a number of developments,
including the coming of age of a new generation of voters, suggest
that there may be changes in the traditional pattern of Malaysian
politics.
62
3. ÑÒÐÀÍÛ ÀÒÐ: ÏÎËÈÒÈÊÀ Â ÄÅÉÑÒÂÈÈ
ü
Âûïîëíèòå äâóñòîðîííèé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
TIME: ×åì ñòèëü Âàøåãî ðóêîâîäñòâà áóäåò îòëè÷àòüñÿ îò
ñòèëÿ Ïðåñòîíà Ìåííèíãà?
Day: It’s difficult for me to compare myself with somebody else.
I like to reach out and touch people, and I think it is important to
communicate one on one and also in large audiences. You have to
be able to do the two in today’s political world.
TIME: Ïî÷åìó æèòåëè Îíòàðèî áóäóò ãîëîñîâàòü çà Âàñ?
Day: There’s a sense that I can get a job done, that I know
what I’m doing, I have a proven record. The fact that I’ve lived in
most regions of the country; I’ve lived in Ontario, albeit in my
teen years. People tell me they like the way I communicate and
reach out.
TIME: Ðåëèãèÿ ÿâëÿåòñÿ âàæíîé ÷àñòüþ æèçíè ìíîãèõ êàíàäöåâ. Ìîæåò ëè ýòî êàê-òî ïîìî÷ü Âàì, êîãäà ëþäè ïîéäóò íà âûáîðû?
Day: In the last 90 days, I’ve probably done close to 300 town
hall meetings. And over seven years as a Cabinet minister, I’ve prob
ably spoken to thousands of crowds. In all that time, the question of
religion has never come up. Basically, what people want to know is,
“Are you real?” “Can I trust you?” “Do you go through the joys and
pains of life that I do?” and “Can you get the job done?”
TIME: Ãîòîâû ëè Âû ïîéòè íà êîìïðîìèññ îòíîñèòåëüíî
ïëàòôîðìû Âàøåé ïàðòèè, ñ òåì ÷òîáû îáåñïå÷èòü
ñîòðóäíè÷åñòâî òîðè è Àëüÿíñà?
Day: I’d welcome the discussion. But Alliance policy is estab
lished by the members. The leader cannot say, “This policy was
63
established by the people, I’m now going to change it.” That would
be totally going sideways in terms of this citizen based party.
TIME: Åñòü ëè â ïëàòôîðìå Àëüÿíñà ïîëîæåíèÿ, êîòîðûå
ìîãóò ñòàòü ïîìåõîé íà âûáîðàõ?
Day: No.
TIME: Ñ÷èòàåòå ëè Âû ñåáÿ êðóïíûì ñïåöèàëèñòîì â îáùåíèè?
Day: I think I have some ability to communicate. People tell me
that.
TIME: Îäíà èç Âàøèõ êîëëåã, Àëüáåðòà Ì.Ï. Äæàñîí Êåííè, ñêàçàëà, ÷òî ó Âàñ åñòü ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèé ïîòåíöèàë, ÷òîáû ñòàòü êàíàäñêèì Ðåéãàíîì.
Day: Ronald Reagan is a hero of mine. I’ll be very hesitant to
put myself at his level, but people have made comparisons. Reagan
spoke about hope. Reagan was a conservative. Reagan came from a
state government to the national scene. Reagan was able to win
when people said he couldn’t. But I haven’t done a stint in
Hollywood yet.
TIME: Ìîæåòå ëè Âû ñðàâíèòü ñåáÿ ñ Ïüåðîì Ýëëèîòîì
Òðþäî?
Day: I recall when I was 17 or 18 years old, doing everything I
could to see that Pierre Elliot Trudeau would not get elected.
Obviously, I was among the thousands who failed in our task. One of
the things that we were continually combating was his energy, at least
the perception of it. Something was percolating there with Trudeau
and Reagan, and people tell me they see the same bubbles and the
same percolation there in the campaign I just finished. They expect
it to continue, and I hope it does.
64
FAILED EMERGENCY LEGISLATION “WOULD HAVE MADE
AUSTRALIA A LAUGHING STOCK”
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà. Ïðè ïåðåâîäå ïîëüçóéòåñü ñëîâàð¸ì.
ü
Îáðàòèòå âíèìàíèå íà ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ðåøåíèÿ ïî ñëåäóþùèì
åäèíèöàì ïåðåâîäà:
a) ïðåöèçèîííûå ñëîâà (èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, äàòû, íàçâàíèÿ
äîêóìåíòîâ, îðãàíèçàöèé, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ);
b) èäèîìàòè÷åñêèå âûðàæåíèÿ è ñëîâà, èñïîëüçóåìûå â ïåðåíîñíîì çíà÷åíèè;
c) ñèëüíûå (ýìîöèîíàëüíî íàãðóæåííûå) ãëàãîëû, ïðèëàãàòåëüíûå, ñóùåñòâèòåëüíûå.
By Sarah Crichton
An international law expert said yesterday that the Federal
Government’s failed emergency legislation would have violated a
raft of international treaty obligations and made Australia a laughing
stock.
Dr Jean Pierre Fonteyne, senior lecturer and convener of the
Australian National University’s graduate international law pro
gram, said the legislation tabled in Parliament in haste on
Wednesday night would have sparked a wave of diplomatic protest
from every maritime nation.
The legislation, which would have given the prime minister a
free hand to order the removal, by force if necessary, of any vessel
from Australian territorial waters, violated Australia’s obligations
under the 1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
and the 1951 Geneva Convention on the Status of Refugees, Dr
Fonteyne said.
It would also have prevented any legal action within Australian
courts relating to the new law — a move the High Court may well
have struck down as unconstitutional and a violation of the separa
tion of powers.
“It gave far and away too great a power to the prime minister,”
Dr Fonteyne said.
65
Because the boat people aboard the Tampa had entered terri
torial waters, Australia was now legally required to assess the
refugee status of those aboard before any could be expelled. It was
irrelevant whether the vessel had entered Australian waters legally
or illegally.
“Until you have decided someone is not a refugee, you cannot
send them somewhere else because you might be expelling them
back to a place where their life or liberty could be in danger,” Dr
Fonteyne said.
Domestic legislation could not override Australia’s internation
al obligations.
“The Government has been thrashing around trying to find a
way to extricate itself from this situation, but it seems to me quite
clear they’ve completely lost the plot; they have no idea what they’re
doing anymore.
“It seems quite clear that what we are dealing with here is a
somewhat mindless attempt to appear tough, irrespective of the
legalities involved.”
As well, Australia had obligations under humanitarian law,
including those covering civil and political rights, and the rights of
the child.
“The international political dimension of all of this is stagger
ing. They [the Government] have chosen to thumb our nose at inter
national public opinion.”
“The world now knows the extent to which humanitarian con
siderations play no role whatsoever in determining the
Government’s attitude on refugees.”
Australia risked international ignominy and a real prospect of
legal action as a result of the Tampa standoff, he said.
Norway could yet make a claim for compensation on behalf of
the shipping company before the International Court of Justice in
The Hague, or take Australia before the International Tribunal for
the Law of the Sea in Hamburg for breaching the law of the sea con
vention.
It could also bring pressure to bear on European states with
whom Australia trades.
66
4. ÃÓÌÀÍÈÒÀÐÍÛÅ ÏÐÎÁËÅÌÛ ÑÒÐÀÍ ÀÒÐ
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 41
ü
Âûó÷èòå ñëåäóþùèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû.
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå èõ áûñòðûé óñòíûé ïåðåâîä âñëåä çà ïðåïîäàâàòåëåì.
refugee arrivals in — беженцы, прибывшие в
asylum seeker — обратившийся за убежищем; тот, кто про
сит убежища
Office of The UN High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) —
управление Верховного комиссара по делам беженцев (УВКБ)
admit refugees — принимать беженцев
seek refugee status —добиваться статуса беженца
grant refugee status — предоставить статус беженца
reside in two countries — быть гражданином двух стран;
иметь гражданство (паспорт) двух стран
ethnic Korean — этнические корейцы
migration rate — темпы миграции
nonresident aliens — иностранные граждане (подданные
других стран)
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 42
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëåäóþùèå ñëîâà â êîíòåêñòå.
Refugee According to the United Nations, a person who has left
his own country and gone to another country because of “fear of
being persecuted for reasons of race, religion, nationality, member
ship in a particular social group, or political opinion” is called a
refugee. The purpose of the United Nations High Commission for
Refugees (UNHCR) is to provide refugees with international pro
tection and to help them in other ways.
Indigenous a plant indigenous to New Zealand. (Syn. native,
local.)
67
Populate The new land was quickly populated by the settlers
from abroad. (Syn.: settle, colonize, inhabit): The American West
was hardly settled until the 19th century; the settled coastal areas of
Australia; When refugees are resettled they are moved away from
their hometown and sent to another place. The Manchu and Tungus
tribes inhabited riverbanks and bay shores. The British first colonized
Australia in the 18th century.
Displace The indigenous population was soon displaced by the
settlers. A displaced person is one usually living in their own coun
try but not in their hometown or, sometimes, one who has been
forced to leave his/her own country.
Emigrate (from, to); immigrate (to) (rare); migrate. People who
emigrate are emigrants from the country that they leave, and their
action is called emigration: A ship full of emigrants left Liverpool
for Australia. But from the point of view of the country they enter,
the same people are immigrants, and their action is called immigration: to pass through Immigration Control at the port; the immigration office at the airport; There are strict controls on immigration into this country. To migrate is to move from one country to
another for a limited period: Migrant workers move from country
to country in search of work; cheap migrant labor. The word is used
especially of birds, and the action is called migration: the spring
migration of the wild ducks.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 43
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå ê ñëîâàì â ðàìêå ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèå äåôèíèöèè.
populate, displace, migrate, colonize
indigenous, settle, to inhabit, emigrate
To force out of the usual place, (of people) to go and live in a
place, to leave one country to settle in another, to live in a place
or area; born or produced naturally in a particular place, to estab
lish a colony in a country or an area; to move from country to
country.
68
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 44
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå íà àíãëèéñêèé ÿçûê, èñïîëüçóÿ àêòèâíûé ñëîâàðü
òåìû, îáðàùàÿ âíèìàíèå íà ïîëåçíûå âûðàæåíèÿ, âûäåëåííûå
êóðñèâîì.
Mr Wang and his family, illegal aliens, have been living from
month to month, often on the brink of deportation proceedings, for
more than a year. With several months left on his tourist visa, he took
a job at a large dairy farm in Leicester.
Native Americans are a minority ethnic group in the United
States who were free and independent groups also known as
American Indians, who arrived in North America thousands of years
before the Europeans came. They were driven out of their home
lands by the white Europeans who arrived in North America.
THE FLIGHT TO FOOD, BUT NOT FREEDOM
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
Desperately hungry, North Koreans flee across the border to life
underground in China.
WEAK WITH HUNGER, LEE Chun sik gripped his younger
sister’s hand and led her across the frozen Tumen River into China.
The North Korean wasteland receded behind them. In a small and
quiet village, they came across an empty shack. Inside, they found
several ears of corn and a bag of salted cucumbers. They made a fire,
grilled the corn and ate it with the cucumbers. “It was a great meal for
us,” says Lee, 14. Their strength renewed, they walked for two hours
in the bitter wind until they came to the home of an ethnic Korean
family, who offered them food and warm bedding for the night.
That was 18 months ago. Today, Chun sik and his 12 year old
sister, Sun hee, live in northeastern China’s Yanbian region with an
elderly ethnic Korean couple who have taken them in. The siblings
may have escaped the hunger and hardship of North Korea. But they
69
are hardly out of danger. Under North Korean law, they are forbid
den to migrate. And since Beijing considers them illegal immigrants,
they are wanted by authorities from both countries. They have
changed their names several times since arriving in China. And they
keep a low profile: Chun sik spends most of his time watching TV,
venturing out only after dark. Sun hee draws pictures all day. “This
situation is not good for any child,” says their foster mother. “What
about their education?”
For the rising numbers of North Koreans fleeing the country,
that’s the least of their worries. Desperate for food, longing for sta
bility, they are turning to China as the new promised land.
According to Jiro Ishimaru, a Japanese journalist who has been cov
ering their exodus for several years, as many as 50,000 North Korean
“starvation refugees” live in China’s Yanbian Korean Autonomous
Prefecture, where ethnic Koreans make up 40 percent of the popu
lation. Though many now have food, they are forced to live in hid
ing. If caught, they face expulsion, then execution or life in a politi
cal prison camp back in North Korea. Still, most feel they have
nothing to lose. “It pained us to leave the country where we had
been raised to go to an unknown place,” says Lee Chun sik. “But we
knew it was our only chance for survival.”
Many of China’s ethnic Koreans have warmly welcomed the
refugees. Most of their ancestors were themselves refugees from
northern Korea, fleeing economic hardship or misrule in the last
century. The Korean Chinese speak Korean and sympathize with
the refugees’ plight. At Chinese villages along the Tumen, signs cau
tion the locals: “Crossing the border is illegal. Do not help the ille
gal crossers financially. Do not let them stay or give them a job.” But
many ignore the warnings. “We cannot help but feed them and help
them once we see what a miserable state our fellow Koreans are in,”
said one ethnic Korean. Some offer the recent arrivals work on their
farms and give them haircuts to get rid of lice. Locals estimate that
one out of every three or four ethnic Korean families provides assis
tance. They do so at considerable risk: if Chinese authorities catch
them, they will be fined at least 2,000 yuan per refugee—almost three
times the average monthly income.
70
The starvation refugees are crossing the Tumen at such a fast
clip that China’s ethnic Koreans fear they will not be able to absorb
them all. Even some North Korean border patrols cross the river in
search of food, the villagers say. But the soldiers remain vigilant in
trying to nab civilians who do the same; one witness recently spotted
border patrols hiding in a hole to catch transgressors. Otherwise, the
trip is not particularly challenging. At certain places the river is only
30 meters wide and shallow enough for a child to cross. And cross
they do; increasing numbers of children have been showing up in
towns like Tumen and Yanji, asking for handouts. Many say their
parents have died of starvation. They are gaunt and weak; some have
swollen faces and red hair, signs of malnutrition.
Most of the refugees are running from lives of unrelenting misery.
The Lees’ mother died when they were very young. Their father, a sol
dier in the North Korean Army, died in a military hospital a few years
ago. They turned to their uncle for help, but he could barely feed his
own family. So they went into the mountains to forage for food, sur
viving on cabbage and grass roots. But soon Sun hee’s body began to
swell, probably from malnutrition. When they returned to their uncle’s
house, they were put aboard a train to the border with a few potatoes
and 120 North Korean won. Arriving in Yanbian, they were fortunate
enough to meet ethnic Koreans who treated them like kin. “They are
like our real grand parents,” says Chun sik of their caretakers.
The refugees face new hardships in China. Park Dong myong
(not his real name), 31, left home to find food for his family a year
and a half ago. Though he never left North Korea, soldiers caught
him, confiscated the food he’d collected and jailed him for two
months. By the time he got home, his parents had died of starvation.
His wife and child were missing, presumably on their own hunt for
food. Devastated, Park crossed the river into China and knocked on
the door of an ethnic Korean villager, who fed him and gave him dry
clothes. Now he lives in a town in Yanbian, protected by locals. He
stays inside at all times. “My days are filled with fear and stress,” he
says. “I feel totally trapped.”
International aid organizations are largely unaware of the plight
of the hidden refugees. So far the only group to document it has
71
been a South Korean organization called Buddhist Sharing
Movement, which took oral testimony from 1,019 North Korean
refugees living in Yanbian between September 1997 and May 1998.
According to its report, some areas of North Korea have not
received food from the government since 1992. Nearly 43 percent of
those interviewed said they had survived on grass, rice roots and pine
bark. Perhaps more alarming, 31 refugees had come from
Pyongyang, where living conditions are supposed to be better than
in other areas. Journalist Ishimaru warns: “If international organi
zations don’t step in to help [the refugees] quickly enough before
winter comes, I am very afraid there will be more deaths, among
even North Koreans who are outside North Korea.”
That won’t stop the refugees from coming. Life in North Korea
keeps getting bleaker. Along the Tumen, people scour the barren
hills for edible grasses. Ethnic Koreans from the Chinese border
towns who cross over to visit relatives report scenes of horror.
“Starved children and women in rags were begging on the street,”
said one ethnic Korean who toured Kimchaek, in North Hamgyong
province, in June. “Some were so weak they were dying right there.
The people seemed used to seeing corpses. I was told that two or
three people die of starvation every day.”
Those who can escape, do. Outside the Yanji airport, four
North Korean children dart from behind potted palms, asking for
food. Their parents have died of starvation, they say; they haven’t
eaten all day. Gratefully, they accept a meal and some cash, then
head off into the chilly night. Unlike Lee Chun sik and his sister,
they have found no protectors among their ethnic kinfolk. Without
help soon, their lives may be doomed.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 45
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ ñëåäóþùèì ðóññêèì ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì.
Ослабевшие от голода; пустая лачуга; предложить стол и
кров на ночь; избежать голода и лишений/трудностей; вне
опасности; стараться не выделяться/не показываться на лю
72
дях; осмелиться выйти; их ожидает изгнание; вынуждены скры
ваться; жизнь в лагере для политических заключенных; тепло
принимать беженцев; спасаться бегством от экономических
трудностей и режима; меньшая из бед, это волнует их меньше
всего, бедственное положение беженцев; относиться как к род
ным, не можем не накормить их; быть в бедственном положе
нии; оказывать помощь; каждая третья корейская семья; сильно
рисковать, оштрафовать на сумму; размер трехмесячной зарпла
ты, быстро; принимать; пограничник; в поисках пищи; пой
мать/схватить на месте преступления; нарушитель границы; про
сить милостыню; изможденный; умереть от голода; признаки не
доедания; пухнуть от голода; упорно искать; выжить, питаясь
капустой и корнями; все время; скрывающиеся беженцы; между
народные благотворительные организации; вмешаться/всту
питься за; жизнь становится все мрачнее; побираться на улицах.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 46
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå íà ñëóõ â áûñòðîì òåìïå.
Live undercover, live in hiding, flee economic hardship or mis
rule, under North Korean Law, keep a low profile, keep a high pro
file, starvation refugees, face hardships, face expulsion, face execu
tion or life in a political—prison camp, scour the barren hills for edi
ble grasses, die of starvation, signs of malnutrition, run from lives of
unrelenting misery; be desperate for food, long for stability, be in a
miserable state, to help the illegal crossers, life in North Korea keeps
getting bleaker, vigilant, to nab civilians, confiscate the food, be
missing, be on the hunt for, take oral testimony from, survive on
grass, dart from behind.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 47
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ, èñïîëüçóÿ âûðàæåíèÿ èç òåêñòà.
Они не умерли от голода, потому что их приютила пожи
лая корейская пара, сочувствуя бедственному положению этих
беженцев.
73
Все большее число эмигрантов из Северной Кореи поки
дает свою страну, спасаясь от голода, экономических труднос
тей и режима.
Китайцы корейского происхождения тепло принимают
беженцев.
Пограничники тоже пересекают границу в поисках пищи, но
подстерегают гражданское население и отнимают у них пищу.
Все больше беженцев появляется в приграничных насе
ленных пунктах Китая. Слабые и изможденные дети беженцы
живут подаянием, попрошайничая на улицах, или питаются
кореньями съедобных трав.
Беженцы не могут обратиться за помощью в международ
ные благотворительные организации.
Беженцы из Северной Кореи в Китае вряд ли находятся в
безопасности. Если китайским властям удастся поймать неле
гальных перебежчиков, то приютившим этих беженцев при
дется заплатить штраф, равный трехмесячному окладу. Корей
цев ожидает депортация из страны, смертная казнь или жизнь
в лагере для политзаключенных: по закону Северной Кореи
эмиграция запрещена.
Трое из них пропали без вести, отправившись на поиски
пищи.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 48
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèå ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè äëÿ ïðèâîäèìûõ íèæå ôðàçîâûõ ãëàãîëîâ (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèå).
ü
Êàêèå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ýêâèâàëåíòû óäà÷íåå?
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå èõ.
ü
Äîïîëíèòå ýòîò ñïèñîê òðàíñôîðìàöèé.
to make up — to constitute = составлять;
to come across —
take in smb/smth —
74
to show up —
to step in —
to figure out —
to head on —
to make up —
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 49
ü
Ñèíõðîííî ïîâòîðèòå, à ïîòîì ïåðåâåäèòå.
Cambodia, Afghanistan, Laos, Vietnam, El Salvador, Ethiopia,
Guatemala, Guatemalan, Vietnamese, Cambodian, Ethiopian.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 50
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ
ñêîðîïèñü (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Âîññòàíîâèòå âûñêàçûâàíèÿ ïî çàïèñÿì.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå èõ.
A.
The largest number of refugees in the world is from Afganistan,
probably because of the war there.
The third largest source of refugees, with many more than one
million, is Ethiopia.
Iraq is the source of more than four hundred thousand refugees,
while slightly fewer than 79,000 have come from Iran.
Both El Salvador and the island nation of Sri Lanka are the
sources of many more than one hundred thousand refugees each.
Finally, both Guatemala and Vietnam are each the source of slight
ly more than fifty thousand refugees. (Light & Fan Lang Ying 1989: 143)
B.
Refugees
The largest number of refugees arriving in the United States in
1985 came from Cambodia.
75
The second largest number of refugees that year came from
Vietnam. In 1982, the number of refugees arriving in the United
States from Vietnam was more than twice the number of refugees
arriving from Cambodia.
The number of refugees arriving both from Laos and
Afghanistan decreased during the period 1982–1985. In 1985 there
were more than 97,000 refugee arrivals.
C.
Legal Immigrants
Legal immigrants are nonresident aliens (non US citizens)
admitted to the United States for permanent residence through a
legal process.
In 1978 there was a worldwide limit of 290,000 immigrants to
the US.
This limit was lowered to 280,000 in 1980, and to 270,000 for
1981 and subsequent years.
Therefore, many people waited for long periods of time to be
admitted as immigrants to the US.
Most immigrants have saved money for their move, and they
often study the language of their new country.
ÈÌÌÈÃÐÀÖÈß.
×ÓÆÈÅ Â ×ÓÆÎÉ ÑÒÐÀÍÅ?
ü
Ñäåëàéòå äâóñòîðîííèé ïåðåâîä.
Часть 1
Дальний Восток — Русская Америка?
People in Russia may talk about emigration and its three waves
for hours, but they do not speak about immigration. They do not seem
to be interested in it. What they seem to be fairly sure about is the term
‘immigration’. They would say something like this, ‘Immigration is
76
just like emigration but quite the reverse.’ Is it because immigration is
not a topical subject?
Дело в том, что в целом Россия не Америка и не Израиль:
мы не страна, населенная иммигрантами и их потомками. Мы
автохтонные, то есть коренные жители. Кроме того, если не
лукавить, то из России охотней уезжали, нежели приезжали…
Is it also true about the Russian Far East? I do not think that people who live in this territory are indigenous, native people.
Дальний Восток в этом отношении уникален. Это, пожа
луй, единственный регион России, который активно заселял
ся путем иммиграции, за счет переселенцев из других стран.
How did the plan to populate the Far East with foreigners and
non-Russians come up?
Напомню, что Дальний Восток сначала заселялся так же,
как и Америка, Австралия и другие колонии, — добровольца
ми из метрополии. Этот процесс шел медленно и не всегда
удачно. Традиционные методы земледелия русских крестьян в
совершенно иных климатических условиях не работали. Тогда
и родилась идея заселить новую колонию представителями
других народов.
Who were the first to arrive in the Far East and Primorye?
Сначала это были подданные Российской империи (ны
не иностранцы) — финны и эстонцы, которые, как предпо
лагало правительство, могли бы закрепиться на новых зем
лях, занимаясь не земледелием, а привычным для них про
мыслом рыбы.
Did they come to settle down?
Да, группы финнов и эстонцев действительно прибывали
на Дальний Восток, многие скандинавы здесь осели и до сих
пор живут. Кстати, известный в Приморье рыболовецкий кол
хоз «Новый мир» — не что иное, как бывший эстонский посе
лок.
Did the authorities make attempts to attract nonresident aliens
(non-Russian citizens) to the region for permanent residence?
Разрабатывался проект освоения новой колонии с помо
щью чехов, эмигрировавших в Америку.
77
Why did the authorities hope that the Check colonists in America
would respond and take on the offer?
Чешской колонии не нравилась жизнь в Америке, и рос
сийское правительство обратилось к ним с призывом, рассчи
тывая на помощь «братского славянского народа». На рубеже
веков в мире были очень сильны идеи «панславизма» — брат
ства всех славянских народов.
I haven’t heard of any Check immigration from America.
Было много желающих, однако чехи потребовали слиш
ком большой автономии, в частности в деле судопроизводст
ва, и переселение чехов не состоялось. Делались попытки пе
реселить ирландцев, поляков, немцев, но тоже безрезультатно.
I wonder, what could possibly make Europeans wish to leave home
countries for a far away country?
Следует помнить, что на рубеже XIX–XX веков Европа не
была такой богатой и сытой, как сейчас, и тысячи, если не мил
лионы европейцев покидали родину в поисках лучшей доли.
Did individual immigrants arrive in Prymorye?
Иммигранты из Европы и Америки прибывали на Дальний
Восток и самостоятельно. Достаточно заметная часть дальневос
точных предпринимателей — это иностранцы, принявшие рус
ское подданство. Можно упомянуть такие известные фамилии
как Ю. Бриннер, А. Даттан, А. Демби, Г. Дикман, и многие другие.
How was the project of settling the Russian Far East carried on
in the Soviet period?
В 20–30 е годы активно претворялся в жизнь проект со
здания Еврейской автономной области. Следует отметить, что
в то время этот проект вполне серьезно рассматривался миро
выми еврейскими организациями как альтернатива проекту
создания государства Израиль. Тогда в Биробиджан прибыло
немало евреев — иммигрантов из Германии, США, Аргентины
и других стран.
It is known that the largest number of immigrants were from
Korea and China.
Правильно. Самым заметным явлением дальневосточной
иммиграции была иммиграция азиатская, прежде всего корей
78
ская. Китайцев до революции было не меньше, но говорить об
иммиграции китайцев нельзя, они в массе своей оставались
подданными Серединной империи.
How would you explain the fact that ethnic Koreans were more
likely than Chinese to receive Russian citizenship?
Корейцы, заселявшие край с 60 х годов XIX века, стреми
лись принять русское подданство и православие и искренне
пытались закрепиться на своей новой родине, так как на роди
не их ожидала смертная казнь за эмиграцию. Корейцы дейст
вительно были иммигрантами. С корейцами связан последний
эпизод массовой иммиграции на Дальнем Востоке. Речь идет
о так называемых «сахалинских» корейцах, переселенных
японцами на Сахалин в годы Второй мировой войны и остав
шихся в Советском Союзе.
Часть 2
Новая волна
Today a new wave of immigration is on the rise. To be exact, new
immigrants can hardly be called foreigners. In general, they are former Soviets who became foreigners only a few years ago.
Действительно, сегодняшние иммигранты — жители быв
ших союзных республик, которых у нас теперь именуют вы
нужденными переселенцами.
Has the current immigration process in the Far East taken as
large-scale proportions as it has in Kuban’ and Stavropol Krai
(migration from the Caucasus) or in the areas of Omsk and
Novosibirsk (migrants from the Middle Asia and Kazakhstan), where
it is now a demographic problem?
Как нам сообщили в Миграционной службе Приморско
го края, на 1 октября 1997 года в наш край прибыли 1658 се
мей, или 3923 человека беженцев и вынужденных пересе
ленцев.
What areas are they from?
В большинстве своем это переселенцы из Средней Азии и
Казахстана. К примеру, за 1992–96 гг. в наш край прибыли 306
79
переселенцев из Таджикистана, 388 — из Казахстана. Больше
всего приехало из Узбекистана — 424 человека. Количество
вынужденных переселенцев из Закавказья меньше почти на
порядок. К примеру, из Грузии приехали 59 человек. Пересе
ленцев из республик Прибалтики — единицы, из Литвы, на
пример, 5 человек.
What about Slavic ‘brother nations’?
Любопытно, но не зарегистрировано ни одного вынуж
денного переселенца из славянских республик — Украины и
Белоруссии. Жители этих государств предпочитают приез
жать на заработки, но оседать на Дальнем Востоке не соби
раются.
What is the national composition of new arrivals?
Конечно, это в основном русские. Они составляют больше
80% всех вынужденных переселенцев. (1316 человек за
1992–96 гг.) На втором месте — корейцы, высланные в свое
время в Казахстан и Узбекистан и вновь приезжающие в Рос
сию иммигрантами (177 человек) Дальше идут украинцы
(103), татары (65) и другие. Замыкает список кумык, приехав
ший в Приморье в единственном числе.
Do federal and local authorities render financial and material
assistance to refugee arrivals and displaced people?
Конечно, по закону беженцам и вынужденным переселен
цам должны помогать на новом месте. И нельзя сказать, что
помощь не оказывается. В этом году выдано 29 возвратных
беспроцентных ссуд на приобретение жилья на сумму 932 млн
рублей. В этом году активно осуществляется программа помо
щи детям из семей беженцев и вынужденных переселенцев.
Под эту программу уже получено 100 млн 557 тыс. рублей, ко
торые пойдут на покупку одежды, учебников, бесплатного пи
тания этих детей.
The settling of the Far East was always a great concern of the
Russian emperors, then of the first Soviet government. Nowadays it is
taken over by the Russian government.
Сегодня у России появилась потенциальная возможность
форсировать заселение Дальнего Востока. Причем потенци
80
альные переселенцы — русские, оказавшиеся разбросанными
по всем обломкам Советской империи — могут стать идеаль
ными колонистами.
Ñan’t they stay in the republics where they lived before the disintegration of the Soviet empire?
Жизнь в ином этническом окружении, когда априори
предпочтение отдавалось титульной нации, ее традициям,
привычкам, языку, привела к тому, что после падения СССР
произошел резкий подъем национального самосознания, со
провождавшийся далеко не всегда терпимым отношением к
русским. Это побудило многих сорваться с обжитых мест. С
другой стороны, предпочтение, отдававшееся представителям
титульной нации в союзных республиках, обусловило то, что
большинство из них отличаются высокой активностью, трудо
любием и отличным знанием своего дела.
Do you believe this might work? Do you really think those who
have lived, say, in the Baltic States, would like to give up their comfortable lives for the remote areas in the Russian Far East?
Поживем — увидим. Может, российскому правительству
стоит вспомнить о приоритетах своих предшественников и
подумать о федеральной программе, стимулирующей пересе
ление на Дальний Восток.
По материалам статьи Вадима Губаря
«Çл, ¹ 86 (398), 14 íîÿáðÿ 1997
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 51
ü
Âïèøèòå â êàæäóþ èç òðåõ êîëîíîê Òàáëèöû òå ÿçûêîâûå
òðàíñôîðìàöèè, êîòîðûå âû ïðîèçâåëè ïðè ïåðåâîäå âûøåïðèâåäåííîãî òåêñòà è êîòîðûå â êîíå÷íîì ñ÷åòå ïðèâîäÿò ê
ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì òðàíñôîðìàöèÿì, íàïðèìåð, ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèì
èëè êîìïðåññèè òåêñòà (ìîæåòå äîáàâèòü êîëè÷åñòâî ñòðîê,
åñëè íåîáõîäèìî).
ü
Ñäåëàéòå âûâîä, êàêèå èç âíóòðèÿçûêîâûõ òðàíñôîðìàöèé,
âåäóùèõ ê òðàíñôîðìàöèÿì ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì, èñïîëüçóþòñÿ â
äàííîì òåêñòå íàèáîëåå ÷àñòî.
81
Ëåêñèêîñåìàíòè÷åñêèå
to settle down — to
live
Ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèå
Ãðàììàòèêîñèíòàêñè÷åñêèå
We’ll live and see (It
Под эту программу
уже получено 100 млн remains to be seen,
etc.)
500 тыс. рублей… —
The Program totals …
funding…
to give up — to refuse
disintegrate— collapse,
dissolve
Тексты
для самостоятельного анализа и перевода
1
ü
Î ÷åì èäåò ðå÷ü â ýòîì òåêñòå, ñóäÿ ïî çàãîëîâêó?
ü
Îòâåòüòå íà äàííûé âîïðîñ äâóìÿ-òðåìÿ ïðåäëîæåíèÿìè, êîòîðûå ìîãëè áû ïåðåäàòü îñíîâíîå ñîäåðæàíèå òåêñòà.
PRADES, THAI (THAILAND), RAJANAJAK THAI (THAI
KINGDOM), or SAYAM (SIAM), by name MUANG THAI (LAND
OF THE FREE), Thailand: FLAG country located in the center of
mainland Southeast Asia. Its area of 198,115 square miles (513,115
square kilometers) consists of two broad geographic areas: a larger
section in the north and a smaller peninsular section in the south.
The main body of the country is surrounded by Myanmar (Burma)
to the west, Laos to the north and east, Cambodia to the southeast,
and the Gulf of Thailand (Gulf of Siam) to the south. Peninsular
82
Thailand stretches southward from the southwestern corner down
the Malay Peninsula; Myanmar extends along the western portion of
the peninsula as far as the Isthmus of Kra, after which Thailand
occupies the entire peninsula until reaching its southern border
with Malaysia at roughly latitude 6° N. Bangkok, Thailand’s capi
tal and chief port, is in the main portion at the head of the Gulf of
Thailand.
Siam until 1939 and again briefly in 1945–48. The several eth
nic and religious groups represented among Thailand’s people are
characteristic of the cultural diversity that for centuries has spread
southward from China and eastward from India. Indeed, the name
“Thai” to describe the country’s people came into use only in the
20th century.
The economy. Thailand’s investment oriented economy is
among the most rapidly growing in Asia. Despite this success,
economic development has been highly uneven, especially in
agriculture. Although much of Thailand’s export revenues and a
majority of the labor force depends on agriculture, its contribu
tions to economic growth have declined consistently since 1950.
Aiming at diversification, the government has encouraged invest
ment in small industry. To encourage exports, duties are low,
except on rice, to which a premium is attached to prevent domes
tic shortages. Unions are prohibited and strikes not allowed
unless management fails to agree with employees and govern
ment mediators.
Resources. tin, mined mostly in the peninsula, long has been
among Thailand’s most valuable mineral resources, and the
country has become one of the world’s largest producers. The
construction of a smelter made it possible to process most of the
ore domestically. Fluctuations in the world tin market, however,
have caused production to be reduced. Other important mining
and quarrying operations produce coal (lignite), zinc, gypsum,
fluorite, tungsten, limestone, and marble. Rubies and sapphires
are mined along the east coast of the peninsula. Thailand is one
of the world’s largest exporters of gems and jewelry, and these are
among the country’s top sources of foreign exchange.
83
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 52
ü
Ðàçáåéòå âûøåïðèâåäåííûé òåêñò íà íåñêîëüêî çàêîí÷åííûõ
ïî ñìûñëó ñåãìåíòîâ, êîòîðûå ìîæíî áûëî áû ëåãêî çàïîìíèòü è óñòíî ïåðåâåñòè.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 53
ü
Íàéäèòå è âûïèøèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèì àíãëèéñêèì ñëîâàì:
tin —
coal —
zinc —
gypsum —
fluorite —
tungsten —
limestone —
rubies —
sapphires —
marble —
gems —
2
ASEAN LOSES CHANCE TO SHAPE REGION’S POLITICAL FUTURE
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
Vejai Bala
Even as the 20th century comes to a close, the struggle for self
determination and independent statehood continues to fire the
imagination of man, making nationalism one of the most — if not
the most — active forces in politics.
Nearly everywhere it rears its head it is also accompanied by
bloodletting. Yet, political elites appear to forget this fact. This is
84
particularly evident when the carnage following the decision of the
majority of East Timorese to vote for independence from Indonesia
is considered.
The Asian financial crisis of 1997 appears to have contributed to
amnesia in Southeast Asia, overwhelming the countries with econom
ic concerns. This has led, among other things, to their inability to
keep abreast of events in the region and the strengthening of the role
of the United Nations and the powers that play a critical role in it.
In the case of the earlier struggles for independence, historical
connection between people and land gave legitimacy to the cam
paign. But history, more often than not, presents insufficient
grounds for present day nationalists.
Where the campaign for independent nationhood is waged in a
multicultural state, legitimacy may be secured from the politically
dominant nation, which can sponsor the aspiration. This may lead
to either outright independence or changes in the political structure
of the state, taking into consideration national aspirations. The lat
ter is the case with the Quebecois in Canada.
In situations where recognition is denied, sponsorship from
without the state is necessary. The success or failure of a nationalist
movement in such cases depends on the recognition it secures from
member countries of the United Nations.
Following the hurried departure of Portugal from East Timor
and the subsequent invasion of the territory by the Indonesian mili
tary in 1975 — ostensibly to thwart a communist takeover — Lisbon
brought its influence to bear on the European Union and the United
Nations.
Thus the Indonesian annexation of East Timor, although tacit
ly supported by the United States, was not recognized. This lent
legitimacy to the East Timor independence movement.
But, as Indonesia formed part of the anti communist bloc dur
ing the Cold War, the demand for independence took a back seat,
surfacing only in the early 1990s.
During the Cold War, economic growth was seen as the way to
ensure political stability. This view was also shared by the then mem
bers of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations: Thailand,
85
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore and the Philippines. Following a
summit in Bali in 1976, Economic and Trade Ministers of these
countries started to play an important role.
The pro capitalist policies adopted by countries in the region
aimed at modernizing their economies had arguably helped trans
form it (the region) into the most dynamic part of the world by the
1980s.
This was also the period when champions of liberal democracy
in the advanced nations worked closely with authoritarian regimes
around the world. Thus, Australia stands out among the nations of
the North, which had recognized the annexation of East Timor.
With the end of the Cold War, market capitalism and its politi
cal representative, liberal democracy, emerged as victors in the ide
ological struggle against socialism. Among other things,
Governments in South East Asia found themselves having to come
to terms with the political and economic demands of ideologues in
the advanced industrial nations as politicians there came increasing
ly to champion the environment and human rights.
Economically, Governments in the region came under pressure
to meet the costs of environment friendly policies and politically, to
adopt institutional reforms to advance liberal democracy. Hence,
alongside explanations to justify deforestation in the name of devel
opment they went to great lengths to show their commitment to
reforestation.
At the same time, nations in the region which perceived them
selves as symbols of the democratic ideal took a “forward position”.
In this respect, Thailand and the Philippines stand out.
In 1997, they called for reconsideration of ASEAN’s non inter
ference policy, seeking the right to comment on the political situa
tion in member countries. The issue proved contentious, raised as
it was by the Foreign Ministers of Thailand and the Philippines dur
ing talks on Myanmar’s membership.
The generals in that country had taken over the reins of power
after failing to honor the results of the election in which Aung San
Suu Kyi’s National League for Democracy had won. However, they
(Thailand and the Philippines) lacked the quorum, which gave cre
86
dence to the argument that posited economic modernization as the
key to political tolerance.
Yet, the leadership displayed by the two countries during the
genocide following the UN supervised East Timor referendum on
Sept 1 was singularly lacking. Members of ASEAN who were res
olute in accepting Myanmar’s membership too displayed similar
indifference.
Jakarta’s policy in the 22 years since the annexation was aimed
at assimilating East Timorese into the Indonesian mainstream.
Among other things, this led to the diversion of precious resources
to the region.
East Timor on the eve of the referendum had in place infra
structure such as hospitals, schools, roads and a telecommunica
tions network which far outweighed Portugal’s contribution during
its 200 year rule of the territory. It is not surprising that the decision
of close to 80 per cent of East Timorese to vote for independence
was perceived as a show of ingratitude by sections of the population
which were pro Indonesia.
In the Malay world, reaction to ungratefulness is usually emo
tional, manifesting in destruction. Thus when brothers fight, it is
usually books or bicycles, for example, which fall victim. Likewise
pro Indonesia East Timorese went on to destroy properties in Dili
and in the process many lives were lost.
What happened in East Timor was predictable by anyone who
had an anthropological sense. But sadly this proved not to be the
case.
ASEAN countries left it to the UN, that august body which
many in the developing world consider as skewed to the rich North,
to organize and supervise the referendum. Clearly, they could have
played a critical role, anticipating steps to be taken in the post ref
erendum stage in the interest of Jakarta and East Timor.
Much has been written about Australia’s leading role in the
UN peacekeeping mission to East Timor (Unifet). By and large,
they have been critical, seeing it as smacking of neo colonialism
and designed to gain control of purported oil reserves in the terri
tory.
87
Singularly absent in these comments are why and how Australia
got to play a leading politico military role in the region. In arguing
that this stems from the failure of the countries in the region to take
a proactive role, it is also important to view it (Australia’s role) in the
context of politics in the post Cold War era and her position as an
ideologue of liberal democracy.
It is also reflective of the narrow nationalist concerns of the
countries in ASEAN that have caused them to ignore the new reali
ties in the region.
The East Timor incident had provided ASEAN an excellent
opportunity to play an active role in shaping politics in the
region. Yet, concern with economic issues led them to be overly
inward looking. The price they have to pay is that the destiny of
the region will continue to be determined by outside forces for
some time.
Much therefore depends on how fast ASEAN can learn from
the lesson of East Timor as well as take cognizance of Australia’s
position and ambitions. They should recognize the fact that there is
now greater correlation between public opinion and state policy in
that country.
In the past two decades, Australians have in the main been
critical of their Government’s policy vis a vis Indonesia partic
ularly with respect to East Timor. Realization of this fact is
essential if Southeast Asians want to play a leading role in the
region.
The window of opportunity provided by the East Timor cri
sis is now shut but as a well known German philosopher once
said — notwithstanding its sexist undertones — in the 19th cen
tury, “it is not history that makes men, but men who make histo
ry”.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 54
ü
88
Ê êàêèì ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì òðàíñôîðìàöèÿì âû ïðèáåãëè â òåêñòå? Óêàæèòå èõ, äàéòå àíàëèç ýòèì ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèì,
ãðàììàòè÷åñêèì è ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèì òðàíñôîðìàöèÿì.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 55
ü
Ñãðóïïèðóéòå ñëåäóþùèå ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ â çàâèñèìîñòè îò
ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ ïðèåìîâ, èñïîëüçîâàííûõ âàìè ïðè ïåðåâîäå
âûðàæåíèé.
The window of opportunity; sexist undertones; vis-a-vis; to
fire the imagination; to take cognizance of; in shaping politics
in/of; the destiny of the region will continue to be determined by;
to take/to play an active (a proactive) role; smacking of neo colo
nialism; the UN peacekeeping mission; singularly absent in these
comments are why and how Australia got to play a leading politi
co military role in the region; the UN, that august body skewed to
the rich North; the policy was aimed at assimilating East Timorese
into the Indonesian mainstream; the leadership was singularly
lacking; the generals in that country had taken over the reins of
power after failing to honor the results of the election; economi
cally, Governments in the region came under pressure to meet the
costs of environment friendly policies and politically, to adopt
institutional reforms to advance liberal democracy; the demand
for independence took a back seat; the Asian financial crisis of
1997 appears to have contributed to amnesia in Southeast Asia; to
be tacitly supported by; nearly everywhere it (nationalism) rears its
head it is also accompanied by bloodletting.
3
«ß ÂÑÅÃÄÀ ÂÈÆÓ ÑÒÀÊÀÍ ÍÀÏÎËÎÂÈÍÓ ÏÎËÍÛÌ»
ü
Êàê âû äóìàåòå, ïî÷åìó àâòîð èíòåðâüþ äàë åìó òàêîå íàçâàíèå?
ü
×òî âû ìîæåòå îïðåäåëèòü ïî çàãîëîâêó òåêñòà? (Ýòîò ïðè¸ì
íàçûâàåòñÿ ýêñòðàïîëÿöèÿ òåêñòà.)
ü
×òî ñòîèò, ïî-âàøåìó, çà ýòèì çàãîëîâêîì? Èíòåðïðåòàöèåé
÷åãî îí ÿâëÿåòñÿ?
89
ü
Ïðåäñòàâüòå: âû — óñòíûé ïåðåâîä÷èê è âàì ïðåäñòîèò ñåé÷àñ
ïåðåâîäèòü ñëåäóþùèé íèæå òåêñò. Â êàêîì íàïðàâëåíèè âû
áóäåòå åãî ýêñòðàïîëèðîâàòü: â ñòîðîíó «Äà, ñêîðåå ïîëíûì»
èëè «Íåò, ïîæàëóé, ïóñòûì». Ïðîâåðüòå ñåáÿ ïî îêîí÷àíèè ïåðåâîäà, âû îêàçàëèñü ïðàâû èëè íåò.
ü
Êàêàÿ ñòèëèñòè÷åñêàÿ òðàíñôîðìàöèÿ, íåéòðàëèçóþùàÿ ìàðêèðîâàííûé çàãîëîâîê, ìîæåò áûòü èñïîëüçîâàíà âìåñòî íåãî?
Íà âîïðîñû «Âåêà» îòâå÷àåò Ñþçàííà Ìàññè, áûâøèé ñîâåòíèê ïðåçèäåíòà ÑØÀ Ðîíàëüäà Ðåéãàíà.
Сюзанна Масси — американка швейцарского происхож
дения. Автор книг «Павловск. Жизнь русского дворца», «Ни
колай и Александр», по которой был снят в Голливуде извест
ный кинофильм. Была научным сотрудником Центра иссле
дований России в Гарварде, консультировала конгрессменов.
Ãîñïîæà Ìàññè, âû çíàêîìû ñ íàøèì ïðåçèäåíòîì Âëàäèìèðîì Ïóòèíûì?
Я его немного знаю лично. Мы познакомились с ним, по
тому что я хорошо знала Анатолия Собчака. С последним
судьба свела нас, когда он читал лекции студентам. Помню,
года три четыре назад я встретила Владимира Путина в одной
из московских гостиниц, очень удивилась и спросила, что он
делает в столице. «Я буду работать в Управлении делами пре
зидента», — ответил он. Мы не могли долго говорить, так как
я была вместе с группой американцев. Однажды мы виделись
с ним в храме Христа Спасителя. Он сам подошел и поцеловал
меня. То, что я слышала о нем, — это «умный, способный, де
ловой человек». И очень важно, что он молодой. Ведь мне
пришлось наблюдать нескольких ваших президентов. Власть
изматывает человека. По силам ли Путину одному решить
проблемы, которые стоят перед Россией? Хочу надеяться, что
он сможет это сделать. Будучи оптимисткой, я всегда вижу
стакан наполовину полным, а не наполовину пустым.
Я всегда считала, что Россия и Америка должны работать
вместе. От этого выиграют другие страны. Свою задачу в этом
90
сотрудничестве вижу в том, чтобы разрушить стереотипы, на
ладить взаимоотношения между людьми.
Ñþçàííà, âû íå ïåðâûé ãîä ïðîôåññèîíàëüíî çàíèìàåòåñü
Ðîññèåé. Êàê âû äóìàåòå, êàêîå áóäóùåå óãîòîâàíî íàøåé ñòðàíå?
Только сумасшедший возьмется предсказывать будущее
России. Да и сами русские любят говорить о своей непредска
зуемости. Но, повторяю, я — оптимист. Мне кажется, что вам
нужно прежде всего укрепить законодательную базу и создать
гражданское общество. Следует научиться помогать друг дру
гу. Мало кто у вас знает, что в Америке только 10 процентов
финансовой помощи на социальные нужды и культуру посту
пает от государства. Все остальное — от частных лиц. Россия
нам тоже пора понять, что нельзя полагаться только на
власть — надо больше работать самим.
È âñå æå, êàêîé ïðåäñòàåò ñåãîäíÿ Ðîññèÿ â ãëàçàõ àìåðèêàíöåâ?
Меня беспокоит, что мы, американцы, снова возвращаем
ся к стереотипам. Ведь что происходит? Наши газеты и ТВ го
ворят о мафии, голоде в Чечне и других проблемах, забывая
про позитивную информацию. Кроме того, достаточно много
людей, сделавших карьеру в период «холодной войны», про
должают и сейчас занимать высокое положение. Иногда вижу,
как они ищут предлог сказать: «Смотрите, они ничуть не изме
нились!» Я пытаюсь бороться с этим, полагая, что все опасе
ния остались в прошлом и надо двигаться вперед. Доказываю
американцам, что Россию надо воспринимать такой, какой
она стала сегодня. Сейчас Россия стала обгонять Америку в
своем развитии. У нас некому отвечать на российские иници
ативы — идет формирование новой администрации.
 ÷åì, íà âàø âçãëÿä, êðîåòñÿ ïðè÷èíà, ìÿãêî ãîâîðÿ, íåïîíèìàíèÿ ìåæäó Ðîññèåé è ÑØÀ?
США — молодая держава, мы привыкли спешить, что не
редко приводит к ошибкам. Россия — государство с древней
историей. Эти особенности друг друга мы и должны учитывать
91
в своем общении. Очень важно найти тот позитив, который
нас объединяет, и определить, что мы можем сделать вместе.
Русские слишком подозрительны, это признак слабости. На
до, как поется в одной американской песне, акцентировать
внимание на положительном и исключать все отрицательное.
Сейчас я много работаю в американских и российских архивах
в надежде написать правдивую историю о том, что происходи
ло раньше в наших странах, и пытаюсь ответить на извечный
вопрос: «Почему мы все еще не понимаем друг друга?»
Êàê âû äóìàåòå, ñòîèò ëè Ðîññèè ðàññ÷èòûâàòü íà àìåðèêàíñêèå èíâåñòèöèè?
Одной из ваших серьезнейших проблем является налого
вая система. Для меня представляется невероятным, что ваши
«большие люди» вывозят капиталы за границу, не желая вкла
дывать их в своей стране. Пусть они много зарабатывают, но
пусть оставляют заработанное в России. И, конечно, нужна
законодательная стабильность — законы не должны пересма
триваться слишком часто.
×òî âàñ, Ñþçàííà, òàê òÿíåò â Ðîññèþ?
Это мне трудно объяснить. Одно могу сказать: «Мне без
вас скучно жить!»
Беседовал Антон Потапов
Век, 13.04.2001
Публикуется с разрешения редакции
http://nel.nns.ru/interv/int3452.html
4
CHALLENGE 2001 — JAPAN’S FOREIGN POLICY
TOWARD THE 21ST CENTURY
92
ü
Ïîñìîòðèòå íà êàðòó ßïîíèè (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèå, ñòð. 248) è îïðåäåëèòå, êàêèå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ïðîáëåìû, ìîãóò ñòîÿòü
ïåðåä ýòîé ñòðàíîé.
ü
Ïðåäñòàâüòå, ÷òî âû — óñòíûé ïåðåâîä÷èê è âàì ïðåäñòîèò
ñåé÷àñ ïåðåâîäèòü ñëåäóþùèé íèæå òåêñò.  êàêîì íàïðàâëå-
íèè âû áóäåòå åãî ýêñòðàïîëèðîâàòü: â ñòîðîíó «Äà, ïåðåä ýòîé
ñòðàíîé ñòîèò ìíîãî ïðîáëåì» èëè «Íåò, ó íå¸ íåò êàêèõ-ëèáî
ñóùåñòâåííûõ ïðîáëåì»? Ïðîâåðüòå ñåáÿ ïî îêîí÷àíèè ïåðåâîäà, âû îêàçàëèñü ïðàâû èëè íåò.
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ïèñüìåííî êàæäóþ èç ñåìè ÷àñòåé òåêñòà.
Ïðåäâàðèòåëüíî îçàãëàâüòå êàæäóþ èç ýòèõ ÷àñòåé.
Ñäåëàéòå êîìïðåññèþ êàæäîé èç ÷àñòåé â ïðîöåññå ïåðåâîäà
(ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèå).
Êàêóþ ðîëü èãðàþò âûäåëåííûå êóðñèâîì ïðîìåæóòî÷íûå
ïîäçàãîëîâêè â òåêñòå è ìîæíî ëè èõ ýêñòðàïîëèðîâàòü.
Óñòíî îáúÿñíèòå, êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû èñïîëüçîâàëè: ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèå, ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå, ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèå.
The following proposal was submitted to Foreign Minister Masahiko
Koumura by:
Prof. Takashi Inoguchi, University of Tokyo
Prof. Shigeki Hakamada, Aoyama Gakuin University
Prof. Masayuki Yamauchi, University of Tokyo
Prof. Shinichi Kitaoka, University of Tokyo
Prof. Susumu Yamakage, University of Tokyo
Prof. Ryosei Kokubun, Keio University
Prof. Akihiko Tanaka, University of Tokyo
A new century — the 21st century — is just around the corner.
Amid the uncertainties in the aftermath of the Cold War, our task is
to design and build by ourselves a new world order suited to this new
century.
What are the challenges for Japan’s foreign policy toward the
21st century? At the threshold of a new millennium, it is most
opportune for taking a fresh look at the Japanese diplomacy from a
long term perspective. The following is our proposal on its general
direction.
1. Objectives of Japan’s foreign policy
(Objectives of Japan’s foreign policy)
In discussing the challenges for Japan’s foreign policy toward
the 21st century, let us first begin with setting forth its objectives.
93
What are the goals of our foreign policy or what are the nation
al interests to be pursued through diplomacy? In the core of such
interests is to ensure security and prosperity of Japan and the
Japanese people.
(Engagement as a global player)
Security and prosperity of Japan cannot be achieved without
stability and prosperity of the international community. As discussed
in the subsequent sections, globalization will form an ever more
irreversible and massive current in the 21st century, and interde
pendence across national borders will grow deeper in all areas. The
way for Japan to secure its national interests amid this trend is to
develop and present ideas and act as a global player in pursuit of sta
bility and prosperity of the international community.
(The vision that should be presented to the world)
The vision that Japan should present to the international com
munity as a global player is “building a world where people can
count on a better future.”
The 20th century, that has seen the two world wars, was not only
a “century of development” but also a “century of lessons.” We must
draw upon these lessons and make the forthcoming century a “cen
tury of hope” for the Japanese people and for humankind as a whole.
The vision presented by then Prime Minister Ryutaro Hashimoto at
the General Assembly of the United Nations in 1996 — “creation of
a better world for future generations” and working toward that goal
by making the world “a more stable, prosperous and comfortable
place to live” — is still appropriate as we turn toward the 21st centu
ry. Now our duty is to choose the path to realize this vision.
Freedom, democracy and respect for basic human rights are the
central principles that have propelled Japan’s post WWII develop
ment and are now being widely shared throughout the world in the
aftermath of the Cold War. Promoting broader acceptance of these
principles is one way of ensuring a better future. Development assis
94
tance, including poverty alleviation, and conservation of the global
environment will also help these principles permeate the world.
It should be equally emphasized that various values and cultures
based on the historical background of each country and region must
coexist. The well being of humankind in the new century will be
attained only through promoting better understanding of and gen
erosity to different values through international and inter regional
dialogues. Having developed its own unique culture while respecting
universal values, Japan — both as a leading country in Asia and as a
global player — ought to be able to reach out the world by address
ing this idea in a steadfast manner.
(Japan as a credible nation)
As Japan pursues its goals and visions through foreign policy, it
is essential that Japan be a credible nation. As cited in the
Constitution of Japan, “We desire to occupy an honored place in
international society.” It should be kept in our minds that enhanced
credibility of our foreign policy will enable us to achieve our nation
al interests and move forward the international community along
with our ideas in pursuit of more stable and prosperous world. To be
a credible nation, we must fulfill such basic requirements for a
nation as maintaining policy coherence and taking responsible
actions as a nation. There is a compelling need, as discussed in the
following sections, of an overall review of the basic stance of Japan
and Japanese foreign policy without being bound by the past.
2. Japan’s foreign policy and the international community at the
turn of the century
(Japan’s foreign policy in the 20th century)
In searching for a direction of our foreign policy in the 21st cen
tury, let us first touch upon the path of Japan’s foreign policy in the
20th century.
Japan emerged as a member of the international community
following the Meiji Restoration at a time when power politics was
95
prevailing on a global scale in the latter half of the 19th century. In
its struggle for survival, Japan strived to catch up with the Western
countries and, at the start of the 20th century, emerged as one of the
world’s major powers in the wake of the Russo Japanese War. Japan
also expanded its diplomatic spheres, including to the League of
Nations. The history proved, however, its subsequent policy mis
takes, which prompted the country to pursue further development
through rapid expansion into neighboring regions and to turn to
armed force to resolve the problems it confronted.
Japan’s reconstruction from the devastation following the Pacific
War was based on our deep reflection upon its preceding policies.
Japan abandoned the notion of resolving international conflicts by
force and decided to pursue world peace and stability through diplo
matic efforts with an emphasis on the United Nations. Japan entered
into security arrangements with the United States of America as the
main pillar of its defense policy, while building its own minimal nec
essary defense capability. While ensuring its own security and a stable
international environment through these measures, Japan placed its
first and foremost priority on the pursuit of economic development in
the principle of market economy. In the political sphere, Japan has
embraced democracy as its fundamental principle.
It goes without saying that Japan, as a result, has achieved
remarkable economic development and become the world’s second
largest economy. Simultaneously, Japan, with its economic and
technological strengths, has played an active role in various areas
including development assistance, through which it attained high
reputation and gained trust of the international community. Japan’s
influence at the political stage has been also recognized, for
instance, at the United Nations and G8 Summits.
(The international community and Japanese foreign policy at the
turn of the century)
In this way, Japan’s post war foreign policy has provided the
foundation for the secure and prosperous lives of the Japanese peo
96
ple. The end of the Cold War has dramatically reduced the risk of
war on a global scale. Democracy, basic human rights and other val
ues have been gaining universality. Amid these favorable develop
ments, we are now entering into the 21st century. The core of
Japan’s foreign policy, including the Japan US security arrange
ments, that has brought security and prosperity to the Japanese peo
ple, should be maintained over the next century. Yet, in light of the
new trends and emerging challenges, Japanese diplomacy must
embody a new perspective in order to address them.
3. Three major trends toward the 21st century
What shape will the international community take in the 21st
century?
The future remains uncertain. Difficult as it may be for anyone to
foresee the exact shape of the international community that surrounds
Japan in the 21st century, we could recognize major trends in the
international community that would govern the general direction of
the international relations in the coming century. These trends will be
discussed from political, economic, and security aspects.
(1) Political transformation: Diversification of national power,
actors, and issues (Diversification of sources of national power)
National power, which underpins a nation’s foreign policy,
derives from various factors, including military strength, economic
power, technology and culture. In real international politics, mili
tary strength continues to play an important role as the last resort in
maintaining and restoring order. Since the end of the Cold War,
however, the role played by other types of power has grown in rela
tive importance. With international cooperation weighing more in
maintaining order in today’s world, persuasiveness matters more to
win the support of other countries in forging a favorable interna
tional order.
(Diversification of actors in international relations)
With advances in information technology, people exchange
information more freely across national borders via the Internet and
97
other media. Progress in the means of transportation facilitates trav
eling. Against such backdrops, international networking is taking
place at various levels in today’s world. Diplomatic authorities are
not necessarily the only actors engaged in international relations. An
increasing influence of non governmental actors on the internation
al relations cannot be overseen as shown in NGO’s active roles in
such areas as antipersonnel landmines and global warming.
(Indivisibility of internal affairs and foreign affairs)
Distinction between international and domestic affairs is
becoming less rigid, exposing internal affairs to the scrutiny of the
entire world. In the economic arena, for example, with the unifica
tion of markets on a global scale, it is market players, regardless of
their nationality, that evaluate a nation’s policies. As the number and
seriousness of issues that have global impacts like environmental
issues increase, domestic policies inevitably become subject to inter
national consideration. Thus, the long standing principle of non
interference in internal affairs is likely to be challenged more fre
quently.
(2) Economic transformation: globalization. The ongoing
process of globalization has given a new impetus to worldwide eco
nomic development through expansion of trade and investment.
Globalization will continue as a major, irreversible current as we
foresee further consolidation across borders, inter alia, growing
interdependence among nations.
(Chain reaction of crises)
Rapidly deepening of interdependence in the global economy
and the rise of huge private sector capital has also created a systemic
risk that cannot be solved by individual countries. The Asian cur
rency and economic crises, the recent Russian economic crisis and
their immediate effects on the global economy have demonstrated
the extent of such a risk. A crisis that occurs in one region can no
longer be contained within that region; rather, it reaches every part
of the system instantaneously.
98
(Repercussions of globalization)
The intensification of worldwide competition accompanying
rapid globalization brings about losers and dropouts of the competi
tion, not only in developing countries, but also in industrialized
nations, which poses as a potential social destabilizer. There is also
a growing sentiment against market principles which are seen as
ignoring humanity, cultures and traditions and an emerging resist
ance to the imposition of global standards by the markets. Our task
is to secure economic benefits of globalization from counter pro
ductive backlash against this trend.
(3) Security transformation: diversification of threats and armed
conflicts between nations has posed the biggest threat to the lives
and security of people in the international community. The collapse
of the Cold War structure has dramatically reduced the possibility of
a global scale war. However, military conflicts on a smaller scale as
well as other kinds of threats to the lives and security of people are
increasing and endangering even our daily lives.
(Diversification of actors of threats)
Given the uncertainties in today’s international politics, there
will continue to be a threat of conflicts between nations. In addition,
there is a growing need for international efforts to address uncon
ventional types of conflicts such as ethnic conflicts within nations.
There are also new types of threats such as terrorism, backed by
non government entities without any tie with a particular nation,
which cannot be adequately addressed under existing frameworks.
(Diversification of means of threats)
There is now a growing awareness of the need to control various
“means” of threats, ranging from weapons of mass destruction to
conventional weapons. As shown in the nuclear tests by India and
Pakistan and the missile launch by North Korea, the danger of pro
liferation of weapons of mass destruction (nuclear, biological and
chemical weapons) and their delivery means has been rather inten
sifying since the end of the Cold War. It should be also noted that
99
conventional weapons such as antipersonnel landmines and small
arms that have not been internationally controlled to date, have
become a major factor to escalate conflicts and to expand damage,
particularly in civil wars.
(Diversification of nature of threats)
Threats in today’s world can no longer be measured simply by
their military capability or power to physically blow others. Such
threats as environmental destruction, infectious diseases, refugees,
illegal immigration and international organized crime have become
increasingly serious global problems that threaten people’s lives
across national borders, and thus require international cooperation.
4. Changes of Japan and its foreign policy
What direction is Japan heading amid these international cur
rents?
Amid the diversification of threats, Japan is facing a mounting
uncertainty, as in the increasing danger of proliferation of weapons
of mass destruction. However, what is more important for Japan is
that the direction Japan is to take is now being questioned.
Japan, with its economic strength, has kept a certain degree of
influence in the international community. It is now apparent how
ever, that its economic growth will reach its limit if Japan takes its
existing systems for granted and fails to make reform efforts. Our
concern that Japan’s relative position in the world will no longer go
up is even more real as other individual or groups of countries, rid
ing on a tide of globalization, achieve further development. This is
all the more likely in light of the difficulties such as a falling birth
rate and aging population that Japan will face as a mature nation.
Since Japan continues not to rely on military strength as a means
of securing its national interests, it is important to bear fully in our
minds the relative change to Japan’s position against the internation
al match ground, to identify the sources of national power, which
underpins its foreign policy, and to take necessary actions.
100
5. Three challenges for Japan’s foreign policy toward the 21st
century
As the international community searches for a new order amid
these currents and Japan faces the test of changing it at the dawn of
the 21st century, the role of foreign policy for people’s living is
weighing more.
What are the challenges for Japan to achieve its diplomatic
objectives amid these new currents? This section, in its attempt to
give general directions to be followed by Japan, outlines three chal
lenges: enhancing the “total strength of foreign policy”, “national
power”, and reinforcing “diplomatic frameworks.”
Challenge 1: Enhancing the total strength of foreign policy
With internal affairs and foreign relations becoming more close
ly interlinked, a nation’s internal affairs and its domestic systems
that have been regarded as the matters of national sovereignty, are
now subject to requests of the international community. To conduct
foreign policy under these circumstances, its total strength is
required more than ever. The challenge is to enhance people’s inter
est in foreign policy, to consolidate public opinions, and to imple
ment foreign policy with public support. For this purpose, it is nec
essary to strengthen privately funded policy research institutes, to
promote research at universities and other institutions of higher
education, to provide more opportunities for public discussion on
foreign policy, and to build a system to fully reflect these recom
mendations in policy making process.
In the United States, for example, the World Affairs Council
holds a network of almost 80 organizations which enables citizens to
participate in debates on foreign affairs. On this front, Japan’s efforts
are far from being called sufficient. We need to design frameworks for
boosting public debates on and understanding of foreign affairs.
In this relation, a so called “track 2” dialogue, a dialogue whose
party consists of both intellectuals from the private sector and gov
ernment officials, should be utilized more frequently.
101
Furthermore, partnership between the government and
NGOs/NPOs should be built in other areas than development assis
tance, where such ties have been traditionally strong, while develop
ing the ways to listen to a broader range of people, including labor
unions, consumer groups and business circles. In promoting such
ties, the question of the accountability of the NGOs/NPOs has to be
also addressed.
On the other hand, the government is required to demonstrate
its total strength. Through close inter agency coordination and con
sultations, the government must conduct its foreign policy in a body
for the interest of Japan as a whole.
Challenge 2: Enhancing national power that supports foreign
policy
(Review of national power)
There is no question about the need of our efforts to achieve
steady development of the Japanese economy and doing our best to
overcome the current economic difficulties. Given that another leap
is hard to expect if our foreign policy dependent on economic
strength remains unchanged, we must reconsider where we should
find the sources of our national power that would support our diplo
macy.
(Technology)
First comes technology. As a pillar of economic strength, tech
nology is counted as one of main sources of national power. The cor
rectness of Japan’s policy, having sought development through its
technological advantage, should be recognized once again. To keep
expanding the world economy, steady progress of science and tech
nology and sharing of such technology on a global scale are indis
pensable. As one of the few countries that can fulfill this mission,
Japan must devise a national strategy for the development of science
and technology to move forward technological frontiers without a
break.
102
(Inventiveness)
Japan must cultivate its ability to design systems and rules that
could serve as global standards. In the area of development, Japan
advocates for a comprehensive approach for the solution of conflicts
and poverty, the idea that was agreed upon at the Japan initiated
Tokyo International Conference on African Development (TICAD)
and has just begun to take root. Japan is also trying to embody the
concept of «human security» to the effect that human existence and
dignity must be secured from various threats including environmen
tal issues and poverty by strengthened and comprehensive measures.
We also need to deliberate on frameworks to address issues associat
ed with globalization, including currency problems, and to strength
en and expand the horizon of our intellectual contributions in vari
ous areas such as food and energy, which are expected to become
more serious issues in a longer term.
(Renewed recognition of a nation’s responsibility)
Now is the time to ask ourselves once again the fundamental
question — what should a nation do to ensure the security of its cit
izens? There should be an open discussion on the role of a nation in
ensuring the security of its citizens, to avoid falling into such
extreme arguments as interpreting a dispatch of the Self Defense
Force units to rescue Japanese citizens from areas of conflict as a
resurgence of the Japanese militarism. In light of the importance of
world peace and stability to the security and prosperity of Japan, we
must also discuss what concrete measures we should take in order to
further strengthen our contribution to international efforts to resolve
conflicts. Through these discussions, it is necessary to remind our
selves the grounds of foreign policy that is, maintaining policy
coherence and taking responsible actions as a nation.
Challenge 3: Reinforcing diplomatic frameworks
To address numerous new challenges that the international
community faces today, we must endeavor to strengthen frameworks
of international cooperation. A scope of the efforts should not be
103
limited to improvement of existing frameworks but be expanded to
establishment of new frameworks. Considering the major trends in
the international community, the following elements are important.
(To build a secure world)
One of the most critical countermeasures to diversifying threats
would be to take a comprehensive approach that encompasses all
stages of conflicts from prevention to resolution.
The first step would be to redouble our efforts in control and
reduction of all s to conventional weapons, while taking a compre
hensive approach that covers controls both on weapons themselves
and transfers of relevant goods and technologies. The measures to
counter conflicts must also address all stages of conflicts through
preventive diplomacy to cope with poverty and other social problems
that lie at the root of conflicts, response to actual conflicts, and
post conflict reconstruction.
The conventional approach that centered on self defense and
peacekeeping activities is no longer sufficient in coping with ethnic
conflicts, which differ in nature from international conflicts in a tra
ditional sense. It is necessary to give serious consideration to build
ing of a new effective framework. The movement toward early estab
lishment of an international criminal court aimed at impartial and
appropriate handling of a serious case of violation by an individual
against the international code is a positive step in this direction.
In order to ensure faithful observance of international law and
to enhance trust in international legal structures, it is important to
strengthen the international judicial system in general.
Japan must also take the initiative by designing and building
appropriate frameworks of international cooperation vis a vis
various threats. From this perspective, it is necessary to build
frameworks at various levels according to purposes, including a
dialogue framework of Japan, the US, China and Russia, a frame
104
work of these four countries plus the ROK, and North Korea in
addition, and a framework of like minded countries intended to
form core agreements to be widely shared in the international
community.
(To build a prosperous world)
What comes next is the challenge of globalization. The Bretton
Woods system, established on the basis of the lessons learned from
the process of entering into World War II, brought unprecedented
prosperity to the post war world through ensuring stable currency
market, liberalization of trade and investment and development
assistance. However, the system needs reviewing in terms of the sys
temic risk and serious social impacts, that globalization, a symbol of
the system’s success, is ironically causing. To build a system that
makes utmost use of the strengths of market economies and address
es new challenges, it is necessary to consider a wide range of issues,
including ways to ensure stable currency markets, propriety of con
trols on short term private capital, modality of international support
for the countries facing crises including IMF conditionality, meas
ures to strengthen such support, and restructuring of international
financial institutions.
Japan should try to better reflect its views in the activities of
international financial institutions by increasing contribution to
these institutions and other measures. Japan should also consider
establishing a regional monetary fund to respond flexibly to curren
cy and financial problems in Asian countries. Another important
task would be to play a leading role in developing new international
economic rules, for instance, under the World Trade Organization
and to promote Japan made rules to global standards.
Meanwhile, social problems arising from intensified competi
tion must not be overseen. We need to help emerging economies
through technical assistance for modification of the pace and secto
rial balance of liberalization in those economies as well as support
for webbing a tight safety net for the socially vulnerable.
105
Globalization has prompted the process of EU integration and
emergence of euro as a major competitor to the dollar, currently a
sole international currency, so to speak. Under these circumstances,
there is an urgent need that Japan consider how to respond to these
situations, including the possibility of making the yen more interna
tional.
6. Strengthening means to conduct foreign policy
In actually responding to these challenges for the 21st century,
Japan must strengthen its means to conduct foreign policy and make
beneficial arrangements for itself.
(Securing a voice)
First of all, it is important to secure our voice in international
frameworks. It goes without saying that Japan should participate in
international decision making processes that could affect its course.
In this connection, the importance of reforming the United Nations
Security Council and Japan’s attaining a permanent seat in the
council is apparent.
By taking the initiative to build new international frameworks in
addition to strengthening our voice in existing international organi
zations and frameworks, Japan should be able to secure its position
as an active player in the international arena.
(Official development assistance)
The role of ODA as a means of achieving our diplomatic objec
tives remains critically important. Under the tight fiscal conditions,
it is urgent that we formulate ODA policies with strategic minds
unrestricted by the conventional thinking so that we can maximize
the effectiveness of ODA.
(Human resources)
It is essential to develop human resources, throughout polit
ical, bureaucratic and business circles, capable of expressing
106
their opinions and taking actions in the international arena as well
as carrying out research that supports such activities. Human
resources development through, for example, reinforcement of
private research institutes and promotion of parliamentarian
exchanges must be encouraged more than anything. While we cul
tivate the human resources at home, we should send more
Japanese staff to international organizations including the United
Nations.
(Strategic public relations policy)
As the relative weight of persuasiveness as opposed to force
fulness in international politics increases, aggressive public rela
tions strategies must be developed. The growing importance of
extracting the target information from a flood of information as
well as sending out the proper messages at the proper moment by
the proper medium to the proper target. Systematic involvement
of media strategists into the policy making process is also neces
sary.
To introduce Japanese culture abroad and to promote under
standing of Japan by the general public overseas should lead to sta
ble relations with other nations over the long term. Strategic policy
planning is required in this area as well.
(Organizational strength)
Finally, it is necessary to strengthen our diplomatic infrastruc
ture and systems while ensuring their efficient and effective use. In
comparison with other nations’ situations and in terms of our vision
of the Japanese diplomacy in the 21st century, much needs to be
done. We learned from the Gulf War and the seizure of the
Ambassador’s Residence in Peru that there is a compelling need to
further develop and strengthen a crisis management system. Japan
must also strengthen its structure to support diplomatic functions in
such areas as collecting and analyzing information broadly and
accurately as well as utilizing it fully and swiftly in overall policy
planning.
107
7. Conclusion
It is not an easy task to steer Japan’s foreign policy as the 21st
century approaches. We, however, would be able to present the prin
ciples that will guide Japan’s foreign policy as follows.
Total strength of a nation will demonstrate itself only when our
foreign policy is conducted on a solid domestic foundation. It is
necessary for the government to take leadership in presenting ideas
and gaining national supports and to develop mechanism of absorb
ing and summing up public opinions.
As a member of the Asia Pacific region, Japan places the very
axis of its foreign policy in the relations with this region. Our special
interest and responsibility in fostering a stable environment in this
region must not be forgotten. Our first priority is to develop relations
with Asia Pacific countries and to promote regional cooperation,
while maintaining cooperative relations with the United States —
our most important partner with common values — as the corner
stone of our foreign policy. To give credibility and validity to such
diplomacy, we must have a foresight and a strategy that take into
account the linkage between Asia and the region beyond it, as shown
in recent development of Eurasian diplomacy.
No more than ever has Japan’s leadership in diplomacy been so
seriously called for. Japan, as a global player, has to take the lead in
achieving “a world where people can count on a better future.” It is
important, therefore, to further deliberate on the challenges in line
with this proposal and to lead to concrete policies in the future.
Ãëàâà II
ÝÊÎÍÎÌÈ×ÅÑÊÈÅ ÏÐÎÁËÅÌÛ ÑÒÐÀÍ ÀÒÐ
1. Èíäîíåçèÿ:
CHINESE BEAR THE BRUNT OF ANGER
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 56
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç ïðèâåä¸ííîãî íèæå òåêñòà
CHINESE BEAR THE BRUNT OF ANGER:
1) îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè;
2) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ïåðåäàþùèå êîãíèòèâíóþ èíôîðìàöèþ è ïðåäñòàâëåííûå ïðåöèçèîííîé ëåêñèêîé: èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, öèôðû, íàçâàíèÿ îðãàíèçàöèé, àááðåâèàòóðû;
3) íàéäèòå ñëîâà è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿ, èñïîëüçîâàííûå àâòîðîì
â ïåðåíîñíîì çíà÷åíèè;
4) íàéäèòå ýìîöèîíàëüíî íàãðóæåííûå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà;
5) íàéäèòå âûðàæåíèÿ, íåñóùèå èðîíè÷åñêèé ïîäòåêñò;
6) íàéäèòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà: èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå
îáîðîòû, íîìèíàòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè;
7) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñðåäñòâà ôîðìàëüíîé êîãåçèè (ñâÿçè),
íàïð., õîòÿ, îäíàêî, ìåæäó òåì, è, íî è äð.
CHINESE BEAR THE BRUNT OF ANGER
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà. Ïðè ïåðåâîäå ïîëüçóéòåñü ñëîâàð¸ì.
Asia’s economic crisis (см. рис. 9, стр. 249), which has
caused Indonesia’s currency to plummet and food prices to jump,
109
led to violence last week against the country’s Chinese minority.
Their shops were looted and burned, and many went into hiding.
Some fled abroad. Although they account for just 4 percent of the
population, ethnic Chinese control around 70 percent of
Indonesia’s wealth and are mostly Buddhist or Christian in a pre
dominantly Muslim country. In response to the unrest, some
Chinese shop owners began discounting prices, and a group headed
by Chinese billionaire Liem Sioe Liong donated 100,000 parcels of
basic foodstuffs to the poor.
Meanwhile, concern rose in nervous financial markets as
Minister of Research and Technology B. J. Habibie won endorse
ment from Indonesia’s powerful military establishment to become
vice president in elections next month. Habibie is a close confidant
of President Suharto and could easily become president given
Suharto’s advanced age of 76. Habibie’s insistence on big ticket
government spending has not gone down well with the International
Monetary Fund, which demanded that one of Habibie’s pet proj
ects—a profitless $2 billion effort to build a national aircraft—be
scrapped as a condition of IMF loans.
Steven Butler in Tokyo
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 57
ü
Ïðîâåðüòå:
1) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâ è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé,
ó÷èòûâàÿ èõ ýìîöèîíàëüíóþ íàãðóæåííîñòü, ïåðåíîñíîå
çíà÷åíèå â äàííîì êîíòåêñòå;
2) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèõ êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà;
3) íàëè÷èå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ ïðè¸ìîâ ïðè ïåðåâîäå (êëèøå
æóðíàëüíî-ãàçåòíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà, èðîíèÿ,
ìåòàôîðà).
Brunt, plummet, flee, loot, demand, nervous financial markets,
big ticket government spending, pet project, shop owners, IMF
110
loans, a profitless $2 billion effort, powerful military establishment,
given Suharto’s advanced age, go down well with, win endorsement
from, concern rose.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 58
ü
Îòðåäàêòèðóéòå ñâîé ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ñ ó÷¸òîì ïîëíîé è
àäåêâàòíîé ïåðåäà÷è åäèíèö èíôîðìàöèè è ñòèëÿ àâòîðà.
ü
Êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè ïåðåâîäå äàííîãî òåêñòà?
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå òåêñò ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå åãî.
2. ßïîíèÿ:
FINANCE SCANDAL TARS MR. CLEAN
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 59
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå èãðó ñëîâ â çàãîëîâêå ñòàòüè FINANCE SCANDAL TARS MR. CLEAN (Cì. íèæå). Äàéòå ïðîãíîç ñîäåðæàíèÿ
ñòàòüè íà îñíîâå çàãîëîâêà.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç ïðèâåä¸ííîãî íèæå òåêñòà:
1) îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè;
2) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ïåðåäàþùèå êîãíèòèâíóþ èíôîðìàöèþ è ïðåäñòàâëåííûå ïðåöèçèîííîé ëåêñèêîé: èìåíà
ñîáñòâåííûå, öèôðû, íàçâàíèÿ îðãàíèçàöèé, àááðåâèàòóðû;
3) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ñîäåðæàùèå îöåíî÷íóþ è ýìîöèîíàëüíî îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó;
4) íàéäèòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà: èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå
îáîðîòû, íîìèíàòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè;
111
5) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ÿçûêîâûå êëèøå, õàðàêòåðíûå äëÿ ñòèëÿ
ãàçåòíî-æóðíàëüíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà;
6) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñðåäñòâà ñåìàíòè÷åñêîé è/èëè ôîðìàëüíîé
êîãåçèè (ñâÿçè), íàïð., added — äîáàâèë, although — õîòÿ,
however — îäíàêî, meanwhile — ìåæäó òåì, and, but è äð.;
7) óêàæèòå, åñòü ëè â äàííîì òåêñòå ýëåìåíòû ìíîãîñëîâèÿ
è/èëè ïîâòîðû.
FINANCE SCANDAL TARS MR. CLEAN
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, ïîëüçóÿñü ñëîâàð¸ì
Japan’s widening probe into bribery and corruption in the finance
industry claimed an unlikely victim last week. The suicide of Shokei
Arai, a legislator in the ruling Liberal Democratic Party, shocked the
nation in part because Arai, a former Finance Ministry official, had
gained fame by attacking corruption among LDP leaders.
Arai was suspected of receiving favors from Nikko Securities,
which allegedly gave him more than $230,000 in guaranteed profits
on a VIP stock trading account. Although Arai admitted receiving
the money, he denied to the end that he had made any illegal
requests for special treatment from Nikko and claimed he was being
framed. He hanged himself rather than face arrest.
The case could further complicate Japan’s efforts to clean up its
nearly bankrupt finance system. Although Japan’s parliament last
week approved more than $100 billion for capital injection into weak
banks, actually disbursing the money could prove politically unpop
ular as more institutions are tarred by the scandal
Steven Butler
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 60
ü
Ïðîâåðüòå ïî ñëîâàðþ ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâ
è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé, ó÷èòûâàÿ:
1) èõ ýìîöèîíàëüíóþ îêðàøåííîñòü, îöåíî÷íûé õàðàêòåð, ïåðåíîñíîå çíà÷åíèå;
112
2) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèõ êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà;
3) íàëè÷èå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ ïðè¸ìîâ ïðè ïåðåâîäå (êëèøå
æóðíàëüíî-ãàçåòíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà).
Tar, allegedly, unlikely victim, nearly bankrupt, probe into
bribery and corruption, claimed a victim, shocked the nation,
gained fame by attacking corruption; VIP stock trading account,
finance system, clean up, frame.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 61
Отредактируйте свой письменный перевод с учётом пол
ной передачи единиц информации и сохранения стиля авто
ра.
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè
ïåðåâîäå?
Запишите ключевую информацию текста, используя пере
водческую скоропись, восстановите текст по записям и пере
ведите его.
3. Èíäîíåçèÿ:
1. ECONOMIC SLUMP
MAKES BOOMERS NERVOUS: POLL
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 62
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå çàãîëîâîê ECONOMIC SLUMP MAKES
BOOMERS NERVOUS: POLL… (ñì. íèæå) è äàéòå ïðîãíîç ñîäåðæàíèÿ òåêñòà, ó÷èòûâàÿ çíà÷åíèÿ ñëîâ SLUMP, BOOMERS,
POLL.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç ïðèâåä¸ííîãî íèæå òåêñòà:
113
1) îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè;
2) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ïåðåäàþùèå êîãíèòèâíóþ èíôîðìàöèþ è ïðåäñòàâëåííûå ïðåöèçèîííîé ëåêñèêîé: èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, öèôðû, íàçâàíèÿ îðãàíèçàöèé, àááðåâèàòóðû;
3) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ñîäåðæàùèå îöåíî÷íóþ è ýìîöèîíàëüíî íàãðóæåííóþ ëåêñèêó, ëåêñèêó, ïåðåäàþùóþ
ðåàëèè êóëüòóðíîé ñðåäû, èäèîìàòè÷åñêèå âûðàæåíèÿ, òàáóèðîâàííóþ ëåêñèêó;
4) íàéäèòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà: èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå
îáîðîòû, íîìèíàòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè;
5) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ÿçûêîâûå êëèøå, õàðàêòåðíûå äëÿ ñòèëÿ
ãàçåòíî-æóðíàëüíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà;
6) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ïðèìåðû èñïîëüçîâàíèÿ ìåòàôîðû êàê
ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîãî ïðè¸ìà, ïðîäóìàéòå âàðèàíòû ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ íà ÿçûêå ïåðåâîäà;
7) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñðåäñòâà ñåìàíòè÷åñêîé è/èëè ôîðìàëüíîé êîãåçèè, íàïð., added — äîáàâèë, even though — äàæå
åñëè, at the same time — â òî æå âðåìÿ, however — îäíàêî,
meanwhile — ìåæäó òåì, and, but è äð.;
8) óêàæèòå, åñòü ëè â äàííîì òåêñòå ýëåìåíòû ìíîãîñëîâèÿ
è/èëè ïîâòîðû.
ECONOMIC SLUMP MAKES BOOMERS NERVOUS: POLL.
But other Canadians are facing the downturn with confidence
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, ïîëüçóÿñü ñëîâàð¸ì.
OTTAWA — Most Canadians are weathering the current eco
nomic storm with surprising confidence, but baby boomers are
deeply nervous about their future, according to a new national poll.
The survey, conducted by EKOS Research Associates Inc. for
The Toronto Star, CBC and La Presse, found that the public’s out
look remains rosy despite stock market turbulence and a raft of
alarming layoffs.
At the same time, the pollster said the federal Liberals are reap
ing the benefits of Canadians’ persistently optimistic view of the
114
economy. That optimism helps explain the continuing strong stand
ing of the Liberals, who received 52.6 per cent of decided voter sup
port in the national survey, the pollster said.
The poll found boomers and those of pre retirement age are a
glaring exception to the optimism of the rest of the population, with
many of them fearing for their jobs, their pensions and their ability
to recover from staggering losses in stock markets.
EKOS found that 40 per cent of those between the ages of 45
and 64 believe they have “lost all control” of their economic future.
“When they think about retirement and the idea of freedom 55,
comparing their meagre savings against the prospects of trying to
maintain their lifestyle, they’re probably thinking about freedom 95
now,” EKOS president Frank Graves said.
Young people, though, exhibit pronounced optimism. Only 21
per cent of those below the age of 25 told pollsters they had lost con
trol of their economic future.
“Over all, we find that optimism on economic security — and,
in particular, confidence in labour markets — remain remarkably
strong,” Graves said.
At the same time, nearly three quarters of Canadians are con
cerned that the country is turning into a more divided society of
haves and have nots as it becomes increasingly like the United
States, EKOS found.
The company surveyed 3,004 Canadians across the country in
August on their economic outlook, making the findings accurate
within plus or minus 1.8 percentage points, 19 times out of 20.
Of those surveyed, 46 per cent said they had not “lost all con
trol” of their economic future, while 33 per cent said they felt they
had. (Twenty per cent had no response.)
And, when asked if they expect to lose their job in the next few
years, 57 per cent said they had no such worry, while 28 per cent of
respondents expressed concern. (Thirteen per cent had no opinion.)
The findings were in keeping with a general long term decline
in Canadians’ economic fears since 1997, when nearly half of all
Canadians felt they were in danger of winding up unemployed, the
pollsters said.
115
“Canadians don’t seem to be particularly panicked by the tur
moil that’s going on on equity markets,” Graves said.
Since last year, the Toronto Stock Exchange has wiped out bil
lions of dollars in value in a tumble that has eliminated fully one
third of its total worth.
And the economy has been shedding thousands of jobs in recent
months even though the unemployment rate has remained steady at
7 per cent because some people have stopped looking for work.
Canadians “are cognizant of the fact that there is something
perhaps amiss and we see some rise in the uncertainty levels,”
Graves commented. “But it’s less impressive than the continued
level of sustained confidence out there.”
He said this is particularly striking considering approximately
half of all Canadians have investments in the stock market.
“This period of confidence is one that was very hard fought for
by Canadians. (They) went through enormous turbulence and inse
curity throughout the nervous ‘90s and apparently they’re not ready
to abandon that sense of confidence and well being that rapidly,”
according to Graves. He said it would take “a major shock” to dis
rupt this pattern.
Another question in the poll sought to measure Canadians’ feel
ings about the growing divide in recent years between society’s rich
and poor. Respondents were asked to agree or disagree with this
statement: “I really worry that we are moving to a more divided soci
ety of haves and have nots.”
A strong majority — 71 per cent — said they were worried about
this trend, while 13 per cent said there was no reason for concern.
(Fifteen per cent had no response.)
Concern in Ontario — at 73 per cent — was in line with the rest
of the country.
While large, the percentage of those expressing alarm about the
polarization of society is gradually shrinking from an 81 per cent
level in 1996, EKOS noted.
“There’s a sense of hopelessness and resignation” about the
affects of free trade, globalization and market driven economic
policies on society, Graves explained.
116
It also reflects the integration of Canada with the United States.
The pollster finds many Canadians “directly connect things like the
growing gap between rich and poor to rising levels of
Americanization and rising levels of individualism versus collec
tivism” in Canada, he said.
But he added Canadians are nonetheless genuinely concerned
about this issue. He said poverty, especially among children, still sur
passes tax cuts when the public is polled on government priorities.
Commenting on the current level of economic optimism.
Graves said it appears “a little bit exaggerated” at a time of sliding
stock markets and a prolonged economic slump.
Unless the economy picks up, the federal Liberals could begin
to see an erosion in their support over this issue. Graves said.
By Les Whittington,
Ottawa Bureau
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 63
ü
Ïðîâåðüòå ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ ñîîòâåòñòâèé ñëåäóþùèì åäèíèöàì ïåðåâîäà, ïîëüçóÿñü ñëîâàðåì è ïðè ýòîì ó÷èòûâàÿ:
1) èõ ýìîöèîíàëüíóþ îêðàñêó, îöåíî÷íûé õàðàêòåð, ïåðåíîñíîå çíà÷åíèå, ñîöèîëèíãâèñòè÷åñêóþ ðîëü, èäèîìàòèêó;
2) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèõ êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà;
3) íàëè÷èå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ ïðè¸ìîâ ïðè ïåðåâîäå (ìåòàôîðè÷åñêèé ïåðåíîñ, òàáóèðîâàííàÿ ëåêñèêà, êëèøå æóðíàëüíî-ãàçåòíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà).
Turmoil, turbulence, alarming layoffs, a raft of layoffs, glaring
exception, staggering losses, remarkably strong, meagre savings, this
is striking (strong words); slump, downturn, layoffs (taboo words);
baby boomers, freedom 55 (culturals); are cognizant (formal style);
decided voter support, reap the benefits (metaphor and paper set
expressions); the findings were in keeping with, danger of winding up
unemployed, wiped out billions of dollars in value, there is some
thing amiss (idioms, phrasal verbs); haves and have nots (substanti117
vated nouns); stock market, equity market, unemployment rate,
uncertainty levels, tax cuts, government priorities (nominative constructions); …with many of them fearing for their jobs, their pensions
and their ability to recover from staggering losses in stock markets
(absolute participial construction), making the findings accurate,
when asked…, while large…, commenting on the current level of
economic optimism (participial constructions); freedom 95, rosy out
look (irony); the percentage is shrinking, the economy has been
shedding jobs, sliding stock markets, erosion in …support, unless the
economy picks up (metaphor).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 64
ü
Îòðåäàêòèðóéòå ñâîé ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ñ ó÷¸òîì ïîëíîé ïåðåäà÷è åäèíèö èíôîðìàöèè è ñîõðàíåíèÿ ñòèëÿ àâòîðà.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïðèåìû âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè ïåðåâîäå?
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå òåêñò ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå åãî.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 65
ü
×òî ñòîèò çà çàãîëîâêîì U.S. HYPOCRISY IN INDONESIA ?
ü
Âûñêàæèòå ñâîå ïðåäïîëîæåíèå, êàê íàñòîÿùèé ïåðåâîä÷èê,
êàêîå îòíîøåíèå èìååò ÑØÀ ê Èíäîíåçèè?
2. U.S. HYPOCRISY IN INDONESIA
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç òåêñòà:
1) âûïèøèòå þðèäè÷åñêèå è áèçíåñ òåðìèíû è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿ ñ
íèìè, à òàêæå îáîðîòû ðå÷è, õàðàêòåðíûå äëÿ îôèöèàëüíîãî
ñòèëÿ è íàéäèòå âàðèàíòû ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ íà ðóññêîì ÿçûêå;
118
2) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ýìîöèîíàëüíî îêðàøåííûå è îöåíî÷íûå
åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ïîçâîëÿþùèå àâòîðó âûðàçèòü ñâî¸ îòíîøåíèå ê ñîîáùàåìîé èíôîðìàöèè;
3) âûïèøèòå èäèîìàòè÷åñêèå âûðàæåíèÿ è ôðàçîâûå ãëàãîëû
è íàéäèòå äëÿ íèõ âàðèàíòû ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, ïîëüçóÿñü ñëîâàð¸ì è
ñðàâíèòå ñâîè ïðåäïîëîæåíèÿ î ñîäåðæàíèè òåêñòà, ñäåëàííûå íà îñíîâå çàãîëîâêà, ñ èíôîðìàöèåé, ïîëó÷åííîé â ðåçóëüòàòå ïåðåâîäà. Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå ïðè÷èíû ðàñõîæäåíèé.
By Kenneth Roth
NEW YORK Following the spate of recent business scandals in
the United States, President George W. Bush called for “a new ethic
of personal responsibility in the business world.” Yet the State
Department has recommended dismissal of a lawsuit alleging cor
porate complicity in violent human rights abuse in Indonesia. Its
actions suggest that the administration’s concern with corporate
responsibility ends at the U.S. borders.
The lawsuit was filed in federal court in Washington by 11 resi
dents of Aceh, the westernmost province of Indonesia and site of a
vicious war between separatist guerrillas and the Indonesian military.
In the suit, the plaintiffs charge that they were raped, tortured or
kidnapped — or their relatives murdered — by Indonesian soldiers
paid to protect a big Exxon Mobil natural gas plant in the province.
On a visit to Aceh a year ago for Human Rights Watch, I heard
first hand about atrocities by both sides. Often in reprisal for abusive
guerrilla attacks, Indonesian troops shot and beat civilians and
torched villages. The issue in the lawsuit is whether Exxon Mobil is
complicit in these abuses through alleged “logistical and material”
support given to Indonesian troops protecting operations it runs in
north Aceh. Exxon Mobil denies the allegations.
The suit was brought under various U.S. federal statutes includ
ing the Alien Tort Claims Act of 1789. This law has been interpret
ed to permit victims of serious human rights violations abroad to
seek civil damages in U.S. courts against their alleged abusers who
119
are found in the United States. Despite its ancient vintage, the first
human rights case was brought under the law only in 1979. Suits
against corporations began in the 1990s, mostly against oil and min
ing companies operating in conflict ridden countries. The Exxon
Mobil suit could be an important test case clarifying the human
rights rules governing efforts to maintain the security of such opera
tions.
At Exxon Mobil’s suggestion, the judge in the case sought the
nonbinding opinion of the State Department as to whether the suit
would adversely affect American interests. The response, by the
department’s legal adviser, William Taft 4th, said that U.S. interests
would be harmed and recommended the suit’s dismissal.
The State Department justifies its position with a series of
strained and contradictory arguments. On the one hand, it fears an
Indonesia so powerful that it will retaliate against U.S. companies
and cease cooperating in the war on terrorism. On the other hand, it
portrays an Indonesian economy so fragile that it could be devastat
ed should the lawsuit discourage foreign investment.
Clearly, both can’t be true, and probably neither is. Indonesia
cannot afford to turn its back on the world’s largest economy. And
the investment it needs should not be of the sort, as the suit alleges,
that underwrites the separatist and communal violence plaguing the
country.
The State Department presumes that the Indonesian govern
ment will see the suit as “interference in its internal affairs.” To back
this up, it submits a letter from the Indonesian ambassador in
Washington taking exception to U.S. adjudication of “an allegation
against an Indonesian government institution.”
However, the suit is not brought against an Indonesian govern
ment institution but against Exxon Mobil for alleged complicity in
serious human rights abuse. It is entirely appropriate for U.S. courts
to uphold basic standards of conduct for U.S. based corporations.
The administration’s position speaks poorly for its vision of
both corporate responsibility and the war on terrorism. Corporate
responsibility is not simply a matter of transparent balance sheets. It
is also a matter of how companies treat people.
120
Nor does it advance the war on terrorism for the U.S. govern
ment to turn a blind eye toward alleged security force violence
against civilians. It is hypocritical and ineffective to accept such vio
lence in the name of one’s own cause while trying to deny it to oth
ers in pursuit of theirs. The Bush administration should support legal
scrutiny of any allegation of violent abuse, not make exceptions
when U.S. corporations are implicated.
The writer, executive director of Human Rights Watch in New
York, contributed this comment to the International Herald
Tribune.
International Herald Tribune
August 14, 2002
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 66
ü
Ïðîâåðüòå ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ ñîîòâåòñòâèé ñëåäóþùèì åäèíèöàì ïåðåâîäà, ó÷èòûâàÿ:
1) èõ ýìîöèîíàëüíóþ îêðàñêó, îöåíî÷íûé õàðàêòåð, ïåðåíîñíîå çíà÷åíèå, èäèîìàòèêó;
2) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèõ êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà.
Vicious war, rape, torture, kidnap, atrocities, plague, abuse
(strong words); to back this up, …can’t afford to turn its back on the
world’s largest economy, to turn a blind eye toward… (phrasal verb,
idioms); …whether Exxon Mobil is comlicit in these abuses, …in
pursuit of their cause, corporate complicity, corporate responsibility
(formal style); human rights abuse, U.S. borders, Exxon Mobil nat
ural gas plant, oil and mining companies, the Exxon Mobil suit, test
case, human rights rules (nominative constructions).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 67
ü
Îòðåäàêòèðóéòå ñâîé ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ñ ó÷¸òîì ïîëíîé ïåðåäà÷è åäèíèö èíôîðìàöèè è ñîõðàíåíèÿ ñòèëÿ àâòîðà.
121
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïðèåìû âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè ïåðåâîäå?
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå òåêñò ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå åãî.
4. Ñòðàíû ÀÒÐ:
1.
EXXON MOBIL NOT READY TO RESUME ASEH,
INDONESIA GAS PRODUCTION
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 68
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç òåêñòà EXXON MOBIL NOT READY
TO RESUME ASEH, INDONESIA GAS PRODUCTION (ñì. íèæå):
1) îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè;
2) íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ïåðåäàþùèå êîãíèòèâíóþ èíôîðìàöèþ è ïðåäñòàâëåííûå ïðåöèçèîííîé ëåêñèêîé: èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, òåðìèíû, öèôðû, íàçâàíèÿ îðãàíèçàöèé,
àááðåâèàòóðû;
3) íàéäèòå ñëîâà è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿ, èñïîëüçîâàííûå àâòîðîì
â ïåðåíîñíîì çíà÷åíèè;
4) íàéäèòå ýìîöèîíàëüíî íàãðóæåííûå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà
5) íàéäèòå âûðàæåíèÿ, íåñóùèå èðîíè÷åñêèé ïîäòåêñò;
6) íàéäèòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà: èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå
îáîðîòû, íîìèíàòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè;
7) íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñðåäñòâà ñåìàíòè÷åñêîé è/èëè ôîðìàëüíîé êîãåçèè, íàïð., added — äîáàâèë, another — åùå îäèí,
äðóãîé, although — õîòÿ, however — îäíàêî, meanwhile —
ìåæäó òåì, because of — èç-çà è, íî è äð.
EXXON MOBIL NOT READY TO RESUME ASEH,
INDONESIA GAS PRODUCTION
ü
122
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà. Ïðè ïåðåâîäå ïîëüçóéòåñü ñëîâàð¸ì.
Jakarta, July 13, 2001 (AFX UK via COMTEX) — Exxon
Mobil Corp said it is not ready to resume gas production in the
Indonesian province of Aseh, because of troubles in the region,
despite an ultimatum from the government which expires today.
Exxon Mobil spokesman Deva Rahman said the company
still hopes to resume production “as soon as possible”, but is as
yet unable to name a day. He added that the company is contin
uing to repair installations and prepare for production to
resume.
Another Exxon Mobil representative at the Arun field in north
ern Aseh said a test has been carries out today and that gas deliveries
to Arun liquefication plant could begin next week. Further tests at
other sites will also be carried out next week, he said, speaking on
condition of anonymity.
State oil and gas company Pertamina, which is losing 100mln
usd a month because of the stoppage, had threatened to take over
production in Aseh if production did not begin today.
Rebel group the Free Aseh Movement has said it is ready to
keep up strong attacks on military posts in the region, including
those in the areas in which Exxon Mobil operates.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 69
ü
Ïðîâåðüòå:
1) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ñëåäóþùèõ ñëîâ è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèé,
ó÷èòûâàÿ èõ èíôîðìàöèîííóþ è ýìîöèîíàëüíóþ îêðàñêó,
îöåíî÷íûé õàðàêòåð, ïåðåíîñíîå çíà÷åíèå;
2) ïðàâèëüíîñòü ïåðåâîäà ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèõ êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà;
3) íàëè÷èå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèõ ïðè¸ìîâ ïðè ïåðåâîäå (êëèøå
æóðíàëüíî-ãàçåòíîãî èíôîðìàöèîííîãî òåêñòà).
Gas production, installations, gas deliveries, liquification plant,
carry out a test, take over, keep up, 100 mln usd, stoppage, on con
dition of anonymity, rebel group, Free Aseh Movement.
123
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 70
ü
Îòðåäàêòèðóéòå ñâîé ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ñ ó÷¸òîì ïîëíîé ïåðåäà÷è åäèíèö èíôîðìàöèè è ñîõðàíåíèÿ ñòèëÿ àâòîðà.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïðèåìû è òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè ïåðåâîäå?
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå òåêñò ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå åãî.
2.
ÍÎÂÛÅ ÏÐÎÅÊÒÛ EXXON MOBIL Â ÑÒÐÀÍÀÕ ÀÒÐ
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 71
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç òåêñòà ÍÎÂÛÅ
EXXON MOBIL Â ÑÒÐÀÍÀÕ ÀÒÐ (ñì. íèæå):
ÏÐÎÅÊÒÛ
1) îïðåäåëèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, òðåáóþùèå ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèõ è ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ïðåîáðàçîâàíèé;
2) íàéäèòå îäíîçíà÷íûå ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ ñîäåðæàùèìñÿ â òåêñòå
ïðîôåññèîíàëüíûì òåðìèíàì (ôèíàíñû, äîáû÷à è ïåðåðàáîòêà íåôòè è ãàçà);
3) îïðåäåëèòå ïðàâèëüíîñòü íàïèñàíèÿ ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèõ íàçâàíèé è íàçâàíèé îðãàíèçàöèé íà àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå;
4) îïðåäåëèòå íåîáõîäèìîñòü óïîòðåáëåíèÿ ñðåäñòâ ñåìàíòè÷åñêîé è ôîðìàëüíîé êîãåçèè.
ÍÎÂÛÅ ÏÐÎÅÊÒÛ EXXON MOBIL
 ÑÒÐÀÍÀÕ ÀÒÐ
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà ñ ðóññêîãî ÿçûêà íà àíãëèéñêèé ñî ñëîâàðåì.
Ìèðîâîé ëèäåð íåôòåãàçîâîé ïðîìûøëåííîñòè óñïåøíî ðàçâèâàåò àçèàòñêèå ïðîåêòû ïî äîáû÷å, ïåðåðàáîòêå è òðàíñïîðòèðîâêå íåôòè è ãàçà.
Äèíàìèêà êóðñà àêöèé. В июне сохранился общий тренд по
вышения цены акций компании, начавшийся в конце марта. За
124
истекший период цена акций повысилась с 77 до 90 долларов.
Тем не менее становится заметным истощение темпов роста.
Динамика котировок акций следовала за событиями на
рынке сырой нефти. Отказ Ирака от участия в программе
ООН «Нефть в обмен на продовольствие», решение стран уча
стниц ОПЕК не увеличивать квоты добычи нефти сказались
на повышении нефтяных цен, что, в свою очередь, вызвало
подъем котировок большинства нефтяных компаний. Акции
Exxon Mobil (XOM) поднялись с 4 по 6 июня почти на 3%. По
сле столь положительных для крупных нефтяных компаний
новостей рост в 3% для акций Exxon Mobil никак нельзя на
звать впечатляющим. Фактически рынок не верит в долго
срочный и непрерывный рост, и это является характерным
признаком того, что при появлении неблагоприятных ново
стей положительный тренд может смениться на отрицатель
ный. Но в июне — начале июля ситуация вряд ли поменяется,
по крайней мере, пока не видно причин существенного сни
жения нефтяных цен. При повышении же цены нефти до 32—
35 долларов за баррель курс акций Exxon Mobil может вплот
ную приблизиться к уровню 95 долларов, как уже происходи
ло в октябре ноябре 2000 года.
Ïðîèçâîäñòâåííàÿ äåÿòåëüíîñòü. Основные события ком
пании происходили в секторе нефтедобычи. Период с конца
мая по начало июня оказался для компании удивительно ус
пешным. Главной ареной действия стали страны Азиатско Ти
хоокеанского региона и Персидского залива.
Лидерство в проекте по разработке газовых месторожде
ний в Саудовской Аравии. Крупнейшие мировые нефтяные
компании возвращаются в Саудовскую Аравию после изгна
ния их в результате национализации 1975 г. На этот раз компа
нии будут участвовать в разработке газовых месторождений. В
лидирующем положении оказалась компания Exxon Mobil,
получившая статус оператора и 35% ное долевое участие в
проекте Эль Гавар (Al Ghawar).
Разработка крупнейшего газового месторождения Саудов
ской Аравии будет сопровождаться строительством электро
125
станции, опреснителей воды, нефтехимических производств и
других элементов инфраструктуры. Общий объем инвести
ций составит 15 млрд долларов. Таким образом, компания
продолжает развивать свою стратегию по диверсификации
региональной структуры своей добывающей деятельности.
Закрепление Exxon Mobil в этой ключевой стране Персид
ского залива позволит стабилизировать сырьевой поток для
обеспечения нефтеперерабатывающих и химических мощно
стей холдинга.
Возвращение в Индонезию. После прекращения в марте
этого года эксплуатации газовых месторождений в Асехе
(Aceh), вызванного всплеском повстанческой борьбы за отде
ление от Индонезии, Exxon Mobil вновь приступает к деятель
ности. К этому Exxon Mobil подтолкнула компания Pertamina,
государственная нефтегазовая компания Индонезии, являю
щаяся партнером американского гиганта. Деятельность в этой
стране является рискованной, но инвесторы не могут отка
заться от работы в крупнейшем газодобывающем государстве
всего Азиатско Тихоокеанского региона.
В июне появились новости об участии нефтяной компа
нии в строительстве газопровода в Китае, наметился новый
проект по транспортировки энергоносителей в Японию с Са
халинских месторождений.
Строительство газопровода в Китае. Сооружение дальнего
газопровода по транспортировке природного газа из слабоза
селенных западных районов Китая к Восточному побережью
планируется осуществить совместными усилиями трех компа
ний: китайской Petrochina (PTR), гонконгской CLP и амери
канской Exxon Mobil.
Проект строительства газопровода от месторождений Са
халина в Японию. Газ должен поступать с месторождений Са
халин 1, работу на которых ведут Exxon Neftegas и SODECO
(совместное предприятие японских нефтяных компаний).
Проект пока находится в самой начальной стадии проработки,
но вероятность его воплощения в жизнь весьма высока, учи
тывая постоянно увеличивающуюся потребность японской
126
энергетики в природном газе. Ориентировочный срок начала
эксплуатации газопровода — 2008 год.
В сфере маркетинга наиболее значительным событием
стало продолжение внедрения нового бренда компании —
Synergy. Эта марка нефтепродуктов была успешно апробиро
вана в Австралии, а в июне она продолжает победное шествие
уже в Японии. Внедрение нового бренда на АЗС Exxon Mobil,
которые работают под тремя названиями — Esso, Mobil,
General, должно помочь потребителю осознать принадлеж
ность всех трех названий к одной группе.
В США расширяется сеть сервисных станций компании
Exxon Mobil, работающих в системе Speedpass. Сейчас их число
превышает 2800. Маркетинговый ход нефтяной компании рас
считан на привлечение новых клиентов благодаря сервису,
предлагающему комплексное быстрое обслуживание посетите
лей на АЗС, в торговых точках и закусочных. Speedpass получа
ет все большее распространение в США. Недавно система была
успешно опробована в ресторанах McDonald`s в окрестностях
Чикаго. Развитие системы Speedpass даст возможность Exxon
Mobil увеличить прибыльность сбытовых операций в США, ко
торая находится на достаточно низком уровне из за сильной
конкуренции, особенно в крупнейших мегалополисах.
Последние проекты Exxon Mobil свидетельствуют о дина
мичном развитии гиганта. Благоприятное финансовое состоя
ние компании позволяет осуществлять проекты по всем на
правлениям нефтегазового бизнеса, включая добычу, перера
ботку, транспортировку нефти, а также предлагать клиентам
новые услуги.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 72
ü
Îòðåäàêòèðóéòå ñâîé ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ñ ó÷¸òîì ïîëíîé ïåðåäà÷è åäèíèö èíôîðìàöèè è ñîõðàíåíèÿ ñòèëÿ àâòîðà.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè âû èñïîëüçîâàëè ïðè
ïåðåâîäå?
127
ü
Çàïèøèòå êëþ÷åâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, âîññòàíîâèòå òåêñò ïî çàïèñÿì è ïåðåâåäèòå åãî.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 73
ü
Ïîëüçóÿñü ñïåöèàëüíûì ñëîâàðåì, äàéòå àíãëèéñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèì ðóññêèì ñëîâàì è ñëîâîñî÷åòàíèÿì.
добыча нефти и газа —
переработка нефти и газа —
транспортировка нефти и газа —
месторождение —
газопровод/нефтепровод —
тренд, тенденция —
нефтеперерабатывающие предприятия —
нефтехимические заводы —
мощности —
опреснители воды —
темпы роста —
совместные усилия —
совместные предприятия —
воплощение в жизнь —
прибыльность сбытовых операций —
акции —
котировка —
доля, долевое участие —
Тексты
для самостоятельного анализа и перевода
Ïðè àíàëèçå è ïåðåâîäå òåêñòîâ, ïðåäëàãàåìûõ äëÿ ñàìîñòîÿòåëüíîé
ðàáîòû, íàðÿäó ñ çàäàíèÿìè, ñâÿçàííûìè ñ ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèìè,
ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèìè è ñòèëèñòè÷åñêèìè òðóäíîñòÿìè, íåîáõîäèìî
128
îáðàùàòü âíèìàíèå íà îñîáåííîñòè ïåðåäà÷è ðóññêèõ è àíãëèéñêèõ èì¸í
ñîáñòâåííûõ (òðàíñêðèáèðîâàíèå, òðàíñëèòåðàöèÿ, êàëüêèðîâàíèå,
òðàäèöèÿ — ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ). Ïðåïîäàâàòåëü ìîæåò ïî ñâîåìó æåëàíèþ âàðüèðîâàòü òåêñòû, èñïîëüçóÿ èõ äëÿ ðàáîòû â êëàññå êàê ñàìîñòîÿòåëüíûå, è íàîáîðîò.
1
ENTHUSIASM EBBS FOR TOUGH REFORM IN WAKE OF ENRON
By Stephen Labaton and Richard A. Oppel Jr.
WASHINGTON, June 9 — Six months after the collapse of
Enron, a wave of enthusiasm for overhauling the nation’s corporate
and accounting laws has ebbed and the toughest proposals for
change are all but dead.
A powerful group of lobbyists, playing on partisan disagreement
in Congress, appears to have killed efforts to impose tight new con
trols on corporate conduct. And while some Democrats hope to turn
the inaction to their advantage in the fall elections, other lawmakers
say that — barring more business meltdowns that deepen the stock
market’s two year slump — voters are unlikely to care enough to
influence their ballots.
Bills imposing more stringent accounting standards, changing
the tax and accounting treatment of employee stock options and set
ting tougher conflict of interest rules for stock analysts and
accounting firms have all fallen victim to political gridlock.
Corporate America and the stock markets have not waited for
Washington. Instead, they have undertaken a host of changes in
response to the problems highlighted by Enron and reinforced by
corporate and accounting failures in the telecommunications, cable
and energy industries. Investors have fled companies whose
accounting or governance practices fail to measure up to post Enron
standards. Some Republicans say all this is evidence that the system
is working without heavy handed interference by lawmakers.
Congress did much to focus attention on flaws in the nation’s
corporate and accounting practices with a series of investigative
hearings earlier this year, the most dramatic of them conducted by
129
committees in the Republican led House. Even so, with the debate
over Enron at full boil, the House adopted a measure in April that
rejected the toughest proposed changes.
Senate Democrats now predict that they will have the votes to
get a broad measure of their own out of the Banking Committee
later this month on a party line vote, but only by tempering it to win
the support of moderates. Senator Tom Daschle, the majority
leader, is said by lawmakers and his aides to be committed to trying
to move a bill to the Senate floor before the August recess, in hopes
of using the Republicans’ opposition to the measure against them in
fall campaigns.
Even if that bill survives a filibuster threatened by Senate
Republicans, lawmakers and lobbyists say that there is little chance of
reconciling the differences between the House and the Senate this year.
All of Washington has not been paralyzed. Federal regulators —
spurred in part by state prosecutors — have become more aggressive
on the enforcement front. In Congress, meanwhile, legislation to
modify pension laws — a response to the enormous losses in the
retirement funds of employees at Enron and other troubled compa
nies — might have a better chance of passage.
Still, even lawmakers who favor a tough response to the seem
ing explosion in business misconduct detect little fervor among vot
ers for a Washington crackdown. Absent a spate of further disclo
sures, they say, the issues may remain too remote to change many
voters’ minds.
“The politics will be determined by the circumstances,” said
Senator Jon S. Corzine, Democrat of New Jersey and a former top
executive of Goldman, Sachs & Company. “If we continue to see an
erosion of the stock market and more cases like Adelphia and Tyco,
then it will be significant. If we see less, then it may have less of an
impact, because these can become issues that are hard for people
like my mom to understand.”
Other lawmakers, particularly Republicans, say Enron’s
moment as a galvanizing issue has quickly passed.
“The feeding frenzy is pretty much over,” said Senator Phil
Gramm of Texas, the ranking Republican on the banking commit
130
tee, who has worked closely with industry lobbyists to kill many of
the Democrats’ proposals. “People started looking at making all
these radical changes and decided there was a real cost involved and
that it would not solve the Enron problem.”
Mr. Gramm said regulators and the marketplace are already
correcting the excesses exemplified by Enron and its auditor, Arthur
Andersen, relieving Congress of the need to enact comprehensive
legislation.
“A lot of progress has already been made,” he said. “The presi
dent has put forward a strong program, the Securities and Exchange
Commission is moving forward, and the exchanges are changing
their rules. No one who sits on an audit committee will be the same
after Enron.” Mr. Gramm’s wife, Wendy, a onetime government
regulator who served on Enron’s audit committee, resigned from the
company’s board last week.
Representative Billy Tauzin, the Louisiana Republican who
held hearings on Enron’s collapse, agreed with Mr. Gramm’s
appraisal, but he said it was still vital for Congress to act, even
though the prospects for legislation are not strong.
“It’s all very iffy,” he said. “There is a huge rift between where
the Senate believes these issues ought to go and what the House has
already passed. I don’t know if it gets worked out in time.”
Both Democrats and Republicans have already begun to con
sider strategies to make the best political use of the issue in the
November elections. The Republicans are relying heavily on the
rule making and enforcement actions of the S.E.C.
On the Democratic side, one idea under discussion by advisers
to Senator Daschle is to bundle disparate proposals into one pack
age, making it more efficient to both confront recalcitrant
Republicans in the House and make a political issue in the fall of the
legislation’s defeat.
In any event, politicians and lobbyists say that any change in the
accounting treatment of stock options is dead for the year — largely
because of the perception that Silicon Valley, where such options are
as ubiquitous as the Internet itself, is up for grabs in the 2002 and
2004 elections.
131
Proposals have been made to force companies to account for
options as a compensation cost — now they are not charged against
corporate earnings — and to limit the ability of companies to take
tax deductions for issuing options. But technology companies,
financial firms and corporate trade groups — with the backing of
President Bush — have lobbied lawmakers around the country to
maintain the current system.
For now, lawmakers say, they have trumped the arguments of
such people as Alan Greenspan, the Federal Reserve chairman, and
the multibillionaire investor Warren E. Buffett that the current treat
ment of options contributed to corporate overreaching in the 1990’s.
The Bush administration has not been a visible force in the leg
islative battles, relying instead on likeminded allies — notably
Senator Gramm — to bottle up the most ambitious legislation. He
has met repeatedly with corporate lobbyists and urged them to press
sympathetic Democrats or those facing tight races, like Thomas R.
Carper of Delaware, Evan Bayh of Indiana and Zell Miller of
Georgia, to block legislation from reaching the Senate floor.
Democrats say that effort appears to have failed and that
Senator Paul S. Sarbanes, Democrat of Maryland, appears to have
the support to get a bill approved by the banking committee. It
would sharply curtail the consulting work performed by accounting
firms, create a relatively independent oversight board for the
accounting profession, require large corporations to rotate their
auditors every five years, and impose tighter conflict of interest
restrictions on stock analysts than the measure that was passed by
the House.
Mr. Gramm has been working closely with the administration
on an alternative measure that does not tighten conflict of interest
regulations for analysts or auditing firms. His wife’s Enron ties seem
to have produced no political pressure on Mr. Gramm — who has
announced his intention to retire from the Senate after this year —
to shy from the debate.
The post Enron proposals prompted scores of industry associa
tions and hundreds of corporations to retain lobbyists and use their
own employees to try to weaken or kill the measures. They include
132
the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, which is
dominated by the largest firms. Hundreds of companies, including
Oracle and Intel, have fought against changing the treatment of
stock options. And many of the largest Wall Street firms have lob
bied against changes in the laws governing stock analysts.
The drift in Congress largely reflects the power of the account
ing profession. Accounting firms ranked as three of President Bush’s
top eight campaign donors in 2000, and over all, the industry made
$14.7 million in campaign donations to both Democrats and
Republicans during the last election cycle, according to the Center
for Responsive Politics. The profession has influential members in
many congressional districts and has been known to use lawmakers’
own accountants to lobby them.
Pension legislation may stand a better chance in Congress,
although its prospects remain cloudy.
The chairman of the Senate Finance Committee, Max Baucus
of Montana, is crafting an alternative to a bill by Senator Edward M.
Kennedy, Democrat of Massachusetts that drew strong opposition
from business lobbyists and Republicans.
On some points, Mr. Baucus’s bill is likely to contain provisions
similar to those in the House bill, like permitting workers to sell
company stock awarded as a 401(k) match three years after they
receive it. Senate aides say the bill may also place limits on certain
forms of executive compensation. Mr. Daschle is warming to the
provisions that are expected to form the Baucus proposal, Senate
aides say.
But they say the Baucus plan is unlikely to include the Kennedy
proposal’s provision prohibiting most companies from both offering
their stock as a 401(k) investment option and using it to match
employee contributions. This was designed to keep employees from
putting too much retirement money in their own stock, as happened
at Enron.
One major issue that remains unresolved is how to give employ
ees better access to investment advice. Investment management
companies have been lobbying to permit firms that administer
retirement plans to offer advice to participants. Among other things,
133
they would be permitted to recommend investments for which they
could receive a fee.
Senate aides say the Baucus proposal may instead contain a pro
vision encouraging employers to hire independent firms to provide
advice.
2
RUSSIANS STUFF 80 BILLION DOLLARS UNDER MATTRESSES:
WATCHDOG
By Dmitry Zaks
MOSCOW, Aug 6 (AFP) — Russians have nearly 80 billion dol
lars “stuffed under mattresses” — more cash than in US circula
tion — which is now trickling into stocks amid improved trust in
corporate governance, Russia’s securities watchdog chief said
Tuesday.
The figure is almost double the Russian central bank’s current
gold and hard currency reserves of 43.6 billion dollars.
“Our latest estimates show that between 75 and 80 billion dol
lars are, so to speak, being stuffed under mattresses,” Igor Kostikov,
chairman of the Federal Commission for Securities Markets, told a
group of Western reporters in Moscow.
“Some of this money has started to come (into securities) since
May last year,” said Kostikov. “More and more, (Russian) individu
als are starting to invest.”
Russians had long been keeping their savings in dollars, leery of
their own national currency after being bitten by a string of devas
tating devaluations and bank collapses in the last decade.
Yet Russia was also the star performer last year among emerging
markets, in large part due to handsome profits reported by its oil and
natural gas giants that came on the back of peaking energy prices.
Kostikov thinks some lessons were picked up in those glory days.
Oil prices have since sagged but the Russian stock market continued
to hold its own until July when it too went into a tailspin along with
New York and European share markets.
134
The Russian market’s capitalization has dropped off from 137
billion dollars (141 billion euros) to 110 million dollars over the past
six weeks — although it still represents 70 percent of all volume trad
ed in Eastern Europe, said Kostikov.
“US security fund managers have been quitting (the Moscow mar
ket) — but this really has nothing to do with us,” stressed Kostikov.
“The Russian economy is hardly dependent on fluctuations in
(Western) stock markets,” agreed former presidential economic
adviser Vladimir Mao.
“If we pass this period without doing something stupid, there
will be a powerful stimulus for an influx of foreign investment into
Russia,” Mao told the government’s Rossiyskaya Gazeta.
Kostikov for his part touted Russia’s recent advances in establish
ing some semblance of the rule of law to the post Soviet business world.
And he took particular pride in its new “corporate governance
code” that provides a 117 page standard for proper relations
between owners and managers.
The code would be adopted by companies on a voluntary
basis — but investors will then be able to defend their rights through
Russian courts once the code is incorporated in the company’s
statute books.
Natural gas giant Gazprom was among the first major compa
nies to adopt the code, said Kostikov.
But the code still fails to address many problems — including
insider trading — that can only be prosecuted through criminal
statutes that are not yet a part of Russian law, said Kostikov.
“Foreigners have far more experience using insider information
than the locals,” said Kostikov, adding he expected parliament to
examine the long delayed legislation this fall.
In part confirming Kostikov’s rosy outlook for the Russian mar
ket and its ability to absorb some of the billions of loose Russian cash
dollars, a poll issued this week put the local ruble as the country’s
most trusted currency.
About 37 percent of respondents said they preferred to keep
their savings in rubles while 35 picked dollars, according to the
Public Opinion Foundation.
135
However, Kostikov also agreed with the argument that
Russian securities were reviving in part because the country still
lacked a functioning banking sector and companies had few
other options but to issue shares if they wanted to borrow fast
cash.
“The share issues over the first quarter of the year have been
greater than for all of last year,” he said.
International Herald Tribune
May 31, 2002
3
ROLLS ROYCE WINS GAS TURBINE CONTRACT FOR SAKHALIN-2
Rolls Royce Energy has won a $24 million offshore contract to
supply two RB211 gas turbine power generation units for the
Sakhalin 2 project, The Sakhalin Independent reported in
December. Rolls Royce will design the offshore gas turbine packages
to withstand severe conditions, including winds exceeding 90 meters
per hour, 19 meter high waves and temperatures as low as –35
degrees centigrade (–31 F). The equipment will be delivered to
Sakhalin in the third quarter of 2004.
4
RUSSIAN COMPANY BUILDS SAKHALIN’S BIGGEST BRIDGE
The construction of an 830 meter automobile bridge, the
biggest on the island, has been completed on Sakhalin,
Neftegaz.ru reported in December. The bridge connects the
Chayvo wellsite with the onshore processing facility. It is current
ly being used to transport the heavy equipment needed to start oil
and gas production. Once production begins, it will be used to
transport people and supplies to the wellsite. The bridge was con
structed as part of the Sakhalin 1 project by Khabarovsk based
Dalmoststroy.
136
5
NORWEGIAN COMPANY TO BUILD SUPPLY SHIP FOR SAKHALIN
Kvaerner Masa Yards Inc. will build a 65 million euro ($78 mil
lion) ship for the Far Eastern Shipping Co. to ply the Sea of
Okhotsk, where Exxon Mobil Corp. and Royal Dutch/Shell Group
plan $25 billion in investments, Bloomberg news agency reported in
December. The unit of Oslo based Aker Kvaerner, a Norwegian
engineering company, will build the supply vessel. The icebreaking
ship will be delivered in May 2005.
6
YUKOS PROTESTS HANDOVER OF SAKHA OIL FIELD
Russia’s fourth largest oil producer, Surgutneftegaz, has won a
full license for the huge Talakan oil field in Sakha, months after
Talakan was taken away from Yukos, Interfax reported in December.
Yukos, which saw Talakan as a key element in plans for a major
pipeline to China, dismissed the ruling by the Sakha regional arbi
tration court as “legal nonsense”. Yukos lost control of the field after
subsidiary Sakhaneftegaz failed to pay $501 million promised in its
winning bid during the original auction in 2001.
A second auction, which attracted interest from virtually all the
top oil companies, was stalled after the Natural Resources Ministry
proposed a $900 million starting price. Officials instead awarded a
one year license to Surgut, which came second in the original auc
tion with a $61 million offer.
Yukos, whose former head Mikhail Khodorkovsky was jailed
recently on charges of fraud and tax evasion, also became involved
in a quirky scandal in November. TV reports alleged the company
had let rabbits mate without supervision and mistreated pigs at a
farm belonging to a Yukos affiliated company, Sakhaneftegaz, in
Sakha. Authorities found that male and female rabbits were kept
together and “couplings take place unsystematically, and no zoolog
ical technological monitoring records are kept,” according to
137
Interfax. Nursing sows are also kept in common stalls, which is
against regulations.
7
WORKERS FROM AROUND RUSSIA HEAD TO SAKHALIN
A total of 3,500 people from various regions of Russia arrived on
Sakhalin this year to work on the Sakhalin 1 and Sakhalin 2 proj
ects, Regions.Ru reported in December. The number of people
working on the Sakhalin shelf projects is now around 11,000. More
than 1,000 companies are involved.
The biggest contracts have been awarded to construction com
panies from continental Russia, according to the acting deputy head
of the Sakhalin Oblast administration’s construction department,
Aleksandr Prokhorenko. This is because Sakhalin companies are
unable to take on such large projects due to their financial instabili
ty and lack of experience in preparing tender documents, he said.
“Among the requirements of Sakhalin Energy in the tenders for civil
engineering was the following: experience working as a contractor in
civil engineering in developing countries (including Russia) for a
contract worth at least $50 million,” Prokhorenko said. “We don’t
have any organizations in the oblast that could cope with such huge
sums within a year.” Instead of putting in for tenders independently,
Sakhalin companies such as Transstroy Sakhalin, Sfera, Grenada
and SU 4 are forming joint ventures with large Russian and foreign
companies. Other Sakhalin companies that are working as subcon
tractors include Spetstransstroy, Mostootryad 2001, the Sakhalin
branch of Dalmoststroy, Sakhalinstroyservis, Transgidrostroy and
Dalelektromontazh.
8
SAKHALIN OIL PRODUCER TAKES WINTER BREAK
A Royal Dutch/Shell led group developing oilfields on
Sakhalin has imposed a regular five month halt on production from
138
its offshore platform, Reuters reported in December. The group,
which has produced 10.3 million barrels of crude since May 29, said
production was likely to resume next May. It also announced that it
has issued a tender for the construction of a 145,000 cubic meter
liquefied natural gas ship by the end of the third quarter of 2007. The
tender, which also contains an option for a second ship, closes on
February 6.
Ãëàâà III
ÎÐÃÀÍÈÇÀÖÈß ÎÁÚÅÄÈÍÅÍÍÛÕ ÍÀÖÈÉ
È ÅÅ ÌÈÑÑÈß
1. ÎÎÍ, Ũ ÖÅËÈ, ÇÀÄÀ×È, ÑÒÐÓÊÒÓÐÀ
ü
Êàêèå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, òðè ïðåäëîæåíèÿ ÿâëÿþòñÿ êëþ÷åâûìè â íèæåïðèâåäåííîì îòðûâêå òåêñòà?
ü
Ðàáîòàÿ â ïàðàõ, çàäàéòå ïðèãîòîâëåííûå âàìè âîïðîñû ñâîåìó ïàðòíåðó.
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
INTRODUCTION
United Nations (UN), (см. рис. 10–12, стр. 249) internation
al organization of countries created to promote world peace and
cooperation. The UN was founded after World War II ended in
1945. (1) Its mission is to maintain world peace, develop good rela
tions between countries, promote cooperation in solving the world’s
problems, and encourage respect for human rights.
The UN is an alliance of countries that agree to cooperate with
one another. It brings together countries that are rich and poor, large
and small, and have different social and political systems. (2)
Member nations pledge to settle their disputes peacefully, to refrain
from using force or the threat of force against other countries, and to
refuse help to any country that opposes UN actions.
UN membership is open to any country willing to further the
UN mission and abide by its rules. Each country, no matter how
140
large or small, has an equal voice and vote. Each country is also
expected to pay dues to support the UN. As of 2003 the UN had 191
members, including nearly every country in the world.
The UN’s influence in world affairs has fluctuated over the
years, but the organization gained new prominence beginning in the
1990s. It was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 2001. Still, the UN
faces constant challenges. (3) It must continually secure the cooper
ation of its member nations because the organization has little inde
pendent power or authority. But getting that support is not always
easy. Many nations are reluctant to defer their own authority and
follow the dictates of the UN.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 74
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè óêàçàííûå â òåêñòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ (1), (2), (3) (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ïðè¸ìû âû ìîæåòå ïðèìåíèòü ê òåêñòó?
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå âûðàæåíèå “to refrain from using force or the
threat of force against other countries”. Êàê âû ïîëàãàåòå, ýòî
ýëåìåíò ìíîãîñëîâèÿ (ïîâòîð) èëè îïðåäåëåííîå êëèøå, õàðàêòåðíîå äëÿ äàííîãî âèäà äîêóìåíòîâ?
Purposes of the United Nations
ü
Êàêóþ ïîçíàâàòåëüíóþ èíôîðìàöèþ âû ïîëó÷èëè èç äàííîãî
òåêñòà?
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè.
The UN today has the same basic purpose and structure as it did
when it was founded in 1945. Its primary purpose—and greatest
benefit to its members—is to maintain world peace. That, in turn,
helps encourage business and international trade. In addition to that
primary mission, the UN serves its member countries in a variety of
141
other ways. (1) The UN provides a forum for countries to promote
their views and settle conflicts without violence. It allows countries
to cooperate to solve world problems, such as poverty, disease, and
environmental degradation. It serves as a symbol of international
order and global identity. It promotes and coordinates economic
and social progress in developing countries, with the idea that such
problems create sources of conflict that can lead to war. The UN
helps coordinate the work of hundreds of agencies and programs,
both within its own organization and outside it. It also collects and
publishes international data.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 75
ü
Ïîñòàâüòå èìåíà ñóùåñòâèòåëüíûå â åäèíñòâåííîì èëè ìíîæåñòâåííî ÷èñëå òàì, ãäå ýòî âîçìîæíî.
peace —
business —
forum —
data —
trade —
agencies —
ü
Çàïèøèòå óêàçàííîå ïðåäëîæåíèå (1) èç âûøåïðèâåäåííîãî
òåêñòà â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè.
ü
Êàêèå ëåêñè÷åñêèå èëè ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà/ïðè¸ìû
(ïðè÷àñòíûå, äååïðè÷àñòíûå, ãåðóíäèàëüíûå èëè èíôèíèòèâíûå îáîðîòû) èñïîëüçîâàíû â ðàññìàòðèâàåìîì ïðåäëîæåíèè
äëÿ äîñòèæåíèÿ êîìïðåññèè òåêñòà?
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå îòðûâîê.
CREATION OF THE UNITED NATIONS
142
ü
Îçàãëàâüòå êàæäûé èç óêàçàííûõ îòðûâêîâ.
ü
Âûáåðèòå ïî 10 êëþ÷åâûõ ñëîâ èç êàæäîãî îòðûâêà, êîòîðûå
áû îòðàæàëè åãî îñíîâíîå ñîäåðæàíèå.
ü
Èäåÿ ñîçäàíèÿ “Ëèãè íàöèé” ïðèøëà â ãîëîâó ôèëîñîôó
È. Êàíòó. Ïî÷åìó?
(1) The UN (см. рис. 10–12, стр. 249) is the result of a long
history of efforts to promote international cooperation. In the late
18th century, German philosopher Immanuel Kant proposed a fed
eration or “league” of the world’s nations. Kant believed that such a
federation would allow countries to unite and punish any nation that
committed an act of aggression. This type of union by nations to
protect each other against an aggressor is sometimes referred to as
collective security. Kant also felt that the federation would protect
the rights of small nations that often become pawns in power strug
gles between larger countries.
Kant’s idea came to life after World War I (1914–1918).
Horrified by the devastation of the war, countries were inspired to
come together and work toward peace. They formed a new organi
zation, the League of Nations, to achieve that goal. The League
would last from 1920 to 1946 and have a total of 63 member nations
through its history, including some of the world’s greatest powers:
France, the United Kingdom, Italy, Japan, Germany, and the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics. But the League had two major
flaws. First, several of the world’s most powerful countries were not
members, most notably, the United States. Second, League mem
bers proved unwilling to oppose aggression by Japan, Italy, and
Germany in the 1930s. This aggression ultimately led to World War
II (1939 1945). In the end, the League failed in its most basic mis
sion, to prevent another world war.
(2) Despite this failure, the idea of a league did not die. The first
commitment to create a new organization came in 1941, when U.S.
president Franklin D. Roosevelt and British Prime Minister
Winston Churchill signed the Atlantic Charter, in which they
pledged to work toward a more effective system to keep world peace
and promote cooperation. In 1942 representatives of the Allies—the
World War II coalition of 26 nations fighting against Germany and
Japan—signed a Declaration by United Nations accepting the prin
ciples of the Atlantic Charter. The declaration included the first for
mal use of the term United Nations, a name coined by President
143
Roosevelt. A year later, four of the Allies—the United States, the
United Kingdom, the Soviet Union, and China—agreed to establish
a general international organization. The four countries met in 1944
at the Dumbarton Oaks estate in Washington, D.C., and drafted a
charter for the new organization. They called the new league the
United Nations. But they still could not agree to certain details,
such as membership and voting rights.
The four countries met again in early 1945 at a summit in Yalta.
There, they settled their differences and called for a conference of
nations to complete their work. On April 25, 1945, the United
Nations Conference on International Organization convened in San
Francisco, with delegates from 50 countries attending. The dele
gates worked for two months to complete a charter for the UN that
included its purpose, principles, and organizational structure. The
charter contained a formal agreement committing all the world’s
nations to a common set of basic rules governing their relations. The
UN officially came into existence on October 24, 1945.
(3) Like the League of Nations, the UN was founded to pro
mote peace and prevent another world war. The UN recognized it
would not be successful unless it had the ongoing support of the
world’s most powerful countries. The organization took several steps
to ensure that support. To encourage continued U.S. involvement,
the UN placed its headquarters in New York City. To reassure the
world’s most powerful countries that it would not threaten their sov
ereignty, the UN gave them veto authority over its most important
actions. Five countries received this veto power: the United States,
Britain, France, the Soviet Union, and China. (Russia inherited the
Soviet Union’s veto after the breakup of that country in 1991.)
Another major strength of the UN, unlike the earlier League of
Nations, is that virtually every territory in the world is a member, or
a province, or a colony of a member. Switzerland is an exception,
maintaining only an observer mission status, meaning it can partic
ipate in UN deliberations but cannot vote. Switzerland has consid
ered becoming a full UN member. Over the years that nation’s vot
ers have rejected two referendums suggesting Switzerland join. The
Swiss apparently prefer to maintain their neutral observer status.
144
Some nonmember political entities, such as the Vatican City and the
Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO), also have permanent
observer mission status at the UN.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 76
ü
Êàêóþ îöåíî÷íóþ ëåêñèêó âû ìîæåòå óêàçàòü â ýòîì òåêñòå
(íàïðèìåð, ñ îòðèöàòåëüíîé îêðàñêîé, êàê âûäåëåííûå ñëîâà)?
ü
Êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè â áîëüøåé ñòåïåíè õàðàêòåðíû äëÿ êàæäîé èç òðåõ óêàçàííûõ ÷àñòåé?
ü
Íàéäèòå è ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó — ýòî èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, öèôðû, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ, àááðåâèàòóðû.
STRUCTURE OF THE UNITED NATIONS
The UN’s charter established six distinct bodies that serve dif
ferent functions: (1) the General Assembly, (2) the Security
Council, (3) the Secretariat, (4) the Economic and Social Council,
(5) the International Court of Justice, and (6) the Trusteeship
Council.
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè óêàçàííûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ â
òåêñòå (1), (2).
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ) íèæåñëåäóþùåé ïóáëèêàöèè.
ü
Îáëàäàåò ëè äàííûé ñòèëü ïóáëèêàöèé — îôèöèàëüíûé äîêóìåíò — îïðåäåëåííûìè ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèìè êëèøå? Åñëè äà, òî êàêèìè?
(1) General Assembly
The General Assembly is made up of all 191 member countries,
each with one vote. It undertakes all major discussions and decisions
145
about UN actions. It is like a global town hall, providing a powerful
medium for countries to put forward their ideas and debate issues.
The Assembly can discuss and make recommendations on any issue
covered by the UN’s charter. (1) However, the recommendations are
not binding because the Assembly has no authority to enforce them.
Members decide routine matters with a simple majority vote.
Important decisions require a two thirds majority.
The General Assembly meets annually in regular sessions that
generally run from mid September to mid December. Recently the
General Assembly has been meeting year round. It also convenes for
special sessions every few years on specific topics, such as econom
ic cooperation or disarmament. In addition, the Assembly can meet
in emergency session to deal with an immediate threat to interna
tional peace. At the beginning of each regular session, Assembly
members elect a president to preside over the assembly. The
Assembly sessions, like most UN deliberations, are simultaneously
translated into many languages so that delegates from around the
world can understand any speaker.
The General Assembly has the power to admit new members to
the UN. It approves the budget for UN programs and operations. (2)
The Assembly can establish agencies and programs to carry out its
recommendations. It elects members to serve on certain agencies
and programs, and it coordinates those programs through various
committees.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 77
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû äëÿ ïðîöåäóðíîé ëåêñèêè âåäåíèÿ ñîáðàíèÿ/çàñåäàíèÿ è
ü
Ñêàæèòå, êàêîé ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü îíè õàðàêòåðèçóþò.
to elect —
to preside over —
to have a vote —
to be simultaneously translated into many languages —
146
to establish agencies —
top admit members —
to carry out recommendations —
to meet annually in session —
to decide the issue with a simple majority vote —
to require a two/thirds majority —
(2) Security Council
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå “Security Council” ôîðìàëüíûå ñðåäñòâà êîãåçèè òåêñòà, à èìåííî ñëîâà and, but, however, nevertheless,
though, etc.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïðè¸ìû êîìïðåññèè òåêñòà âû îáíàðóæèëè â äàííîì òåêñòå?
The Security Council is the most powerful body in the UN. It is
responsible for maintaining international peace and for restoring
peace when conflicts arise. Its decisions are binding on all UN
members. The Security Council has the power to define what is a
threat to security, to determine how the UN should respond, and to
enforce its decisions by ordering UN members to take certain
actions. For example, the Council may impose economic sanctions;
such as halting trade with a country it considers an aggressor.
The Council convenes any time there is a threat to peace. A rep
resentative from each member country who sits on the Council must
be available at all times so that the Council can meet at a moment’s
notice. The Security Council also frequently meets at the request of
a UN member—often a nation with a grievance about another
nation’s actions.
The Security Council has 15 members; five of which hold per
manent seats. The Assembly elects the other ten members for two
year terms. The five permanent members—the United States,
Britain, France, Russia (formerly the Soviet Union), and China—
have the most power. These nations were the winning powers at the
end of World War II, and they still represent the bulk of the world’s
147
military might. Decisions of the Council require nine votes. But any
one of the permanent members can veto an important decision. This
authority is known as the veto right of the great powers. As a result, the
Council is effective only when its permanent members can reach a
consensus. This created problems during the Cold War, the post
1945 struggle between the United States and Soviet Union that
ended when the Soviet Union dissolved in 1991. During that time,
the council was frequently deadlocked because the United States
and Soviet Union could not agree. In the 1990s, increased coopera
tion between the United States and Russia has enabled the council
to become more effective.
The Council has a variety of ways it can try to resolve conflicts
between countries. Usually the Council’s first step is to encourage
the countries to settle their disagreements without violence. The
Council can mediate a dispute or recommend guidelines for a set
tlement. It can send peacekeeping troops into a distressed area. If
war breaks out, the Council can call for a ceasefire. It can enforce its
decisions by imposing economic sanctions on a country, or through
joint military action.
Since the 1990s, there has been growing controversy over which
countries should have permanent seats on the Council. Some
nations believe that other countries beside the original five should be
included. For example, Japan and Germany are powerful countries
that pay large membership dues and make substantial contributions
to the UN, yet they do not have permanent seats. There is no easy
solution to this problem. Adding more permanent members creates
its own set of complications, including how to decide which coun
tries get a seat and which do not. For example, if Germany joined,
three of the permanent members would be European, giving that
region an unfair advantage. Several proposals for addressing this
problem have been considered, including adding Germany and
Japan as permanent members, waiving the veto power of the perma
nent members, and limiting Council membership to one year. Thus
far, none of the proposals have been adopted, partly because the
present structure works well for the five permanent members and
they can veto any changes to it.
148
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 78
ü
Íàéäèòå ëåêñè÷åñêèå ñîîòâåòñòâèÿ ïðèâåäåííûì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì.
Unfair advantage; постоянные члены ООН; наложить вето;
to address a problem; to make a contribution; to pay membership
dues; растущие противоречия; разрешать споры/конфлик
ты/противоречия; to waive the veto power; a nation with a griev
ance; наложить экономические санкции; прекратить торговлю
со страной агрессором.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà “Security Council”.
(3) Secretariat
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå, ê êàêîìó ôóíêöèîíàëüíîìó ñòèëþ ïðèíàäëåæèò
äîêóìåíò, ïðèâåäåííûé íèæå?
ü
×åì õàðàêòåðèçóåòñÿ ãðàììàòè÷åñêàÿ ïàðàäèãìà (ëåêñè÷åñêàÿ
è ñèíòàêñè÷åñêàÿ ìîäåëü îðãàíèçàöèè) òàêèõ òåêñòîâ?
ü
Êàêàÿ îöåíî÷íàÿ (îòðèöàòåëüíàÿ, ïîëîæèòåëüíàÿ) è ýìîöèîíàëüíàÿ ëåêñèêà õàðàêòåðèçóåò ïîäîáíûå òåêñòû?
The Secretariat is the UN’s executive branch. It oversees the
administration of the UN’s programs and policies and carries out
day to day operations. This branch is headed by the secretary gen
eral, who acts as the UN’s spokesperson.
a) Secretariat Staff
The UN’s staff includes administrators, experts on technical
issues such as environmental protection, and economic advisors
working on various programs and projects in the member countries.
These workers have a variety of responsibilities, such as overseeing
the operations of peacekeeping missions, preparing studies on world
issues, organizing international conferences, and surveying eco
nomic and social trends. The largest concentration of staff outside
New York City is in Geneva, Switzerland, where several UN pro
grams and agencies have headquarters.
149
One purpose of the Secretariat is to develop an international
civil service of diplomats and bureaucrats whose loyalties are not
tied to any one country. The staff answers only to the UN and takes
an oath not to obey any outside authority. The UN charter calls on
its members to respect the independence and international charac
ter of the staff. However, the UN has had mixed success following
through on this ideal. The secretary general is generally seen as an
independent diplomat. But member nations still compete to place
their citizens in control of staffs that administer important UN pro
grams.
In the early 1990s the UN bureaucracy came under increasing
criticism for inefficiency and even corruption. Much of this criti
cism came from the United States, which believed it was bearing an
unfair share of the costs of supporting the UN. By the mid 1990s,
these criticisms had led to a series of reforms, including budget and
staff reductions.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 79
ü
Íàéäèòå ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè (êîãåçèè) äàííîãî òåêñòà, íàïðèìåð, òàêèå êàê however, though, but, and, etc.
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ ëåêñè÷åñêèå è ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå
òðàíñôîðìàöèè, ñîêðàòèòå òåêñò “Secretariat Staff”.
ü
Íàéäèòå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì:
the UN bureaucracy;
to bear an unfair share of the costs;
to be answerable only to the UN;
economic advisors;
to take an oath;
to carry out day to day operations.
b) Secretary General
ü
150
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå îïèñàíèå ôóíêöèé Ãåíåðàëüíîãî Ñåêðåòàðÿ
ÎÎÍ è ïåðåâåäèòå èõ îïèñàíèå.
ü
Çàäàéòå ïî 2–3 âîïðîñà ê êàæäîìó àáçàöó òàêèì îáðàçîì, ÷òîáû îòâåòû íà íèõ ñîñòàâèëè ïåðåñêàç äàííîé ÷àñòè òåêñòà.
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñòðóêòóðû, êîòîðûå ïîìîãàþò îñóùåñòâèòü êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà (ïðè÷àñòíûå, äååïðè÷àñòíûå, èíôèíèòèâíûå ñòðóêòóðû), à òàêæå ïðåäëîæíûå êîíñòðóêöèè.
The secretary general is a powerful public figure who oversees
the daily operations of the UN and plays a major role in setting the
organization’s agenda in international security affairs. The secretary
general can bring to the Security Council any matter that might
threaten world peace. (1) The secretary general has the authority to
serve as a neutral mediator in international conflicts and to bring
hostile parties together to negotiate. The secretary general’s person
al attention to a problem can often help bring about a resolution. For
example, in the 1990s Secretary General Boutros Boutros-Ghali per
sonally mediated conflicts in Somalia, the former Yugoslavia, and
elsewhere. In the 1980s, Secretary General Javier Perez de Cuellar
mediated conflicts in Central America. The secretary general also
works to build consensus among the five permanent members of the
Security Council, knowing that without it the Council cannot act.
The secretary general is formally chosen by the General
Assembly. But the secretary general must first be nominated by the
Security Council and win the consent of all five of its permanent
members. The secretary general serves a five year term, which may
be renewed. (2) The Security Council can nominate a candidate
from any country, but it is an unwritten tradition that the position
rotates geographically, with a secretary general chosen from a new
region after every two terms. In 1997 the General Assembly created
the post of deputy secretary general to assist in the management of
the Secretariat. The secretary general appoints the deputy secretary
general.
The secretary general, like the rest of the UN staff, is supposed
to be independent. In reality, the secretary general must rely on
member countries, especially the five permanent Security Council
members, to get anything done. As a result, the secretary general
151
often struggles with the Security Council over what direction the
UN should take. Since the Security Council chooses the secretary
general, there is a limit on how independent the position can be.
Kofi Annan of Ghana was elected by the General Assembly to be
secretary general from 1997 through 2001. In 2001 the General
Assembly unanimously elected him to a second term, running from
2002 through 2006. He is the first secretary general from sub
Saharan Africa and the first to rise through the UN staff to the top
job. Before becoming secretary general, Annan served as undersec
retary general for peacekeeping operations. He was credited with
doing the best job possible with difficult peacekeeping missions in
Somalia and Bosnia in the early 1990s. Annan was educated in the
United States and knows the UN bureaucracy well. As secretary
general, Annan has reformed the UN secretariat’s finances and
management and has significantly improved relations between the
UN and the United States. He has also worked to improve human
rights worldwide and to slow the spread of acquired immunodefi
ciency syndrome (AIDS), particularly in developing countries.
Annan’s immediate predecessor, Boutros Boutros Ghali of
Egypt, was secretary general from 1992 through 1996. He tried to
expand the UN’s role as peacekeeper and peacemaker. He was out
spoken with the Security Council, a trait that got him into trouble
with its members, particularly the United States. For example, he
scolded the Council for giving him big projects without enough
money to carry them out. In 1996 the United States vetoed his can
didacy for a second term. Since both Annan and Boutros Ghali rep
resented African nations, Annan’s selection preserved the tradition
of keeping the secretary general’s post in the same geographic region
for two terms.
(3) Past secretaries general have come from various regions of
the world, but it is an unwritten rule that they never should come
from one of the most powerful countries. This tradition is a response
to concerns that a secretary general selected from such a country
would not be perceived by other nations as objective or neutral.
There is also a fear that such a selection would give the world’s most
influential nations that much more power. Past secretaries general
152
include Trygye Lie of Norway, who served from 1946 to 1953; Dag
HammarskjOld of Sweden, 1953 to 1961; U Thant of Burma, 1961
through 1971; Kurt Waldheim of Austria, 1972 to 1982; and Javier
Perez de Cuellar of Peru, 1982 through 1991. No woman has yet
served in this position.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 80
ü
Âûïèøèòå èç òåêñòà, ïðèâåäåííîãî âûøå, èìåíà âñåõ Ãåíåðàëüíûõ Ñåêðåòàðåé ÎÎÍ è íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå ïðàâèëüíîå
ïðîèçíîøåíèå èõ èìåí.
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè óêàçàííûå â òåêñòå òðè ïðåäëîæåíèÿ.
ü
Êàêèå ýëåìåíòû ìíîãîñëîâèÿ èìåþòñÿ â äàííîì òåêñòå? Äàéòå âàøå îáúÿñíåíèå.
(4) Economic and Social Council
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ñòèëü äàííîãî òåêñòà. Êàêèìè ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèìè ñðåäñòâàìè õàðàêòåðèçóåòñÿ ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü,
ê êîòîðîìó ïðèíàäëåæèò äàííûå äîêóìåíò?
ü
×òî âû ìîæåòå îïðåäåëèòü ïî çàãîëîâêó òåêñòà? Ýòîò ïðè¸ì
íàçûâàåòñÿ ýêñòðàïîëÿöèÿ òåêñòà.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà.
The Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) works under the
authority of the General Assembly to coordinate the economic and
social work of the UN. ECOSOC has 54 member countries elected
by the General Assembly for three year terms. ECOSOC coordi
nates studies and recommends actions on international topics such
as medicine, education, economics, and social needs. It oversees the
work of a large number of programs and agencies. It operates main
ly through various standing committees, functional commissions,
and regional commissions. There are five regional commissions that
153
look at how the UN’s programs in a particular region are working
together. There are nine functional commissions that deal with top
ics such as population growth, narcotics trafficking, human rights,
and the status of women. Other committees work on topics relevant
to several UN programs, such as crime prevention, public finance,
natural resources, science, and geographical names.
ECOSOC coordinates many specialized agencies that provide a
variety of social, economic, and related services. The agencies oper
ate independently but work with other programs in the UN. Those
programs include the World Health Organization (WHO), the
United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization
(UNESCO), the International Labor Organization (ILO), and the
Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 81
ü
Ñäåëàéòå àíàëèç ñâîåãî ïèñüìåííîãî ïåðåâîäà ïî ñëåäóþùèì
íàïðàâëåíèÿì:
1)
Êàêèå ëåêñè÷åñêèå è ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ïðè¸ìû
âû èñïîëüçîâàëè?
2)
Âûïèøèòå â êîëîíêó (à) ïîëíûå íàçâàíèÿ, (â) àááðåâèàòóðû è
(ñ) ïåðåâîä íà ðóññêèé ÿçûê ÂÑÅÕ íàçâàíèé îðãàíèçàöèé.
3)
Âûó÷èòå íàèçóñòü ýòè íàçâàíèÿ è, ðàáîòàÿ â ïàðå ñî ñâîèì
ïàðòíåðîì, çàêðåïèòå èõ.
(5) International Court of Justice
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ýêñòðàïîëÿöèþ äàííîãî òåêñòà.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå òåêñò.
The International Court of Justice, also known as the World
Court, is the judicial arm of the UN. It is located in the Hague,
Netherlands. The court hears cases brought by nations against each
other. It has 15 judges, elected by the Security Council and the
154
General Assembly. A country is not required to participate in the
court’s proceedings, but if it agrees to participate, it must abide by
the court’s decisions
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 82
ü
Âûïèøèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó, îáúÿñíèòå âñå ñëó÷àè óïîòðåáëåíèÿ àðòèêëÿ the â äàííîì òåêñòå (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
(6)
Trusteeship Council
The Trusteeship Council was established to oversee the transi
tion of a handful of colonies to independence. The last of those
colonies gained independence in 1994, making the Trusteeship
Council obsolete.
MEMBERSHIP IN THE UN
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä ÷àñòè òåêñòà “×ëåíñòâî â
ÎÎÍ”.
ü
Êàêèå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè ïðåâàëèðóþò â òåêñòàõ ïîäîáíîãî ïëàíà? Îáúÿñíèòå ïî÷åìó.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà ïîìîãàþò íàì îáåñïå÷èòü
êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà? Îíè ïðèñóòñòâóþò â äàííîì òåêñòå?
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå, íàëè÷åñòâóþò ëè â ýòîì òåêñòå ýëåìåíòû ìíîãîñëîâèÿ è/èëè ïîâòîðîâ? Óêàæèòå èõ.
The UN started in 1945 with 51 founding members—including
the 50 countries that had attended the San Francisco conference,
and Poland, which was not at the conference but signed the charter
later.
New members are admitted to the UN on the recommendation
of the Security Council by a two thirds vote of the General
Assembly. Membership is open to any country that supports the
155
UN’s mission and is willing to follow the rules and responsibilities
specified in the charter.
In its early years, Western countries dominated the UN and the
General Assembly regularly sided with the United States. The Soviet
Union provided a balance to Western influence by using its veto
power in the Security Council.
The balance of power began to change in the 1950s and 1960s,
as colonies in Asia and Africa gained independence and became
members of the UN. The UN’s membership more than doubled
during that time and the new members had different concerns than
did the once dominant Western industrial nations. Many of the new
members believed the United States was too powerful and the UN
too often gave in to American interests. As newly independent
developing nations began to predominate, they affected voting pat
terns in the UN. The United States now found itself in the minori
ty on many issues. By the end of the 1970s, the United States had
become the primary user of the veto.
Another change in UN membership involved representation
for China. In 1945 China joined the United Nations as a found
ing member and was represented by the Nationalist government
in Nanjing. In 1949 the Nationalists lost the Chinese civil war
against the Communists and retreated to the island of Taiwan.
Backed by the United States and other Western nations, the
Nationalist government on Taiwan claimed to be the legitimate
government of all China and continued to hold the China seat in
the UN until 1971. That year the General Assembly took the seat
away from Taiwan and gave it to the Communist government in
Beijing, on the mainland. This action left Taiwan without repre
sentation in the UN. (1) Taiwan would like to be a member and
has tried to win a separate seat. But China regards Taiwan as a
province and has opposed independence for the island, despite
the fact that Taiwan functions like an independent nation in
many international matters. China has vehemently objected to
UN membership for Taiwan because leaders there believe if the
UN recognizes Taiwan with a seat it would help that govern
ment’s bid for independence.
156
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 83
ü
Íàéäèòå â äàííîì òåêñòå ýìîöèîíàëüíî-îöåíî÷íóþ, ñòèëèñòè÷åñêè îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó, íàïðèìåð: to vehemently object;
claimed to be the legitimate; believed the United States to be too
powerful, etc.
ü
Êàêèå ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè òåêñòà ïðèñóòñòâóþò â ïðèâåäåííîì
âûøå îòðûâêå (íàïðèìåð, but, however, though, while, etc.)?
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè ïðåäëîæåíèå (1).
UN FUNDING
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå òèï äàííîãî òåêñòà ïî åãî çàãîëîâêó.
ü
Óêàæèòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà êîìïðåññèè äàííîãî òåêñòà.
The UN is funded by dues paid by each of its members. Each
country’s dues are based upon its wealth and ability to pay. The UN
also requires countries to make financial contributions to its peace
keeping efforts. In addition, many countries make voluntary contri
butions to support various UN programs. The United States is the
largest contributor to the UN, providing roughly 22 percent of the
organization’s administrative budget and about 28 percent of its
peacekeeping budget in 2001.
THE UN’S INTERNATIONAL INFLUENCE
ü
Ïðèâåäèòå âñå âîçìîæíûå ñïîñîáû ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ ïðåîáðàçîâàíèé â óêàçàííîì (1) àáçàöå.
ü
Îçàãëàâüòå êàæäûé àáçàö òåêñòà òàêèì îáðàçîì, ÷òîáû â ðåçóëüòàòå ïîëó÷èëîñü êðàòêîå èçëîæåíèå åãî ñîäåðæàíèÿ.
The UN’s influence in promoting world peace has varied over
the years. During the Cold War conflict between the United States
and Soviet Union the organization exerted little influence over
157
world affairs. Tensions between the United States and Soviet Union
prevented the UN’s members from reaching consensus on impor
tant issues.
(1) With its effectiveness in international security affairs limited
during the Cold War, the UN turned its attention to other efforts. It
focused on the economic and social problems of developing coun
tries, and on supporting colonial territories as they moved toward
independence, as well as helping nations that had recently achieved
independence.
In the early 1990s, with the Cold War over, the UN began to
have influence over international security issues. The Soviet Union
dissolved in 1991, and Russia took over its permanent seat on the
Security Council. With the conflict between the United States and
the Soviet Union over, the major powers could agree more often on
how to handle international security matters.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 84
ü
Íàéäèòå è ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó â òåêñòå — öèôðû, èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ è ò.ä.
2. ÄÅßÒÅËÜÍÎÑÒÜ ÎÎÍ
ÏÎ ÏÎÄÄÅÐÆÀÍÈÞ ÌÈÐÀ Â ÀÇÈÈ
PEACEKEEPING FORCES
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå è äàéòå îïðåäåëåíèå ïîíÿòèþ «ìèðîòâîð÷åñêèå ñèëû ÎÎÍ».
ü
Âû ñîãëàñíû ñ ïîäîáíûì îïðåäåëåíèåì? Ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ,
ýòî îïðåäåëåíèå íå óòðàòèëî ñâîåé àêòóàëüíîñòè?
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ýêñòðàïîëÿöèþ òåêñòà ïî åãî çàãîëîâêó.
Peacekeeping is the nonaggressive use of military force to help
nations in conflict reach a settlement. The UN’s peacekeeping
158
forces play a neutral role, working to calm regional conflicts in sev
eral ways. They can go into an area of conflict as observers, making
sure agreements reached between opposing sides are being followed.
They can provide a buffer between warring parties by physically
interposing themselves in the middle. They can negotiate with mili
tary officers on both sides, providing a channel of communication.
(1) They can also monitor ceasefires, supervise elections, and pro
vide humanitarian aid.
Peacekeepers are lightly armed. They travel in armored vehicles
with automatic rifles, but lack artillery, tanks, or other heavy
weapons. Their work can be hazardous, especially if one of the war
ring sides doubts their neutrality. They are often caught in the mid
dle when ceasefires collapse and they sometimes have been deliber
ately attacked. More than 1,600 peacekeepers have been killed over
the years.
The Security Council grants authority for peacekeeping mis
sions, usually for several months, although the Council can reau
thorize missions for many years. The UN does not have its own
army, so the Security Council borrows forces for each mission from
the armies of member countries. The Security Council also chooses
a single commander, and the forces operate under UN command.
(2) The forces operate only if the parties in conflict agree to their
presence. Thus, the success of a peacekeeping mission depends
upon the cooperation of the opposing parties.
(3) Peacekeeping forces are funded by special fees paid by UN
members. The General Assembly must approve the funds. Today,
lack of funds is the single greatest constraint in the use of peace
keeping forces. As peacekeeping operations have expanded, they
have required more and more money. See United Nations
Peacekeeping Forces.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 85
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå, ïðèâåäåííîì âûøå, ÂÑÅ ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ, ñâÿçàííûå ñ ïðîöåññîì ïîääåðæàíèÿ ìèðà âîåííûìè ñèëàìè, âûïèøèòå èõ è äàéòå èì äåôèíèöèè íà àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå, íàïðèìåð:
159
Peacekeeping forces are contingents of solders whose sole pur
pose is to maintain peace.
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè óêàçàííûå â òåêñòå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ.
The First Peacekeeping Mission
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü òåêñòà.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ÷àñòü òåêñòà, ïðèâåäåííóþ íèæå;
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè (1) ïðåäëîæåíèå.
The UN charter does not mention peacekeeping forces,
although it does establish guidelines for peaceful resolution of inter
national conflicts and, failing that, authorizes the use of force to
stop an aggressor. (1) The idea for peacekeeping forces arose during
the Suez Canal crisis of 1956, when England, France, and Israel
attacked Egypt. During the crisis, Canadian diplomat Lester
Pearson suggested the need for an international force large enough
to keep peace in the area until a settlement could be worked out
between the parties. The General Assembly took his advice, and the
UN’s first peacekeeping mission was born. The UN sent peace
keepers into the area to oversee the withdrawal of French, British,
and Israeli troops and to act as a buffer between the warring parties.
The idea of peacekeeping evolved from there.
Subsequent Missions
ü
Âûïèøèòå ÷åòûðå ïåðâûõ ïðåäëîæåíèÿ èç ÷åòûðåõ àáçàöåâ.
Ìîæíî íàçâàòü ýòè ïåðâûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ êëþ÷åâûìè äëÿ êàæäîãî íîâîãî àáçàöà? Åñëè äà, ïî÷åìó?
ü
Êàêèì îáðàçîì îñòàëüíûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ ñïîñîáñòâóþò ðàñêðûòèþ òåìû?
1) In the 1980s and early 1990s, UN peacekeeping forces have
helped resolve several violent regional conflicts. The UN negotiated
160
ceasefires in Central America and the Iran Iraq War (1980 1988),
and dispatched peacekeeping forces to monitor the situations. In
Africa a UN force went to Namibia from November 1989 to March
1990 to oversee the independence of that country from South Africa
and to supervise the nation’s first free elections. UN peacekeepers
won the Nobel Peace Prize in 1988 in recognition of their successes.
By 2002 the UN had about 44,000 troops from 90 countries in 15
separate peacekeeping missions, spanning South Asia, the Middle
East, Eastern Europe, and Africa.
2) The new missions were not without problems. The UN
efforts were undermined by inadequate funding. The UN also mis
judged what was needed for some of its missions. For example, in
1991 the UN sent only about 500 military and police observers into
Angola, where a fragile truce had been declared in civil war between
government supporters and rebels. The UN mission was to oversee a
peace accord and to supervise elections. After the government won
the elections, the rebel organization took up arms and the civil war
resumed. The UN learned from this failure, and sent a force many
times larger to a similar mission in Mozambique in 1992, with
greater success. In 1991 the UN sent a peacekeeping mission to
Cambodia to run the government under a fragile pact that ended a
long civil war. The mission ended in 1993, when a new government
was formed.
3) UN peacekeepers ran into even greater problems when they
went to Somalia in 1992 and 1993. The UN authorized a peace
keeping effort led by the United States to deliver humanitarian aid
to the country, which was embroiled in a civil war that had brought
the population to the brink of starvation. The mission evolved into
an attempt to end the conflict between several clans fighting for con
trol of the country. After one of the clans attacked UN forces,
Secretary General Boutros Ghali urged U.S. forces to pursue the
clan’s powerful leader, Mohamed Farah Aidid. The operation ended
with an October 1993 battle in which 18 U.S. soldiers were killed
and one of the bodies was dragged through the streets of Mogadishu
in view of television cameras. The United States abruptly pulled out
of Somalia, and the civil war reignited.
161
4) The UN undertook its largest peacekeeping mission in the
former Yugoslavia in 1992. The effort involved about 40,000 foreign
troops and cost about $1 billion annually. The mission focused on
Bosnia and Herzegovina, a war torn nation that emerged from the
breakup of Yugoslavia. The mission was flawed from the beginning.
The troops were not prepared for the conditions they faced. The UN
sent lightly armed forces equipped for humanitarian operations into
a war where one side had been identified as the main aggressor. The
UN monitored numerous ceasefires, which were continually bro
ken. The peacekeepers could deliver aid to besieged cities only if
they followed the terms dictated by the aggressors, and they were
taken hostage on several occasions. In 1995 Serb forces overran the
Bosnian town of Srebrenica, which the Security Council had
declared a “safe area,” without providing adequate troops to protect
it. About 7,000 men and boys were massacred. Within months, the
peacekeeping effort was disbanded and replaced by a more heavily
armed force assembled by the North Atlantic Treaty Organization
(NATO), a regional defense alliance of countries including France,
the United Kingdom, and the United States.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 86
162
ü
Êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè ïðåâàëèðóþò â äàííîì
òåêñòå? ×åì âû ìîæåòå ýòî îáúÿñíèòü?
ü
Âû, ïî-âèäèìîìó, çàìåòèëè áîëüøîå êîëè÷åñòâî ïàññèâíûõ
ñòðóêòóð â äàííîì òåêñòå. Ê êàêèì ëåêñè÷åñêèì èëè ãðàììàòè÷åñêèì ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì ïðè¸ìàì ìîæíî ïðèáåãíóòü, ÷òîáû çàìåíèòü èõ? Ïðîèçâåäèòå ýòè ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå çàìåíû ïèñüìåííî.
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå âñå çíà÷åíèÿ ñëîâà mission, âûïèøèòå èõ è
îïðåäåëèòå, âñå ëè óïîòðåáëåíèÿ ýòîãî ñëîâà â äàííîì òåêñòå
îäèíàêîâû. Åñëè íåò, îáúÿñíèòå.
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêè îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó. Ñãðóïïèðóéòå å¸ â çàâèñèìîñòè îò ýìîöèîíàëüíîé îêðàøåííîñòè,
íàïðèìåð: to massacre; a war-torn nation; fragile pact; violent
regional conflicts, etc.
Changing Attitudes towards Peacekeeping
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ýêñòðàïîëÿöèþ çàãîëîâêà òåêñòà.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå äàííóþ ÷àñòü òåêñòà.
The UN’s experiences in Somalia and the former Yugoslavia
made its most powerful members reluctant to undertake any new
peacekeeping missions. The Security Council turned down the pleas
of the secretary general to intervene in Rwanda in 1994 when mili
tant Hutu tribesmen slaughtered roughly half a million members of
the Tutsi tribe within weeks. When similar events threatened to
unfold in the neighboring country of Burundi in 1995, the Security
Council again refused to authorize a response. In the late 1990s the
Security Council authorized peacekeeping operations to set up a
transitional administration in Kosovo (part of Serbia and
Montenegro, formerly the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia) to
restore peace in East Timor and administer the territory during its
transition to independence and to help implement a peace treaty in
Sierra Leone. In 2001 the Security Council authorized a multina
tional force to provide security and stability to Afghanistan follow
ing a U.S. led war against terrorism there. (1) This security force was
directed by participating countries rather than by the UN itself.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 87
ü
 óêàçàííîì (1) ïðåäëîæåíèè îñóùåñòâèòå ìàêñèìàëüíî âîçìîæíîå êîëè÷åñòâî ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ òðàíñôîðìàöèé.
ü
Íàéäèòå è ïåðåâåäèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ èíôîðìàöèþ â ýòîì òåêñòå, íàïðèìåð, öèôðû, èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå
íàçâàíèÿ è ò.ä.
ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
ü
Íàéäèòå è âûïèøèòå èç òåêñòà “Economic Development” âñå
ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ, êîòîðûå, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, îòíîñÿòñÿ ê
ñôåðå ýêîíîìèêè.
163
ü
Êàêèå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, íàïðèìåð, èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå îáîðîòû, íàëè÷èå ïðåäëîæåíèé â ñòðàäàòåëüíîì çàëîãå è ò.ä., ñâèäåòåëüñòâóþò î ìíîãîñëîâíîñòè òåêñòà?
The UN operates under the principle that promoting economic
and social development will help bring about lasting world peace. The
charter calls on the UN to promote full employment for all, higher
standards of living, and economic and social progress. As a result, the
UN devotes a major proportion of its staff and budget to economic
development programs worldwide. (1) The General Assembly has rec
ognized the need to restructure international economic relations to
help developing countries and has recommended a series of steps
aimed at reducing the gap between wealthy and poor countries.
The UN operates many programs and special agencies to pro
mote economic development and provide assistance and technical
expertise to developing countries. One of those programs is the
United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNC
TAD). Many developing nations rely on income from trade to sup
port their economic development efforts at home and are especially
vulnerable to price fluctuations on international markets and other
trade problems. UNCTAD was founded in the 1960s to help nego
tiate international trade agreements that stabilize prices and pro
mote trade with developing countries. During the 1970s the General
Assembly included those goals in its call for a New International
Economic Order to promote growth in developing countries. But
developing countries have little power in the international economy,
and as a result UNCTAD has been largely ineffective in advancing
their interests in international trade.
Other efforts include the United Nations Development
Program (UNDP), which coordinates all UN efforts in developing
nations. It is funded through voluntary contributions and has thou
sands of projects operating around the world. UNDP is the world’s
largest international agency providing development assistance on
technical issues. Two related agencies are the United Nations
Industrial Development Organization and the United Nations
Institute for Training and Research.
164
UN programs offer several advantages in promoting economic
development. Governments of developing nations see the UN as a
friend of the developing world, not as an outsider threatening their
authority or as a reminder of colonial rule. Many UN experts and
volunteers are themselves from other developing countries. UN
workers who come from the developing world may be more sensitive
to local conditions and to the pitfalls of development assistance than
their counterparts from more wealthy countries. The UN can also
organize its assistance on an international scale, avoiding duplica
tion of efforts. (2) Some issues, such as prevention and treatment of
major diseases and environmental protection, particularly benefit
from the UN’s international approach.
A major disadvantage of the UN development programs is that
their funding largely depends on voluntary contributions from
wealthy nations. Each program has to solicit contributions to carry
on its activities, and contributions can be abruptly cut off if the pro
gram displeases a donor government. In addition, programs some
times lack the efficiency and resources that governments and busi
nesses in wealthy countries take for granted. This has given the pro
grams a reputation for being inefficient and bureaucratic.
The UN also helps finance development through the World
Bank. The World Bank was created in 1944 to help developing
nations get funding for projects. The bank grants loans to member
countries to finance specific projects and this in turn encourages
foreign investing. A related agency, the International Monetary
Fund (IMF), was created at the same time to promote internation
al cooperation on monetary issues. It encourages a stable, orderly
pattern of monetary exchange rates between nations.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 88
ü
Äàéòå âñåì âûïèñàííûì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì èç ýêîíîìè÷åñêîãî ñëîâàðÿ äåôèíèöèè íà àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå.
ü
Âûïèøèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó: öèôðû, èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ è ò.ä.
165
ü
Çàïèøèòå óêàçàííûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ (1) è (2) â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè.
ü
Óêàæèòå ýìîöèîíàëüíî-îöåíî÷íóþ ëåêñèêó â òåêñòå. ×òî ïðèäà¸ò òåêñòó òàêàÿ ëåêñèêà (íàïðèìåð, abruptly cut off contributions, the pitfalls of development assistance è ò.ä.)?
ü
Êàêèìè ñðåäñòâàìè äîñòèãàåòñÿ ñâÿçíîñòü òåêñòà? Íàéäèòå â
òåêñòå è îáúÿñíèòå óïîòðåáëåíèå òàêèõ ñëîâ, êàê In addition,
but, though, etc.
GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT
ü
Îñóùåñòâèòå ýêñòðàïîëÿöèþ òåêñòà èñõîäÿ èç åãî çàãîëîâêà.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà “Global Environment”.
ü
Âûó÷èòå âñå àááðåâèàòóðû òåêñòà.
The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) encour
ages and coordinates sound environmental practices throughout the
world. It grapples with ways to approach environmental problems on
an international level, provides expertise to member countries,
monitors environmental conditions worldwide, develops environ
mental standards, and recommends alternative energy sources.
UNEP’s work is guided by principles adopted at the 1992 UN
Conference on Environment and Development, also known as the
Earth Summit. The summit, which took place in Rio de Janeiro,
Brazil, was the largest such conference ever held, attracting with
more than 100 national leaders. It was the third international envi
ronmental conference hosted by the UN.
The first UN environment conference took place in Stockholm,
Sweden, in 1972. It adopted general environmental principles, such
as the idea that one country’s actions should not cause environmen
tal damage to another. It also raised awareness about the interna
tional aspects of environmental damage. A second conference was
held in Nairobi, Kenya, in 1982. Nairobi is the headquarters of the
UN Environment Program.
166
The 1992 Earth Summit was larger and more ambitious than its
predecessors. Its major theme was sustainable economic develop
ment, meaning development that does not use up or destroy so
many of the world’s natural resources that it cannot be sustained
over time. The meeting produced an overall plan, called Agenda 21,
in which large developing countries promised to develop their indus
tries with an eye toward protecting the environment. Industrialized
countries pledged to help them do that. A special commission was
created to make sure countries followed through on the promises
they made, but the commission has no power to enforce those promises. Supporters hoped that the commission’s ability to monitor and
publicize how well countries were meeting their commitments
would encourage those countries to keep their word. But at its first
meeting in 1994, the commission found that the industrialized
countries were providing only half the funding they promised for the
effort.
The Earth Summit also adopted a treaty on global warming, the
environmental phenomenon in which the earth’s temperature is
increasing due to the burning of fossil fuels and other industrial
practices. But the treaty did not commit countries that signed it to
meet any targets by any particular date. The UN Environment
Program works with the World Meteorological Organization
(WMO) on this issue. The two organizations measure changes in
global climate from year to year. The UN also sponsors the
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Since 1989 that panel
has served as an international forum for negotiations on global
warming.
Another treaty adopted at the 1992 Earth Summit deals with the
issue of biodiversity—that is, the variety of different living organisms
in a particular habitat or geographic location. Under the treaty,
nations agreed to preserve important habitats for animals and plants.
Wealthier countries also agreed to pay for the right to extract com
mercially profitable substances from rare species in protected areas
of developing countries. The United States delayed signing the
treaty because of fears that it could limit patent rights in biotechnol
ogy.
167
The UN is the focal point for international cooperation on each
of these environmental issues. But the UN’s lack of authority over
the actions of its members is a major barrier to success.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 89
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì èç
òåêñòà “Global Environment”, âûäåëåííûì æèðíûì øðèôòîì.
ü
Êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè Âû èñïîëüçîâàëè â ïðîöåññå ïåðåâîäà? Îáúÿñíèòå, ïî÷åìó (Ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Íàéäèòå ñòèëèñòè÷åñêè îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó â òåêñòå. ×òî
îíà ïðèäàåò òåêñòó?
ü
Êàêîâà ìîäàëüíîñòü òåêñòà?
HUMAN RIGHTS
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà, êîòîðûå
(à) äåëàþò òåêñò ìíîãîñëîâíûì; (â) ñïîñîáñòâóþò êîìïðåññèè
òåêñòà.
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå òåêñò ñ ëèñòà.
One of the UN’s major goals under its charter is to promote and
encourage respect for human rights and fundamental freedoms for all
people, regardless of race, sex, language, or religion. But once again,
the UN’s effectiveness in promoting its agenda is limited by its lack
of authority over member nations.
After the atrocities committed by the Germans in the
Holocaust, the slaughter of Jews that occurred during World War II,
the UN adopted a Universal Declaration of Human Rights. The dec
laration was adopted on December 10, 1948, which is now celebrat
ed annually as Human Rights Day. It proclaims that “all human
beings are born free and equal” and establishes basic rights for all
people and norms for the behavior of governments in many areas.
168
For example, it says that all people have the right to liberty, religious
and political freedom, education, and economic well-being. It bans
torture and states that all people have the right to participate in their
governments. The declaration does not have the force of law, how
ever, and seems to have had little visible effect on the UN’s member
countries. Governments with poor human rights records, such as
China, criticize the UN’s attempts to promote human rights, saying
that such actions interfere with their internal affairs.
The UN operates a Commission on Human Rights, which mon
itors human rights abuses in countries, holds international meetings
on human rights concerns, and handles complaints about human
rights violations. In 1993 the General Assembly also created the
position of High Commissioner for Human Rights. The commission
er oversees all the UN’s human rights programs, works to prevent
human rights violations, and investigates human rights abuses. The
commissioner also has the power to publicize abuses taking place in
any country, but does not have the authority to stop them. However,
most publicity about human rights abuses does not come from the
UN but from rival countries or from nongovernmental organiza
tions, such as Amnesty International.
The UN has also drawn up four international conventions
(treaties) on human rights, which are legally binding but hard to
enforce. The conventions address the problems of genocide, racial
discrimination, civil and political rights, and economic and social
rights. The treaties have been ratified by only about half of the
world’s nations. The United States has only ratified the convention
on genocide and has declined to ratify the others. Other countries
have also refused to sign the conventions, citing concerns about the
specific terms of the conventions and the loss of authority that such
treaties imply.
During the Cold War, Western countries continually criticized
nations under Soviet rule for their lack of respect for human rights,
such as freedom of expression and fair elections. But the UN played
a small role in these arguments because of the Soviet Union’s veto
power, and because many other national governments did not guarantee human rights in their own domestic politics. The most impor
169
tant Cold War pact regarding human rights, the 1975 Helsinki
Accords, a diplomatic agreement between 35 countries that encour
aged human rights, was negotiated outside the UN framework.
Among the UN’s most visible recent activities regarding human
rights are the two International Criminal Tribunals held to bring to justice those responsible for the horrible acts of violence committed dur
ing the civil wars in the former Yugoslavia and Rwanda. The tribunal
for crimes committed in the former Yugoslavia was established by the
Security Council in 1993. The council initiated the Rwanda tribunal
in 1994. They are the first such international war crimes trials since the
Nurnberg Trials that followed World War II. Although the tribunals
were established by the Security Council, they operate independently.
The trials depend on contributions from countries to keep operating
and are seriously hampered by financial shortages. A more serious
problem is the inability to arrest suspects in countries or regions that
do not support the tribunal’s efforts. See War Crimes Trials.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 90
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû äëÿ íèæåïðèâåäåííûõ ñëîâ è
âûðàæåíèé.
ü
×òî ïðåäñòàâëÿþò ñîáîé ïðèâåäåííûå â òåêñòå îðãàíèçàöèè
è/èëè òðèáóíàëû, äîêóìåíòû?
ü
Ðàáîòàÿ â ïàðàõ, çàäàéòå ñâîåìó ïàðòíåðó âîïðîñû ïî âûäåëåííîìó ñëîâàðþ, ïîñòàðàéòåñü ïîëó÷èòü îí íåãî/íå¸ èñ÷åðïûâàþùèé îòâåò. Ìåíÿéòåñü ðîëÿìè.
War Crimes Trials; the Nurnberg Trials; International Criminal
Tribunals; Amnesty International Organization; a Commission on
Human Rights; the Helsinki Accords; Universal Declaration of
Human Rights; Human Rights Day.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 91
ü
170
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå íèæåïðèâåäåííûå ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ, ðàññòàâüòå èõ â ñîîòâåòñòâóþùèå êîëîíêè òàáëèöû (ñì. ïðèìåðû)
â çàâèñèìîñòè îò èõ ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîé íàãðóçêè: îòðèöàòåëüíîé,
ïîëîæèòåëüíîé èëè íåéòðàëüíîé.
ü
Îáúÿñíèòå, ïî÷åìó ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé ñ îòðèöàòåëüíîé íàãðóçêîé íàìíîãî áîëüøå, ÷åì äðóãèõ?
ü
Åñòü ëè ñðåäè ïðèâåäåííûõ ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé òàêèå, êîòîðûå
ìîæíî òðàêòîâàòü êàê ïðèíàäëåæàùèå áîëåå ÷åì îäíîé êîëîíêå? Ïî÷åìó?
Ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ ñ
îòðèöàòåëüíîé ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîé íàãðóçêîé
Ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ ñ
ïîëîæèòåëüíîé ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîé íàãðóçêîé
Ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ ñ
íåéòðàëüíîé ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîé íàãðóçêîé
are seriously hampered
to bring to justice
human rights
Human rights; financial shortages; are seriously hampered; the
inability to arrest suspects; to bring to justice; guarantee human
rights; veto power; lack of respect for human rights; freedom of
expression and fair elections; the problems of genocide; racial dis
crimination; civil and political rights; and economic and social
rights; rival countries; the power to publicize abuses; “all human
beings are born free and equal”; basic rights; norms for the behavior
of governments; the right to liberty, religious and political freedom,
education, and economic well being; to ban torture; to refuse to
sign the conventions; to ratify the convention on genocide; to
decline to ratify a document; the atrocities committed by the
Germans; the Holocaust; the slaughter of Jews.
171
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 92
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà “Human Rights”.
ARMS CONTROL AND DISARMAMENT
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå òåêñò “Arms Control and Disarmament” ñ ëèñòà. Êàêèå òðóäíîñòè âû èñïûòàëè ïðè óñòíîì ïåðåâîäå ýòîãî òåêñòà?
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äàííîãî òåêñòà.
ü
Êàêèå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå êëèøå õàðàêòåðèçóþò äàííûé
òèï òåêñòîâ?
The UN Charter authorizes the Security Council to plan for
worldwide disarmament and arms control. To help achieve those
goals, the UN has sponsored arms control negotiations in Geneva,
Switzerland, for decades. The General Assembly also held a special
session on disarmament in June 1982. (1) None of these UN activi
ties have had much direct effect on actual arsenals.
Instead, during the Cold War, the most important arms control
agreements were reached by countries negotiating directly with each
other, particularly by the United States and Soviet Union. At that
time, arms control was dominated by the nuclear arms race between
superpowers. (2) The United States and Soviet Union reached sev
eral important agreements, and then other countries signed on.
Examples include the 1963 Limited Test Ban Treaty, the 1967 Outer
Space Treaty, the 1968 Nonproliferation Treaty, and the 1990
Conventional Forces in Europe Treaty. In some instances the
General Assembly ratified these agreements. But in none of these
cases did the UN play a major role.
One UN agency, the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA), does serve an important function in arms control. The
agency, which has its headquarters in Vienna, Austria, operates
independently from the UN. The agency inspects the nuclear power
industries and research facilities of the countries that have signed the
Nonproliferation Treaty to discourage them from diverting nuclear
materials to military uses.
172
After the 1991 Persian Gulf War, UN agencies assumed a lead
role in enforcing a Security Council resolution to disarm Iraq of
weapons of mass destruction. (3) IAEA inspectors uncovered and
dismantled Iraq’s secret nuclear weapons program, and other UN
weapons inspectors monitored the destruction of stockpiles of chemical and biological weapons. However, in 1998 Iraq announced it
would no longer cooperate with the UN. In 2002, in response to
renewed U.S. efforts to enforce Iraqi disarmament, the Security
Council approved a resolution (Resolution 1441) warning of “seri
ous consequences” if Iraq did not disarm. Weapons inspections
resumed, but U.S. authorities charged that Iraq was not cooperating
fully and was hiding banned weapons. In March 2003, after diplo
matic talks broke down, a U.S.-led coalition launched a military
assault on Iraq to rid the country of banned weapons.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 93
ü
Çàïèøèòå óêàçàííûå âûøå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ òåêñòà (1), (2), (3) â
äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè;
ü
Êàêèå ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè òåêñòà ïðèñóòñòâóþò â äàííîì òåêñòå?
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì, ïðèâåäåííûì íèæå:
worldwide disarmament and arms control —
arms control negotiations —
the nuclear arms race between superpowers —
the 1963 Limited Test Ban Treaty, the 1967 Outer Space Treaty —
the 1968 Nonproliferation Treaty —
the 1990 Conventional Forces in Europe Treaty —
the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) —
the nuclear power industries and research facilities —
to disarm and dismantle —
to discourage them from diverting nuclear materials to military
uses —
173
Iraq’s secret nuclear weapons program —
other UN weapons inspectors —
to monitor the destruction of stockpiles of chemical and biolog
ical weapons —
a U.S. led coalition launched a military assault on Iraq to rid
the country of banned weapons —
RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNITED STATES
ü
×òî, ïî Âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ñòîèò çà äàííûì çàãîëîâêîì: “The
Relationship with the US”?
ü
Âûïèøèòå ïåðâûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ êàæäîãî àáçàöà.
ü
Ðàáîòàÿ â ïàðå ñî ñâîèì ïàðòíåðîì, îáìåíÿéòåñü âîïðîñàìè è
îòâåòàìè, ïîñòðîåííûìè íà áàçå âûäåëåííûõ ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé â òåêñòå.
A longstanding tension exists between the UN and the United
States, the world’s most powerful nation. The UN constrains the
United States by creating the one coalition that can rival U.S.
power—that of all other nations. In addition, the United States
has a streak of isolationism in its foreign policy that runs counter
to the idea of the UN. But the UN also benefits the United States
in many ways. It amplifies U.S. power because the United States
usually leads the UN coalition. It helps keep world peace, which
the United States is not rich or strong enough to do by itself. And
it helps keeps the world stable, providing a good climate for international trade.
Starting in the mid 1980s the United States became more selective about how much money to give the UN in both mandatory and
voluntary contributions. Some U.S. political leaders criticized the
UN for being too large and inefficient. They complained that the
UN answered to too many countries and was hindered by competi
tion among the nations whose citizens were a part of the UN’s staff.
The United States was further disillusioned by the peacekeeping fiascoes in Somalia and Bosnia in the early 1990s. This dissatisfaction
174
came at a time after the Cold War, when the United States began to
turn inward and to reduce foreign aid, diplomatic operations, and military forces worldwide.
At the same time, the United States was being squeezed financially by the size of its own debts and fell behind in paying its UN
dues and contributions to the peacekeeping efforts. By the mid
1990s the United States owed the UN roughly $1.5 billion, despite
various promises and plans to catch up. Meanwhile the U.S.
Congress voted to give less money to the UN’s peacekeeping
operations. Although polls showed strong U.S. public support for
the UN, no groups stepped forward to persuade Congress to
increase its support.
The United States began to target its criticism increasingly at
UN Secretary General Boutros Ghali. In 1996 the United States
announced its plans to veto Boutros Ghali’s candidacy for a second
term. In a rare display of unity, almost all the other UN member
states opposed this decision, arguing that the United States had no
right to dictate the UN’s direction until it paid its membership dues.
Nonetheless, the United States vetoed Boutros Ghali’s second
term, overruling all 14 other Security Council members. After sever
al months of stalemate, Kofi Annan was elected with the support of
the United States.
Prospects for better relations brightened in 2000, when the
General Assembly changed its system of financing and substantially
lowered U.S. dues. In exchange, the United States pledged a large
payment of its past debts. The compromise removed a major source of
tension between the United States and United Nations.
The UN’s relationship with the United States was severely
strained in 2003 when the United States launched a war against Iraq
for its alleged failure to eliminate weapons of mass destruction. The
decision by the United States to abandon diplomacy and forgo explicit Security Council authorization of military action drew sharp criticism from many members of the Council, including France,
Germany, Russia, and China. Some diplomats warned that the U.S.
action would weaken the UN by undermining its credibility and international authority.
175
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 94
ü
Îñóùåñòâèòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè â ïðåäëîæåíèÿõ,
â êîòîðûõ èìåþòñÿ âûäåëåííûå ñëîâà èëè âûðàæåíèÿ (ñì.
Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì âûäåëåííûì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì.
ü
Êàêèìè ñðåäñòâàìè äîñòèãàåòñÿ ìîäàëüíîñòü òåêñòà? Óêàæèòå ýòè ñðåäñòâà â òåêñòå.
CRISIS OF FUNDING AND FUTURE PROSPECTS
ü
×òî ñòîèò çà çàãîëîâêîì äàííîãî òåêñòà? Èíûìè ñëîâàìè, ïåðåôðàçèðóéòå è/èëè òðàíñôîðìèðóéòå çàãëàâèå òåêñòà òàêèì
îáðàçîì, ÷òîáû ïðè ýòîì íå áûë óòðà÷åí ñìûñë.
ü
Êàêîâà ìîäàëüíîñòü äàííîãî òåêñòà? (Ìîäàëüíîñòü — ýòî
îòíîøåíèå ãîâîðÿùåãî èëè ïèøóùåãî ê òîìó, ÷òî îí ïèøåò
èëè ãîâîðèò.)
The United States was not alone in its failure to keep up with its
dues and other contributions to the UN. (1) By early 1997 members
owed the UN more than $3 billion, with roughly half of that owed by
the United States alone. The financial crisis had actually started years
earlier, in the 1980s, when countries started falling behind in their
payments. Some of the reasons were political, reflecting the unhap
piness of the United States and other Western countries over how the
UN was managing some of its programs, including its peacekeeping
missions.
At the same time financial support declined, the UN’s expenses
grew. In the preceding decade, the UN had greatly expanded its
peacekeeping operations and increased other programs. In 1996 the
UN came perilously close to having to shut down its operations. It
was forced to scale back or terminate its peacekeeping operations,
and the creation of new peacekeeping efforts became almost impos
sible. The UN had reached the biggest funding crisis in its history.
176
(2) By the time Annan took office in January 1997, he faced an
organization that was on the brink of bankruptcy and the target of
severe criticism from the United States. The new secretary general
pushed through a series of reforms to consolidate some major UN
offices, in part to encourage the United States to pay its back dues.
In the late 1990s the UN’s financial health improved because of lower
peacekeeping expenses and larger payments from the United States.
In 1999 Congress agreed to pay nearly $1 billion of back dues, but
only on the condition that the UN would decrease U.S. share of the
administrative budget from 25 to 22 percent and its share of the
peacekeeping budget from 31 to 25 percent. In 2000 the General
Assembly satisfied these terms by overhauling its system of financing.
It set a ceiling of 22 percent as the maximum amount any country
would pay toward the administrative budget. It also replaced its ad hoc
system of funding peacekeeping operations with a sliding scale of
dues based on a country’s per capita income. As a result, the U.S.
contribution to peacekeeping operations was expected to decline
gradually to close to 25 percent by 2004, and more than two dozen
countries accepted increases in their peacekeeping contributions.
Since its creation in 1945, the UN has done much to promote
international cooperation in economic and social goals, and to a less
er extent, world peace. The end of the Cold War and new possibilities
for cooperation among the world’s major powers has given the UN an
opportunity to realize the original vision of its founders. The UN now
has a chance to become an international organization that can effec
tively maintain world peace within the limits of a system where indi
vidual nations maintain their own authority and independence.
Despite the challenges it faces, the UN will likely play an increasingly
central role in international politics in the coming decades.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 95
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà, îáðàùàÿ âíèìàíèå íà ñîäåðæàùèåñÿ öèôðû, à òàêæå ñïîñîáû ïåðåäà÷è óâåëè÷åíèÿ èëè
óìåíüøåíèÿ, óëó÷øåíèÿ èëè óõóäøåíèÿ ôèíàíñîâîé ñèòóàöèè,
ñëåäóþùèõ âûðàæåíèé:
177
Members owed the UN more than $3 billion, with roughly half
of that owed by the United States alone; financial support declined,
the UN’s expenses grew; falling behind in their payments; play an
increasingly central role; with a sliding scale of dues; it set a ceiling
of 22 percent as the maximum amount any country would pay
toward the administrative budget; overhauling its system of financ
ing; the financial crisis; financial support declined, the UN’s
expenses grew; the UN had greatly expanded; increased other pro
grams; to shut down its operations; to scale back or terminate; to be
on the brink of bankruptcy; to push through a series of reforms to
consolidate some major UN offices; to pay its back dues; the UN’s
financial health improved; lower peacekeeping expenses; and larger
payments from the United States.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 96
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè óêàçàííûõ âûøå ïðåäëîæåíèé (1) è (2).
ü
Íàéäèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, ñîäåðæàùèå îöåíî÷íóþ è ýìîöèîíàëüíî îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó, íàïðèìåð: The UN now has a
chance to become; its contribution was expected to decline; the UN
will likely play an increasingly important role.
UNESCAP: UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC
AND SOCIAL COMMISSION FOR ASIA AND THE PACIFIC
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå òèï ïóáëèêàöèè.
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà UNESCAP For Asia
and the Pacific.
ü
Âûïèøèòå îòäåëüíî âñå íàçâàíèÿ îðãàíèçàöèé, èõ àááðåâèàòóðû, à òàêæå èõ ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû.
General description
The regional arm of the United Nations Secretariat for the
Asian and Pacific region is the United Nations Economic and Social
178
Commission for Asia and the Pacific (UNESCAP) (см. рис. 12,
стр. 249). It is located in the United Nations Building, Ratcha
damnoen Nok Avenue, Bangkok, Thailand. The functions of
UNESCAP have been defined by the Secretary General as follows:
(a) Promoting economic and social development through
regional and subregional cooperation and integration;
(b) Serving as the main economic and social development
forum within the United Nations system for the
UNESCAP region;
(c) Formulating and promoting development assistance activi
ties and projects commensurate with the needs and priori
ties of the region while acting as an executing agency for
relevant operational projects;
(d) Providing substantive and secretariat services and docu
mentation for the Commission and its subsidiary bodies;
(e) Carrying out studies, research and other activities within
the terms of reference of the Commission;
(f) Providing advisory services to governments at their request;
(g) Developing and executing programs of technical coopera
tion;
(h) Coordinating UNESCAP activities with those of the major
departments/offices of the United Nations at Headquarters
and specialized agencies and intergovernmental organiza
tions.
To carry out these functions, the UNESCAP secretariat com
prises the Office of the Executive Secretary and the following divi
sions.
• Emerging Social Issues
• Environment and Sustainable Development
• Information, Communication and Space Technology
• Poverty and Development
• Statistics
• Trade and Investment
• Transport and Tourism
• Administrative Services
• Program Management
179
The main legislative organ of UNESCAP is the Commission,
which meets annually at the ministerial level and reports to the
UN’s Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC). It provides a
forum for all Governments of the region to review and discuss eco
nomic and social issues and to strengthen regional cooperation. The
Advisory Committee of Permanent Representatives and other
Representatives Designated by Members of the Commission
(ACPR), composed of UNESCAP members and associate mem
bers, meets almost every month to advise and exchange views with
the Executive Secretary on the Commission’s work. The
Commission maintains close cooperation and consultation between
the members and the secretariat of the Commission. Three
Committees, eight Sub committees and two Special Bodies guide
the Commission’s work and make recommendations in accordance
with seven subprograms.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 97
180
ü
Ñãðóïïèðóéòå íàçâàíèÿ ãîñóäàðñòâ-÷ëåíîâ ÀÑÅÀÍ â ñëåäóþùåì òåêñòå â çàâèñèìîñòè îò ðåãèîíà èõ ìåñòîíàõîæäåíèÿ.
ü
Ïî êàêîìó ïðèíöèïó âàì îêàçàëîñü ëåã÷å çàïîìèíàòü íàçâàíèÿ
ãîñóäàðñòâ-÷ëåíîâ ÀÑÅÀÍ: âñå ïîäðÿä, â ðàçáèâêó, ïî àëôàâèòó, ïî ãðóïïàì, ñîçäàííûì ïî ðåãèîíàëüíîìó ïðèçíàêó?
Member States (53)
Date of Admission
1. Afghanistan**
2. Armenia
3. Australia
4. Azerbaijan
5. Bangladesh**
6. Bhutan**
7. Brunei Darussalam
8. Cambodia**
9. China
24 April 1953
26 July 1994
28 March 1947
31 July 1992
17 April 1973
6 January 1972
26 July 1985
20 August 1954
28 March 1947
10. Fiji
11. France
12. Georgia
13. India
14. Indonesia
15. Islamic Republic of Iran
16. Japan
17. Kazakhstan
18. Kiribati**
19. Korea (Democratic
People’s Republic of)
20. Korea (the Republic of)
21. Kyrgyzstan
22. Lao People’s Democratic
Republic(the)**
23. Malaysia
24. Maldives**
25. Marshall Islands (the)
26. Micronesia (Federated
States of)
27. Mongolia
28. Myanmar** 19 April 1948
29. Nauru
30. Nepal**
31. Netherlands (the)
32. New Zealand
33. Pakistan
34. Palau
35. Papua New Guinea
36. Philippines (the)
37. Russian Federation (the)***
38. Samoa**
39. Singapore
40. Solomon Islands**
41. Sri Lanka
42. Tajikistan
43. Thailand
44. Timor Leste
45. Tonga
46. Turkey
3 August 1979
28 March 1947
25 July 2000
28 March 1947
28 September 1950
10 July 1958
24 June 1954
31 July 1992
26 July 1991
31 July 1992
20 October 1954
31 July 1992
16 February 1955
17 September 1957
5 August 1976
31 July 1992
31 July 1992
21 December 1961
20 July 1971
6 June 1955
28 March 1947
8 March 1948
30 September 1947
18 July 1996
27 August 1976
28 March 1947
28 March 1947
5 July 1963
21 September 1965
3 August 1979
10 December 1954
31 July 1992
28 March 1947
18 July 2003
20 July 1971
18 July 1996
181
47. Turkmenistan
48. Tuvalu **
49. United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern
Ireland (the)
50. United States of America (the)
51. Uzbekistan
52. Vanuatu**
53. Viet Nam
31 July 1992
26 July 1985
28 March 1947
Associate Members* (9)
1. American Samoa
2. Cook Islands (the)
3. French Polynesia
4. Guam
5. Hong Kong, China****
6. Macao, China *****
7. New Caledonia
8. Niue
9. Northern Mariana Islands (the)
Date of Admission
28 July 1991
11 July 1972
31 July 1992
24 July 1981
25 November 1947
26 July 1991
31 July 1992
3 August 1979
22 July 1986
28 March 1947
31 July 1992
27 July 1984
23 August 1954
Notes:
* Not a member of the United Nations
** Least Developed Country
*** Continuation of membership of former USSR
**** Change of name from Hong Kong to Hong Kong, China
(1.7.1997)
***** Change of name from Macau to Macao, China (20.12.1999)
HISTORY OF UNESCAP
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ýêñòðàïîëÿöèþ òåêñòà ïî åãî çàãîëîâêó.
ü
Çàïèøèòå îáîçíà÷åííûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ (1) è (2) â äèàãîíàëüíîé
çàïèñè.
Established in 1947 in Shanghai, China, as the Economic
Commission for Asia and the Far East (ECAFE) to assist in post war
economic reconstruction, the United Nations Economic and Social
Commission for Asia and the Pacific moved its headquarters to
Bangkok in January 1949.
182
(1) The name was changed in 1974 to reflect both the econom
ic and social aspects of development and the geographic location of
its member countries.
UNESCAP’s mandate was broadened in 1977 by the General
Assembly. The regional commissions have since then been the main
UN economic and social development centers within the five differ
ent regions.
(2) Strengthened by 50 years of experience as a regional think
tank, UNESCAP’s activities are more and more concentrated on
spreading the growth momentum from its more dynamic member
countries to the rest of the region.
The ultimate challenge lies in bringing some 830 million of the
region’s poor into the economic mainstream, enabling everybody to
achieve a better standard of life as envisaged in the Charter of the
United Nations.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 98
ü
Èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè, ïðåîáðàçóéòå âûäåëåííûé àáçàö òåêñòà.
ü
Êàêèå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà îáåñïå÷èâàþò êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà. Óêàæèòå âñå èìåþùèåñÿ â òåêñòå èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ïðè÷àñòíûå èëè ïðåäëîæíûå îáîðîòû è ò.ä.
(ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
3. ÎÎÍ È Å¨ Ó×ÀÑÒÈÅ
 ÝÊÎÍÎÌÈ×ÅÑÊÎÌ ÐÀÇÂÈÒÈÈ ÑÒÐÀÍ ÀÒÐ: ÀÑÅÀÍ, ÀÏÅÊ
APEC: ASIA-PACIFIC ECONOMIC COOPERATION
What is AsiaPacific Economic Cooperation?
ü
Ñ êàêîé öåëüþ çàãîëîâîê íèæåñëåäóþùåãî òåêñòà ïåðåäàí â
ôîðìå âîïðîñà? Êàêîé ýòî ïðè¸ì?
183
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äàííîé ïóáëèêàöèè.
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ìîäàëüíîñòü äàííîãî òåêñòà. Êàêèìè ñðåäñòâàìè
ïåðåäàåòñÿ ìîäàëüíîñòü?
Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation, or APEC (см. рис. 13,
стр. 249), is the premier forum for facilitating economic
growth, cooperation, trade and investment in the Asia-Pacific
region.
APEC is the only inter governmental grouping in the world
operating on the basis of non binding commitments, open dialogue
and equal respect for the views of all participants. Unlike the WTO
or other multilateral trade bodies, APEC has no treaty obligations
required of its participants. Decisions made within APEC are
reached by consensus and commitments are undertaken on a volun
tary basis.
APEC has 21 members — referred to as “Member Economies” —
which account for more than 2.5 billion people, a combined GDP
of 19 trillion US dollars and 47% of world trade. It also proudly rep
resents the most economically dynamic region in the world having
generated nearly 70% of global economic growth in its first 10 years.
APEC’s 21 Member Economies are Australia; Brunei
Darussalam; Canada; Chile; People’s Republic of China; Hong Kong,
China; Indonesia; Japan; Republic of Korea; Malaysia; Mexico; New
Zealand; Papua New Guinea; Peru; The Republic of the Philippines;
The Russian Federation; Singapore; Chinese Taipei; Thailand; United
States of America; Viet Nam.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 99
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå ïîëíîå îáîçíà÷åíèå äëÿ àááðåâèàòóð è ïðèâåäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì,
ïðèâåäåííûå íèæå:
WTO
APEC
Asia Pacific region
“Member Economies”
184
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 100
ü
Ñãðóïïèðóéòå íàçâàíèÿ âñåõ ñòðàí-÷ëåíîâ APEC (21 ñòðàíà,
ñìîòðè âûäåëåííûé 4-é àáçàö) ïî ìåñòó èõ ãåîãðàôè÷åñêîãî
ïîëîæåíèÿ. Îáúÿñíèòå, ïî÷åìó îíè íàõîäÿòñÿ íå òîëüêî â ðåãèîíå ÀÒÐ?
ü
Íàéäèòå â òåêñòå ñðåäñòâà, îáåñïå÷èâàþùèå åãî ñâÿçíîñòü,
íàïðèìåð, òàêèå ñëîâà, êàê unlike, but, though, and, etc.
PURPOSE AND GOALS
ü
Ê êàêîìó ôóíêöèîíàëüíîìó ñòèëþ, ñóäÿ ïî çàãîëîâêó, ìîæíî
îòíåñòè äàííûé òåêñò?
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå òåêñò ñ ëèñòà.
APEC was established in 1989 to further enhance economic
growth and prosperity for the region and to strengthen the Asia
Pacific community.
Since its inception, APEC has worked to reduce tariffs and other
trade barriers across the Asia Pacific region, creating efficient domes
tic economies and dramatically increasing exports. Key to achieving
APEC’s vision are what are referred to as the ‘Bogor Goals’ of free and
open trade and investment in the Asia-Pacific by 2010 for industrialized
economies and 2020 for developing economies. These goals were adopt
ed by Leaders at their 1994 meeting in Bogor, Indonesia.
Free and open trade and investment helps economies to grow,
creates jobs and provides greater opportunities for international
trade and investment. In contrast, protectionism keeps prices high
and fosters inefficiencies in certain industries. Free and open trade
helps to lower the costs of production and thus reduces the prices of
goods and services — a direct benefit to all.
APEC also works to create an environment for the safe and effi
cient movement of goods, services and people across borders in the
region through policy alignment and economic and technical coop
eration.
185
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 101
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå âñå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè ñî ñëåäóþùèì
ïðåäëîæåíèåì. Îáúÿñíèòå, êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ïðè¸ìû âû
èñïîëüçîâàëè â äàííîì ñëó÷àå?
These goals were adopted by Leaders at their 1994 meeting in
Bogor, Indonesia.
ü
Êàêèìè õàðàêòåðíûìè äëÿ äàííîãî òåêñòà ÿçûêîâûìè êëèøå
õàðàêòåðèçóåòñÿ äàííûé òåêñò? Íàïðèìåð, ñòðàäàòåëüíûé çàëîã, èíôèíèòèâíûå êîíñòðóêöèè, ñëîæíûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ è ò.ä.
2004 PRIORITIES AND THEMES
ü
Ðàáîòàÿ â ïàðàõ, çàäàâàéòå äðóã äðóãó òàêèå âîïðîñû, ÷òîáû
öåëè, òåìû è ïðèîðèòåòû ñòðàí-÷ëåíîâ ÀÏÅÊ ñòàëè îòâåòàìè
íà çàäàâàåìûå âàìè âîïðîñû.
APEC Economic Leaders outlined the following priorities for
2004 during their meeting in Bangkok, Thailand:
1. Promoting Trade and Investment Liberalization
2. Enhancing Human Security
3. Using APEC to Help People and Societies Benefit from
Globalization
In addition to the priorities provided by APEC Economic
Leaders, the following set of APEC themes for 2004 will guide the
activities of APEC fora:
Theme
• One Community, Our Future
Sub-themes
• A Commitment to Development through Trade
• Sharing Benefits through Better Practices
• Skills for the Coming Challenges
• Opportunities for Entrepreneurial Growth
• Growth and Stability: Key for APEC Integration
• Commitment to Sustainable Growth
• Experiencing Our Diversity
186
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 102
ü
×åì ìîæíî îáúÿñíèòü èñïîëüçîâàíèå â äàííîì òåêñòå óñå÷åííûõ ãðàììàòè÷åñêèõ ñòðóêòóð?
HOW APEC OPERATES
(1) APEC — A Multilateral Economic Forum
ü
×òî âû ìîæåòå ñêàçàòü î òåêñòå (1) ñóäÿ ïî åãî çàãîëîâêó?
ü
Èìååòñÿ ëè â äàííîì òåêñòå îöåíî÷íàÿ ëåêñèêà? Êàêàÿ?
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä ñ ëèñòà âñåõ íèæåñëåäóþùèõ îòðûâêîâ òåêñòà îòíîñèòåëüíî ýêîíîìèê ÀÏÅÊ:
Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) operates as a
cooperative, multilateral economic and trade forum. It is unique in
that it represents the only intergovernmental grouping in the world
committed to reducing trade barriers and increasing investments
without requiring its members to enter into legally binding obliga
tions. The forum succeeds by promoting dialogue and equal
respect for the views of all participants and making decisions based
on consensus to achieve its free and open trade and investment
goals.
APEC Member Economies take individual and collective
actions to open their markets and promote economic growth. More
information about these actions is available in the Action Plans sec
tion of this website.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 103
ü
Äàéòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñëåäóþùèì âûðàæåíèÿì:
APEC operates as a cooperative, multilateral economic and
trade forum;
187
intergovernmental grouping;
reducing trade barriers and increasing investments;
free and open trade and investment goals;
to open their markets and promote economic growth.
(2) Host Economy
ü
Äàéòå äåôèíèöèþ âûðàæåíèþ “HOST ECONOMY”.
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå âñå îïðåäåëåíèÿ ñëîâà “economy”. Â êàêîì
ñâî¸ì çíà÷åíèè äàííîå ñëîâî óïîòðåáëåíî â òåêñòå?
(1) Every year one of the 21 APEC Member Economies plays
host to APEC meetings and serves as the APEC Chair. The APEC
host economy is responsible for chairing the annual Economic
Leaders’ Meeting, selected Ministerial Meetings, Senior Officials
Meetings, the APEC Business Advisory Council and the APEC
Study Centers Consortium and also fills the Executive Director
position at the APEC Secretariat. (2) The Deputy Executive
Director position is filled by a senior diplomat from the economy,
which will host in the next year.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 104
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè ïðåäëîæåíèå (1).
ü
Îñóùåñòâèòå âñå âîçìîæíûå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè
ñ ïðåäëîæåíèåì (2).
(3) Funding
ü
Ñïðîãíîçèðóéòå äëÿ ñåáÿ ñîäåðæàíèå òåêñòà ïî åãî çàãîëîâêó.
ü
Êàêîâà ìîäàëüíîñòü ýòîãî òåêñòà? Êàêèìè ñðåäñòâàìè îíà âûðàæåíà?
APEC is not a donor organization. Instead, APEC activities are
centrally funded by small annual contributions from APEC Member
188
Economies — since 1999 these have totaled US$3.38 million each
year. These contributions are used to fund a small Secretariat in
Singapore and various projects, which support APEC’s economic
and trade goals. Since 1997 Japan has provided additional funds for
projects (between US$2.7 and 4.2 million annually, depending on
amount and exchange rates), which support APEC’s trade and
investment liberalization and facilitation goals. Projects generally —
• Relate to the priorities of APEC Economic Leaders and
APEC Ministers
• Cover the interest of at least several APEC Member
Economies
• Build capacity
• Improve economic efficiency, and
• Encourage the participation of the business sector, non gov
ernmental institutions and women.
APEC’s Project Database contains information about all APEC
projects.
APEC member economies also provide considerable resources
to assist in the operations of APEC. These include the secondment
of professional staff to the Secretariat; the hosting of meetings; and
partial (or full) funding of some projects.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 105
ü
Êàêèå ÿçûêîâûå êëèøå, õàðàêòåðíûå äëÿ òåêñòîâ ïîäîáíîãî
ñòèëÿ, ïðèñóòñòâóþò â äàííîì òåêñòå?
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì ïðåäëîæåíèÿì è ñî÷åòàíèÿì ñëîâ, ñîäåðæàùèì öèôðîâîé ìàòåðèàë.
These have totaled US$3.38 million each year;
Since 1997 Japan has provided additional funds for projects
(between US$2.7 and 4.2 million annually;
Since 1999 these have totaled.
189
(4) Scope of Work
ü
×òî ñòîèò çà çàãîëîâêîì äàííîãî òåêñòà?
ü
Êàêèå îöåíî÷íûå è/èëè ñòèëèñòè÷åñêè îêðàøåííûå ñðåäñòâà
õàðàêòåðèçóþò äàííûé òåêñò?
Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) works in three
broad areas to meet the Bogor Goals of free and open trade and
investment in the Asia Pacific by 2010 for developed economies and
2020 for developing economies.
Known as APEC’s ‘Three Pillars’, APEC focuses on three key
areas:
• Trade and Investment Liberalization
• Business Facilitation
• Economic and Technical Cooperation
The outcomes of these three areas enable APEC Member
Economies to strengthen their economies by pooling resources
within the region and achieving efficiencies. Tangible benefits are
also delivered to consumers in the APEC region through increased
training and employment opportunities, greater choices in the mar
ketplace, cheaper goods and services and improved access to inter
national markets.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 106
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå êîìïðåññèþ òåêñòà (4), èñïîëüçóÿ ëåêñè÷åñêèå è
ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ïðè¸ìû ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ òðàíñôîðìàöèé.
ü
Äàéòå âàøè äåôèíèöèè ñëîâàì Three Pillars è Tangible. Ýòè
ñëîâà ìîæíî îòíåñòè ê ýìîöèîíàëüíî ìàðêèðîâàííûì?
(5) Trade and Investment Liberalization
ü
190
Îïðåäåëèòå ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè â äàííîì òåêñòå.
Trade and Investment Liberalization reduce and eventually
eliminate tariff and non tariff barriers to trade and investment.
Protectionism is expensive because it raises prices for goods and services. Thus, Trade and Investment Liberation focuses on opening
markets to increase trade and investment among economies, result
ing in economic growth for APEC Member Economies and
increased standard of living for all.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 107
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè âûäåëåííîå â òåêñòå (5)
ïðåäëîæåíèå.
(6) Business Facilitation
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü ïóáëèêàöèè. Íà êàêîì îñíîâàíèè âû ýòî ñäåëàëè?
Business Facilitation focuses on reducing the costs of business
transactions, improving access to trade information and aligning policy and business strategies to facilitate growth, and free and open
trade. Essentially, Business Facilitation helps importers and
exporters in Asia Pacific meet and conduct business more efficient
ly, thus reducing costs of production and leading to increased trade,
cheaper goods and services and more employment opportunities due
to an expanded economy.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 108
ü
 òåêñòå (6) ïðèâåäèòå ïèñüìåííî ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âûäåëåííûì ñëîâàì è âûðàæåíèÿì. Êàêîé îáùèé êîìïîíåíò çíà÷åíèÿ (îáùèé çíàìåíàòåëü) îáúåäèíÿåò âñå ýòè ñëîâà?
(7) Economic and Technical Cooperation (ECOTECH)
ECOTECH is dedicated to providing training and cooperation
to build capacities in all APEC Member Economies to take advan
191
tage of global trade and the New Economy. This area builds capaci
ty at the institutional and personal level to assist APEC Member
Economies and its people gain the necessary skills to meet their
economic potential.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 109
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèé ýêâèâàëåíò àááðåâèàòóðå ECOTECH.
ASEAN: ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS
“Today, ASEAN is not only a well functioning, indispensable
reality in the region. It is a real force to be reckoned with far beyond
the region. It is also a trusted partner of the United Nations in the
field of development…”
Kofi Annan
Secretary-General of the United Nations
16 February 2000
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 110
ü
Âûïîëíèòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä öèòàòû Ãåíåðàëüíîãî Ñåêðåòàðÿ ÎÎÍ Êîôè Àííàíà. Ðàñïîëîæèòå ïåðåâîä è îðèãèíàë âûñêàçûâàíèÿ â äâå êîëîíêè. Îáúÿñíèòå, ïî÷åìó ðóññêèé ïåðåâîä áîëüøå ïî îáúåìó àíãëèéñêîãî îðèãèíàëà?
ESTABLISHMENT AND MEMBERSHIP
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå äåôèíèöèè ñëîâà Establishment. Â êàêîì
çíà÷åíèè ýòî ñëîâî óïîòðåáëåíî â äàííîì òåêñòå?
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíî-ñòèëåâóþ ïðèíàäëåæíîñòü ïóáëèêàöèè.
(1) The Association of Southeast Asian Nations or ASEAN
(см. рис. 14, стр. 249) was established on 8 August 1967 in Bangkok
192
by the five original Member Countries, namely, Indonesia,
Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, and Thailand. Brunei Darus
salam joined on 8 January 1984, Vietnam on 28 July 1995, Laos and
Myanmar on 23 July 1997, and Cambodia on 30 April 1999. The
ASEAN region has a population of about 500 million, a total area of
4.5 million square kilometers, a combined gross domestic product of
US$737 billion, and a total trade of US$ 720 billion.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 111
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè ïðåäëîæåíèå (1) òåêñòà
“Establishment and membership”.
ü
Ïðîèçíåñèòå áûñòðî âñëåä çà ïðåïîäàâàòåëåì èëè ñâîèì ïàðòíåðîì â ïàðå íèæåñëåäóþùèå âûðàæåíèÿ, ñîäåðæàùèå öèôðîâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ.
ü
Ðàçìåñòèòå ýòè æå âûðàæåíèÿ ñ öèôðàìè â êîëîíêó è ïðîäåëàéòå òó æå ðàáîòó.  êàêîì ñëó÷àå âàì áûëî ëåã÷å ïðîèçíîñèòü öèôðû?
On 8 August 1967; on 8 January 1984; on 28 July 1995; on 23
July 1997; on 30 April 1999; a population of about 500 million; a
total area of 4.5 million square kilometers; a combined gross domes
tic product of US$737 billion, and a total trade of US$ 720 billion.
(a) Objectives
ü
Ïåðåâåäèòå ñëåäóþùèå òåêñòû (a), (b) è (c) ñ ëèñòà.
ü
Ê êàêèì ïåðåâîä÷åñêèì ñðåäñòâàì/ïðè¸ìàì ìîæíî îòíåñòè
íàëè÷èå â òåêñòå öèôð (i), (ii)?
The ASEAN Declaration states that the aims and purposes of
the Association are: (i) to accelerate the economic growth, social
progress and cultural development in the region through joint
endeavors in the spirit of equality and partnership in order to
strengthen the foundation for a prosperous and peaceful communi
193
ty of Southeast Asian nations, and (ii) to promote regional peace
and stability through abiding respect for justice and the rule of law in
the relationship among countries in the region and adherence to the
principles of the United Nations Charter.
In 1995, the ASEAN Heads of States and Government re
affirmed that “Cooperative peace and shared prosperity shall be the
fundamental goals of ASEAN.”
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 112
ü
Ñ ïîìîùüþ êàêîãî îäíîãî ïðåäëîæåíèÿ òåêñòà (à) ìîæíî ïåðåäàòü îñíîâíîå ñîäåðæàíèå ýòîãî òåêñòà?
(b) Fundamental principles
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äàííîãî äîêóìåíòà?
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñòðóêòóðû è/èëè ñëîâà ïîäòâåðæäàþò
âàøå ìíåíèå?
The Treaty of Amity and Cooperation (TAC) in Southeast Asia,
signed at the First ASEAN Summit on 24 February 1976, declared
that in their relations with one another, the High Contracting Parties
should be guided by the following fundamental principles:
• Mutual respect for the independence, sovereignty, equality,
territorial integrity, and national identity of all nations;
• The right of every State to lead its national existence free
from external interference, subversion or coercion;
• Non interference in the internal affairs of one another;
• Settlement of differences or disputes by peaceful manner;
• Renunciation of the threat or use of force; and
• Effective cooperation among themselves.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 113
ü
194
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè òåêñò (b) (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
(c) Political cooperation
ü
Íàéäèòå ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó â äàííîì òåêñòå (öèôðû, èìåíà
ñîáñòâåííûå, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ, àááðåâèàòóðû è ò.ä.).
ü
 ïðîòèâîâåñ ïðåöèçèîííîé ëåêñèêå íàçîâèòå òàêæå èíôîðìàöèîííî çíà÷èìóþ ëåêñèêó, ò.å. òàêóþ, êîòîðàÿ íåñåò îñíîâíóþ
èíôîðìàöèþ î ïðåäìåòå.
The TAC stated that ASEAN political and security dialogue and
cooperation should aim to promote regional peace and stability by
enhancing regional resilience. Regional resilience shall be achieved
by cooperating in all fields based on the principles of self-confidence,
self-reliance, mutual respect, cooperation, and solidarity, which shall
constitute the foundation for a strong and viable community of nations
in Southeast Asia.
Some of the major political accords of ASEAN are as follows:
• ASEAN Declaration, Bangkok, 8 August 1967;
• Zone of Peace, Freedom and Neutrality Declaration, Kuala
Lumpur, 27 November 1971;
• Declaration of ASEAN Concord, Bali, 24 February 1976;
• Treaty of Amity and Cooperation in Southeast Asia, Bali, 24
February 1976;
• ASEAN Declaration on the South China Sea, Manila, 22
July 1992;
• Treaty on the Southeast Asia Nuclear Weapon-Free Zone,
Bangkok, 15 December 1997; and
• ASEAN Vision 2020, Kuala Lumpur, 15 December 1997.
• Declaration of ASEAN Concord II, Bali, 7 October 2003
The ASEAN Security Community is envisaged to bring ASEAN’s
political and security cooperation to a higher plane to ensure that
countries in the region live at peace with one another and with the
world at large in a just, democratic and harmonious environment.
In 1992, the ASEAN Heads of State and Government declared
that ASEAN should intensify its external dialogues in political and
195
security matters as a means of building cooperative ties with states in the
Asia Pacific region. Two years later, the ASEAN Regional Forum or
ARF was established. The ARF aims to promote confidence building,
preventive diplomacy and conflict resolution in the region. The pres
ent participants in the ARF include: Australia, Brunei Darussalam,
Cambodia, Canada, China, European Union, India, Indonesia,
Japan, Republic of Korea, Laos, Malaysia, Myanmar, Mongolia, New
Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Philippines, the Russian Federation,
Singapore, Thailand, the United States, and Vietnam.
Through political dialogue and confidence building, no tension
has escalated into armed confrontation among ASEAN members
since its establishment more than three decades ago.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 114
ü
Êàêèå, ïî-âàøåìó, èç íèæåïðèâåäåííûõ ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé
ìîæíî îòíåñòè ê ïîëèòè÷åñêîìó ëåêñèêîíó? Ïî÷åìó?
ü
Âûïèøèòå ýòè ñëîâà è íàéäèòå èõ ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû.
The TAC; ARF; regional resilience; to promote; to envisage; to
achieve; to ensure; by cooperating in; principles of self confidence,
self reliance, mutual respect, cooperation, and solidarity; to consti
tute; a strong and viable community of nations in Southeast Asia;
major political accords; through confidence building; no tension
escalated into armed confrontation; Declaration of ASEAN
Concord; Treaty of Amity and Cooperation; Treaty on the
Southeast Asia Nuclear Weapon Free Zone; as a means of building
cooperative ties with; ASEAN Regional Forum.
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà ïðè ïåðåâîäå äàííîãî òåêñòà
îáåñïå÷èâàþò åãî êîìïðåññèþ?
ü
Íàçîâèòå ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè òåêñòà.
ECONOMIC AND FUNCTIONAL COOPERATION
ü
196
×òî ñòîèò, ïî âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, çà òåìîé äàííîãî òåêñòà,
“Economic and functional cooperation”? ×òî ïðåäïîëàãàåò ñëîâî «ôóíêöèîíàëüíîå» ñîòðóäíè÷åñòâî?
ü
Âûïèøèòå êàæäîå ïåðâîå ïðåäëîæåíèå â àáçàöå, ÷òîáû ïîëó÷èòü êðàòêîå ñîäåðæàíèå âñåãî òåêñòà.
When ASEAN was established, trade among the Member
Countries was insignificant. Estimates between 1967 and the early
1970s showed that the share of intra-ASEAN trade from the total
trade of the Member Countries was between 12 and 15 percent. Thus,
some of the earliest economic cooperation schemes of ASEAN were
aimed at addressing this situation. One of these was the Preferential
Trading Arrangement of 1977, which accorded tariff preferences for
trade among ASEAN economies. Ten years later, an Enhanced PTA
Program was adopted at the Third ASEAN Summit in Manila further
increasing intra-ASEAN trade.
The Framework Agreement on Enhancing Economic
Cooperation was adopted at the Fourth ASEAN Summit in
Singapore in 1992, which included the launching of a scheme toward
an ASEAN Free Trade Area or AFTA. The strategic objective of
AFTA is to increase the ASEAN region’s competitive advantage as
a single production unit. The elimination of tariff and non tariff
barriers among the member countries is expected to promote
greater economic efficiency, productivity, and competitiveness. The
Fifth ASEAN Summit held in Bangkok in 1995 adopted the Agenda
for Greater Economic Integration, which included the acceleration
of the timetable for the realization of AFTA from the original 15year timeframe to 10 years.
In 1997, the ASEAN leaders adopted the ASEAN Vision 2020,
which called for ASEAN Partnership in Dynamic Development
aimed at forging closer economic integration within the region. The
vision statement also resolved to create a stable, prosperous and
highly competitive ASEAN Economic Region, in which there is a
free flow of goods, services, investments, capital, and equitable
economic development and reduced poverty and socio economic
disparities. The Hanoi Plan of Action, adopted in 1998, serves as
the first in a series of plans of action leading up to the realization of
the ASEAN vision.
In addition to trade and investment liberalization, regional eco
nomic integration is being pursued through the development of
197
Trans ASEAN transportation network consisting of major interstate highway and railway networks, principal ports and sea lanes for
maritime traffic, inland waterway transport, and major civil aviation
links. ASEAN is promoting the interoperability and interconnectivity
of the national telecommunications equipment and services. Building
of Trans-ASEAN energy networks, which consist of the ASEAN
Power Grid and the Trans-ASEAN Gas Pipeline Projects are also
being developed.
ASEAN cooperation has resulted in greater regional integra
tion. Within three years from the launching of AFTA, exports among
ASEAN countries grew from US$43.26 billion in 1993 to almost
US$80 billion in 1996, an average yearly growth rate of 28.3 percent.
In the process, the share of intra-regional trade from ASEAN’s total
trade rose from 20 percent to almost 25 percent. Tourists from
ASEAN countries themselves have been representing an increasingly
important share of tourism in the region. In 1996, of the 28.6 million
tourist arrivals in ASEAN, 11.2 million or almost 40 percent, came
from within ASEAN itself.
Today, ASEAN economic cooperation covers the following
areas: trade, investment, industry, services, finance, agriculture,
forestry, energy, transportation and communication, intellectual
property, small and medium enterprises, and tourism.
Desiring to build a community of caring societies, the ASEAN
leaders resolved in 1995 to elevate functional cooperation to a high
er plane to bring shared prosperity to all its members. The
Framework for Elevating Functional Cooperation to a Higher Plane
was adopted in 1996 with a theme: “Shared prosperity through
human development, technological competitiveness, and social
cohesiveness.” Functional cooperation is guided by the following
plans:
• ASEAN Plan of Action on Social Development;
• ASEAN Plan of Action on Culture and Information;
• ASEAN Plan of Action on Science and Technology;
• ASEAN Strategic Plan of Action on the Environment;
• ASEAN Plan of Action on Drug Abuse Control; and
• ASEAN Plan of Action in Combating Transnational Crime
198
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 115
ü
Ñãðóïïèðóéòå ïî îòðàñëÿì íèæåïðèâåäåííûå âûäåëåííûå â
òåêñòå (ñòð. 196–198) ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ. Íàéäèòå èì ðóññêèå
ýêâèâàëåíòû:
insignificant trade;
to be aimed at addressing the situation;
to accord tariff preferences for trade;
to further increase intra ASEAN trade;
the Preferential Trading Arrangement (PTA);
an Enhanced PTA Program was adopted at the Third ASEAN
Summit in Manila;
further increasing intra ASEAN trade;
an ASEAN Free Trade Area or AFTA;
competitive advantage;
the elimination of tariff and non tariff barriers among the mem
ber countries;
Agenda for Greater Economic Integration;
free flow of goods, services, investments, capital, and equitable
economic development;
reduced poverty and socio economic disparities;
Major inter state highway and railway networks;
principal ports and sea lanes for maritime traffic;
inland waterway transport;
major civil aviation links;
the interoperability and interconnectivity of the national
telecommunications equipment and services;
Trans ASEAN energy networks;
the ASEAN Power Grid;
the Trans ASEAN Gas Pipeline Project.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 116
ü
Ïðîèçíåñèòå ïî÷òè ñèíõðîííî âñëåä çà ïðåïîäàâàòåëåì ñëîâà
è âûðàæåíèÿ, ñîäåðæàùèå öèôðîâóþ èíôîðìàöèþ.
ü
Ïîäáåðèòå àíãëèéñêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ïåðåäà÷è ýòèõ æå âûðàæåíèé.
199
Exports grew from US$43.26 billion in 1993 to almost US$80
billion in 1996;
An average yearly growth rate of 28.3 percent;
The share of intra regional trade rose from 20 percent to almost
25 percent;
In 1996, of the 28.6 million tourist arrivals in ASEAN, 11.2 mil
lion or almost 40 percent came from within ASEAN itself.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 117
ü
Çàïèøèòå ïðèâåäåííîå íèæå ïðåäëîæåíèå â äèàãîíàëüíîé çàïèñè.
ü
Ïðîèçâåäèòå âñå âîçìîæíûå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè ñ äàííûì ïðåäëîæåíèåì.
Estimates between 1967 and the early 1970s showed that the
share of intra ASEAN trade from the total trade of the Member
Countries was between 12 and 15 percent.
EXTERNAL RELATIONS
ü
×òî ñòîèò çà çàãîëîâêîì äàííîãî òåêñòà?
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà «Âíåøíèå îòíîøåíèÿ».
ü
Êàêèå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñðåäñòâà îáåñïå÷èâàþò êîìïðåññèþ òåñòà ëèáî åãî ìíîãîñëîâèå?
The ASEAN Vision 2020 affirmed an outward-looking ASEAN
playing a pivotal role in the international community and advancing
ASEAN’s common interests.
ASEAN has made major strides in building cooperative ties with
states in the Asia Pacific region and shall continue to accord them a
high priority. Cooperation with other East Asian countries has
accelerated with the holding of an annual dialogue among the lead
200
ers of ASEAN, China, Japan, and the Republic of Korea. In 1997,
a joint statement between ASEAN and each of them was signed pro
viding for framework for cooperation towards the 21st century. (1) In
November 1999, the leaders of ASEAN, China, Japan and the
Republic of Korea issued a Joint Statement on East Asia
Cooperation outlining the areas of cooperation among them.
The ASEAN Summit of 1992 mandated that “ASEAN, as part
of an increasingly interdependent world, should intensify coopera
tive relationships with its Dialogue Partners.” Consultations
between ASEAN and its Dialogue Partners are held at the Foreign
Ministers’ level on an annual basis. (2) ASEAN’s Dialogue Partners
include Australia, Canada, China, the European Union, India,
Japan, the Republic of Korea, New Zealand, the Russian
Federation, the United States of America, and the United Nations
Development Program. ASEAN also promotes cooperation with
Pakistan on certain sectors.
Consistent with its resolve to enhance cooperation with other
developing regions, ASEAN maintains contact with other inter
governmental organizations, namely, the Economic Cooperation
Organization, the Gulf Cooperation Council, the Rio Group, the
South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation, and the South
Pacific Forum.
Most ASEAN Member Countries also participate actively in the
activities of the Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC), the
Asia Europe Meeting (ASEM), the East Asia Latin America Forum
(EALAF).
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 118
ü
Çàïèøèòå â äèàãîíàëüíîé ïåðåâîä÷åñêîé çàïèñè ïðåäëîæåíèÿ
(1) è (2).
ü
 ïðåäëîæåíèÿõ ñ âûäåëåííûìè æèðíûì øðèôòîì ñëîâàìè
èëè âûðàæåíèÿìè îñóùåñòâèòå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå òðàíñôîðìàöèè òàêèì îáðàçîì, ÷òîáû âûäåëåííûå
ñëîâà è/èëè âûðàæåíèÿ áûëè çàìåíåíû ñèíîíèìè÷åñêèìè.
201
Íàïðèìåð, ñëîâî “mandated” çàìåíÿåòñÿ “stipulated”, ïðè
ýòîì ñàìè ïðåäëîæåíèÿ äîëæíû áûòü êîìïðåññèðîâàíû (ñì.
Ïðèëîæåíèÿ).
STRUCTURES AND MECHANISMS
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïðåäâàðèòåëüíûé ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé àíàëèç ïðèâåäåííîãî íèæå òåêñòà.
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíî-ñòèëåâóþ ïðèíàäëåæíîñòü äàííîãî äîêóìåíòà.
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå åäèíèöû ïåðåâîäà, êîòîðûå ïåðåäàþò ïðåöèçèîííóþ ëåêñèêó (àááðåâèàòóðû, öèôðû, èìåíà ñîáñòâåííûå, ãåîãðàôè÷åñêèå íàçâàíèÿ).
The highest decision making organ of ASEAN is the Meeting
of the ASEAN Heads of State and Government. The ASEAN
Summit is convened every year. The ASEAN Ministerial Meeting
(Foreign Ministers) is held on an annual basis. Ministerial meetings
on several other sectors are also held: agriculture and forestry, eco
nomics, energy, environment, finance, information, investment,
labour, law, regional haze, rural development and poverty allevia
tion, science and technology, social welfare, transnational crime,
transportation, tourism, youth, the AIA Council and, the AFTA
Council. Supporting these ministerial bodies are 29 committees of
senior officials and 122 technical working groups.
To support the conduct of ASEAN’s external relations, ASEAN
has established committees composed of heads of diplomatic mis
sions in the following capitals: Brussels, London, Paris, Washington
D.C., Tokyo, Canberra, Ottawa, Wellington, Geneva, Seoul, New
Delhi, New York, Beijing, Moscow, and Islamabad.
The Secretary General of ASEAN is appointed on merit and
accorded ministerial status. The Secretary General of ASEAN, who
has a five year term, is mandated to initiate, advise, coordinate, and
implement ASEAN activities. The members of the professional staff
of the ASEAN Secretariat are appointed on the principle of open
recruitment and region wide competition.
202
ASEAN has several specialized bodies and arrangements pro
moting inter governmental cooperation in various fields: ASEAN
University Network, ASEAN EC Management Center, ASEAN
Center for Energy, ASEAN Agricultural Development Planning
Center, ASEAN Earthquake Information Center, ASEAN Poultry
Research and Training Center, ASEAN Regional Center for
Biodiversity Conservation, ASEAN Rural Youth Development
Center, ASEAN Specialized Meteorological Center, ASEAN
Tourism Information Center, and ASEAN Timber Technology
Center.
In addition, ASEAN promotes cooperative activities with
organizations with related aims and purposes: ASEAN Chambers of
Commerce and Industry, ASEAN Business Forum, ASEAN
Tourism Association, ASEAN Council on Petroleum, ASEAN Ports
Association, ASEAN Vegetable Oils Club, and the ASEAN
Institutes for Strategic and International Studies. Furthermore,
there are 53 Non Governmental Organizations (NGOs), which
have formal affiliations with ASEAN.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 119
ü
Êàêèå ïðèåìû ïåðåâîä÷åñêèõ òðàíñôîðìàöèé âû ìîæåòå èñïîëüçîâàòü, ÷òîáû êîìïðåññèðîâàòü òåêñò?
ü
Íàéäèòå è âûïèøèòå èç òåêñòà ñðåäñòâà ñâÿçíîñòè («ñêðåïû»,
êàê èõ èíîãäà íàçûâàþò), ïîìîãàþùèå âàì äîáèòüñÿ êîãåçèè?
ü
Èçó÷èòå àááðåâèàòóðû òåêñòà, ñãðóïïèðóéòå èõ ïî îáëàñòÿì
è/èëè îòðàñëÿì è ïðèâåäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû.
ASEAN VISION 2020
ü
Äàéòå õàðàêòåðèñòèêó äàííîìó ïîëèòè÷åñêîìó äîêóìåíòó.
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå äåôèíèöèè ñëîâà “Vision” è îáîñíóéòå, ïî÷åìó âû èñïîëüçóåòå èìåííî äàííîå çíà÷åíèå â ýòîì òåêñòå.
203
ü
Êàêóþ ðîëü èãðàåò ìíîãîêðàòíîå ïîâòîðåíèå ëè÷íîãî ìåñòîèìåíèÿ “We” â òåêñòå?
We, the Heads of State/Government of the Association of
Southeast Asian Nations, gather today in Kuala Lumpur to reaffirm
our commitment to the aims and purposes of the Association as set
forth in the Bangkok Declaration of 8 August 1967, in particular to
promote regional cooperation in Southeast Asia in the spirit of
equality and partnership and thereby contribute towards peace,
progress and prosperity in the region.
We in ASEAN have created a community of Southeast Asian
nations at peace with one another and at peace with the world, rap
idly achieving prosperity for our peoples and steadily improving
their lives. Our rich diversity has provided the strength and inspira
tion to us to help one another foster a strong sense of community.
We are now a market of around 500 million people with a com
bined gross domestic product of US$600 billion. We have achieved
considerable results in the economic field, such as high economic
growth, stability and significant poverty alleviation over the past few
years. Members have enjoyed substantial trade and investment flows
from significant liberalization measures.
We resolve to build upon these achievements.
Now, as we approach the 21st century, thirty years after the birth
of ASEAN, we gather to chart a vision for ASEAN on the basis of
today’s realities and prospects in the decades leading to the Year 2020.
That vision is of ASEAN as a concert of Southeast Asian
nations, outward looking, living in peace, stability and prosperity,
bonded together in partnership in dynamic development and in a
community of caring societies.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 120
ü
ü
204
Íàéäèòå â äàííîì òåêñòå îöåíî÷íóþ è ñòèëèñòè÷åñêè îêðàøåííóþ ëåêñèêó.
Ñäåëàéòå òàáëèöó è ðàçìåñòèòå â å¸ êîëîíêàõ ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ ñ ðàçëè÷íîé ýìîöèîíàëüíîé íàãðóçêîé, íàïðèìåð:
Ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ
ñ ïîëîæèòåëüíîé îöåíêîé
prosperity
bonded together
caring societies
Ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ
ñ îòðèöàòåëüíîé îöåíêîé
N/A (non-applicable)
A CONCERT OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS
ü
Íàéäèòå â ñëîâàðå è âûïèøèòå âñå âîçìîæíûå îïðåäåëåíèÿ
ñëîâà “Concert”.
ü
 êàêîì çíà÷åíèè äàííîå ñëîâî óïîòðåáëåíî â íàøåì êîíòåêñòå?
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äàííîãî äîêóìåíòà.
ü
×òî ïðèäàåò òåêñòó ìíîãîêðàòíûé ïîâòîð ëè÷íîãî ìåñòîèìåíèÿ âî ìíîæåñòâåííîì ÷èñëå We? Ïî-âàøåìó ìíåíèþ, ýòî
ìíîãîñëîâèå èëè ïåðåâîä÷åñêèé ïðè¸ì?
ü
Îçàãëàâüòå êàæäûé àáçàö òåêñòà, ÷òîáû ýòè çàãîëîâêè ïîìîãëè âàì ïåðåäàòü îñíîâíîå ñîäåðæàíèå òåêñòà.
We envision the ASEAN region to be, in 2020, in full reality, a
Zone of Peace, Freedom and Neutrality, as envisaged in the Kuala
Lumpur Declaration of 1971.
ASEAN shall have, by the year 2020, established a peaceful and
stable Southeast Asia where each nation is at peace with itself and
where the causes for conflict have been eliminated, through abiding
respect for justice and the rule of law and through the strengthening
of national and regional resilience.
We envision a Southeast Asia where territorial and other dis
putes are resolved by peaceful means.
We envision the Treaty of Amity and Cooperation in Southeast
Asia functioning fully as a binding code of conduct for our governments
and peoples, to which other states with interests in the region adhere.
We envision a Southeast Asia free from nuclear weapons, with
all the Nuclear Weapon States committed to the purposes of the
Southeast Asia Nuclear Weapons Free Zone Treaty through their
205
adherence to its Protocol. We also envision our region free from all
other weapons of mass destruction.
We envision our rich human and natural resources contributing
to our development and shared prosperity.
We envision the ASEAN Regional Forum as an established
means for confidence building and preventive diplomacy and for
promoting conflict resolution.
(1) We envision a Southeast Asia where our mountains, rivers
and seas no longer divide us but link us together in friendship, coop
eration and commerce.
We see ASEAN as an effective force for peace, justice and mod
eration in the Asia Pacific and in the world.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 121
ü
Êàêèå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå êëèøå õàðàêòåðèçóþò ýòîò
òåêñò?
ü
Ïðèñóòñòâóþò ëè â äàííîì òåêñòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñòðóêòóðû â
ñòðàäàòåëüíîì çàëîãå? Åñëè èõ íåò, ïî÷åìó?
ü
Êàêèå ñâÿçóþùèå ñðåäñòâà â òåêñòå âû íàøëè?
ü
Çàïèøèòå ïðåäëîæåíèå (1) â äèàãîíàëüíîé ñêîðîïèñíîé çàïèñè, êîìïðåññèðóÿ åãî ïðè ýòîì.
A Partnership in Dynamic Development
206
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äàííîãî äîêóìåíòà.
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå Ïðåàìáóëó è Îñíîâíóþ ÷àñòü ïîäîáíîãî äîêóìåíòà.
ü
×òî ïðèäàþò òåêñòó ìíîãîêðàòíî èñïîëüçîâàííûå ìåñòîèìåíèÿ “We”?
ü
Ïðîãíîçèðóÿ ïðèñóòñòâèå ñëîâ è âûðàæåíèé ñ ýìîöèîíàëüíîé
îöåíêîé, îïðåäåëèòå, êàêèõ ñëîâ çäåñü áîëüøå: ñ îòðèöàòåëüíîé èëè ñ ïîëîæèòåëüíîé îöåíêîé? Ïî÷åìó?
ü
Ïðèñóòñòâóþò ëè â äàííîì òåêñòå ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå ñòðóêòóðû â
ñòðàäàòåëüíîì çàëîãå? Åñëè íåò, ïî÷åìó?
We resolve to chart a new direction towards the year 2020 called,
ASEAN 2020: Partnership in Dynamic Development which will
forge closer economic integration within ASEAN.
We reiterate our resolve to enhance ASEAN economic cooper
ation through economic development strategies, which are in line
with the aspiration of our respective peoples, which put emphasis on
sustainable and equitable growth, and enhance national as well as
regional resilience.
We pledge to sustain ASEAN’s high economic performance by
building upon the foundation of our existing cooperation efforts,
consolidating our achievements, expanding our collective efforts
and enhancing mutual assistance.
We commit ourselves to moving towards closer cohesion and
economic integration, narrowing the gap in the level of development
among Member Countries, ensuring that the multilateral trading
system remains fair and open, and achieving global competitiveness.
We will create a stable, prosperous and highly competitive
ASEAN Economic Region in which there is a free flow of goods,
services and investments, a freer flow of capital, equitable econom
ic development and reduced poverty and socio economic dispari
ties.
We resolve, inter-alia, to undertake the following:
• maintain regional macroeconomic and financial stability by
promoting closer consultations in macroeconomic and
financial policies.
• advance economic integration and cooperation by undertak
ing the following general strategies: fully implement the
ASEAN Free Trade Area and accelerate liberalization of
trade in services, realise the ASEAN Investment Area by 2010
and free flow of investments by 2020; intensify and expand
sub regional cooperation in existing and new sub regional
growth areas; further consolidate and expand extra ASEAN
regional linkages for mutual benefit cooperate to strengthen
207
the multilateral trading system, and reinforce the role of the
business sector as the engine of growth.
• promote a modern and competitive small and medium enter
prises (SME) sector in ASEAN which will contribute to the
industrial development and efficiency of the region.
• accelerate the free flow of professional and other services in
the region.
• promote financial sector liberalization and closer cooperation
in money and capital market, tax, insurance and customs
matters as well as closer consultations in macroeconomic and
financial policies.
• accelerate the development of science and technology
including information technology by establishing a region
al information technology network and centers of excel
lence for dissemination of and easy access to data and
information.
• establish interconnecting arrangements in the field of energy
and utilities for electricity, natural gas and water within
ASEAN through the ASEAN Power Grid and a Trans
ASEAN Gas Pipeline and Water Pipeline, and promote
cooperation in energy efficiency and conservation, as well as
the development of new and renewable energy resources.
• enhance food security and international competitiveness of
food, agricultural and forest products, to make ASEAN a
leading producer of these products, and promote the forestry
sector as a model in forest management, conservation and
sustainable development.
• meet the ever increasing demand for improved infrastructure
and communications by developing an integrated and har
monized trans ASEAN transportation network and harnessing technology advances in telecommunication and informa
tion technology, especially in linking the planned informa
tion highways/multimedia corridors in ASEAN, promoting
open sky policy, developing multi modal transport, facilitat
ing goods in transit and integrating telecommunications net
works through greater interconnectivity, coordination of fre
208
quencies and mutual recognition of equipment type approval
procedures.
• enhance human resource development in all sectors of the
economy through quality education, upgrading of skills and
capabilities and training.
• work towards a world class standards and conformance system
that will provide a harmonized system to facilitate the free
flow of ASEAN trade while meeting health, safety and envi
ronmental needs.
• use the ASEAN Foundation as one of the instruments to
address issues of unequal economic development, poverty
and socioeconomic disparities.
• promote an ASEAN customs partnership for world class stan
dards and excellence in efficiency, professionalism and serv
ice, and uniformity through harmonized procedures, to pro
mote trade and investment and to protect the health and
well being of the ASEAN community,
• enhance intra ASEAN trade and investment in the mineral
sector and to contribute towards a technologically competent
ASEAN through closer networking and sharing of informa
tion on mineral and geosciences as well as to enhance coop
eration and partnership with dialogue partners to facilitate
the development and transfer of technology in the mineral
sector, particularly in the downstream research and the geo
sciences and to develop appropriate mechanism for these.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 122
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû âñåì âûðàæåíèÿì, èñïîëüçîâàííûì â ïðåàìáóëå äàííîãî ïîëèòè÷åñêîãî ïðîãðàììíîãî äîêóìåíòà. Ýòè âûðàæåíèÿ ïðåäñòàâëÿþò ñîáîé êëèøå:
we resolve —
we pledge —
we reiterate —
we commit ourselves —
we will create etc. —
209
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèé ýêâèâàëåíò ëàòèíñêîìó âûðàæåíèþ interalia. Êàêèå åùå ëàòèíñêèå âûðàæåíèÿ âû çíàåòå?
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå ïðèâåäåííóþ íèæå ìåòàôîðó (ñì. Ïðèëîæåíèÿ). Êàêîé îáðàç âû ñìîãëè ïðèäàòü åé ïðè ïåðåâîäå? — to
harness technology advances.
ü
Íàéäèòå îáùóþ ñåìó (çíà÷åíèå) âñåõ ïðèâåäåííûõ ñëîâ. Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ýòèì ñëîâàì.
ü
Âñå àáçàöû àíàëèçèðóåìîãî òåêñòà ñîñòîÿò èç îäíîãî ïðåäëîæåíèÿ. Êàêèå åùå ëåêñèêî-ãðàììàòè÷åñêèå îñîáåííîñòè âû
çàìåòèëè â òåêñòå?
A COMMUNITY OF CARING SOCIETIES
ü
Ýêñòðàïîëèðóéòå çàãîëîâîê äàííîãî òåêñòà.
ü
Îïðåäåëèòå ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü äîêóìåíòà.
We envision the entire Southeast Asia to be, by 2020, an
ASEAN community conscious of its ties of history, aware of its cul
tural heritage and bound by a common regional identity.
We see vibrant and open ASEAN societies consistent with their
respective national identities, where all people enjoy equitable access
to opportunities for total human development regardless of gender,
race, religion, language, or social and cultural background.
We envision a socially cohesive and caring ASEAN where
hunger, malnutrition, deprivation and poverty are no longer basic
problems, where strong families as the basic units of society tend to
their members particularly the children, youth, women and elderly;
and where the civil society is empowered and gives special attention
to the disadvantaged, disabled and marginalized and where social justice and the rule of law reign.
We see well before 2020 a Southeast Asia free of illicit drugs, free
of their production, processing, trafficking and use.
We envision a technologically competitive ASEAN competent
in strategic and enabling technologies, with an adequate pool of
210
technologically qualified and trained manpower, and strong networks
of scientific and technological institutions and centers of excellence.
We envision a clean and green ASEAN with fully established
mechanisms for sustainable development to ensure the protection of
the region’s environment, the sustainability of its natural resources,
and the high quality of life of its peoples.
We envision the evolution in Southeast Asia of agreed rules of
behavior and cooperative measures to deal with problems that can
be met only on a regional scale, including environmental pollution
and degradation, drug trafficking, trafficking in women and children,
and other transnational crimes.
We envision our nations being governed with the consent and
greater participation of the people with its focus on the welfare and
dignity of the human person and the good of the community.
We resolve to develop and strengthen ASEAN’s institutions and
mechanisms to enable ASEAN to realize the vision and respond to
the challenges of the coming century. We also see the need for a
strengthened ASEAN Secretariat with an enhanced role to support
the realization of our vision.
УПРАЖНЕНИЕ 123
ü
Âûïèøèòå âûäåëåííûå æèðíûì øðèôòîì ñëîâà è âûðàæåíèÿ
â òåêñòå â äâå êîëîíêè, ðàçãðàíè÷èâàÿ èõ ïî ñòèëèñòè÷åñêîé
îêðàøåííîñòè (ïîëîæèòåëüíûå, îòðèöàòåëüíûå).
ü
Íàéäèòå ðóññêèå ýêâèâàëåíòû ñãðóïïèðîâàííûì ëåêñè÷åñêèì
åäèíèöàì.
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïèñüìåííûé ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, îáðàùàÿ âíèìàíèå íà
òðàíñôîðìàöèîííûå ñðåäñòâà ïåðåâîäà.
AN OUTWARD-LOOKING ASEAN
ü
Ñäåëàéòå ïåðåâîä òåêñòà, èñïîëüçóÿ ïåðåâîä÷åñêóþ ñêîðîïèñü, çàòåì ñäåëàéòå îáðàòíûé ïåðåâîä, ïîëüçóÿñü ñâîèìè
çíà÷êàìè.
211
We see an outward looking ASEAN playing a pivotal role in the
international forums, and advancing ASEAN’s common interests.
We envision ASEAN having an intensified relationship with its
Dialogue Partners and other regional organizations based on equal
partnership and mutual respect.
Conclusion
We pledge to our peoples our determination and commitment
to bringing this ASEAN Vision for the Year 2020 into reality.
Kuala Lumpur
15 December 1997
Тексты
для самостоятельного анализа и перевода
ÇÀÄÀÍÈÅ Ê ÒÅÊÑÒÀÌ UNESCO (ÞÍÅÑÊÎ)
ÍÀ ÐÓÑÑÊÎÌ È ÀÍÃËÈÉÑÊÎÌ ßÇÛÊÀÕ:
ü
Ïðîàíàëèçèðóéòå òåêñò íà àíãëèéñêîì ÿçûêå (îðèãèíàëüíûé
òåêñò) è îôèöèàëüíî âûïîëíåííûé ïåðåâîä ýòîãî òåêñòà íà
ðóññêèé ÿçûê Ñåêðåòàðèàòîì ÎÎÍ è îòâåòüòå íà âîïðîñ:
Êàêèå ïåðåâîä÷åñêèå ïðèåìû áûëè èñïîëüçîâàíû ïðè ïåðåâîäå òåêñòà ñ àíãëèéñêîãî ÿçûêà íà ðóññêèé?
×ÒÎ ÒÀÊÎÅ ÞÍÅÑÊÎ?
ЮНЕСКО должна одновременно
решать множество проблем, стараясь
создать из них такую картину, на кото
рой единство людей неотделимо от их
многообразия. Необходимо обеспечить
сотрудничество мировоззрений, не
212
имеющих ни исторической общности, ни даже общности по
вседневных проблем. Необходимо постараться ознакомить тех
и других с различными формами мышления, открыв доступ к
их культурным, религиозным или философским основам, из
бегая признания одних в ущерб другим...
Государствам членам предстоит теперь двигаться вперед
по бесчисленным дорогам, открытым в областях компетенции
ЮНЕСКО, к гуманизму, который господствовал бы во всем
человечестве, к этике, которая, в конце концов, была бы при
емлема каждому народу, каждому человеку, что упрочило бы
узы планетарной солидарности. В предстоящие годы нам сов
местно, государствам членам и Секретариату, предстоит опре
делить пути, идя по которым ЮНЕСКО должна будет лучше
использовать свои возможности для удовлетворения новых
чаяний людей и народов. Нам предстоит сделать так, чтобы
Организация обеспечила обмены и коммуникацию, расширив
их до масштабов современного мира, существо которого так
многогранно. И, наконец, нам предстоит в нашей сфере, в
сфере духовной, объединить наши силы и волю в неустанном
поиске и стремлении к созданию человечества, ответственно
го за свою судьбу.
ÀÌÀÄÓ-ÌÀÕÒÀÐ Ì’ÁÎÓ
Ãåíåðàëüíûé äèðåêòîð ÞÍÅÑÊÎ
21-ÿ ñåññèÿ Ãåíåðàëüíîé êîíôåðåíöèè
Áåëãðàä, îêòÿáðü 1980 ãîäà
14 июля 1983 г. Фиджи подписали Устав ЮНЕСКО и ста
ли 160 м государством членом Организации Объединенных
Наций по вопросам образования, науки и культуры.
Только 20 государств подписали 4 ноября 1946 г. Устав Ор
ганизации, составленный годом ранее в Лондоне. Одна един
ственная страна Африки и три страны Азии входили в состав
этих государств учредителей.
В наше время после процесса деколонизации, начавшейся
в пятидесятые шестидесятые годы, развивающиеся страны
213
составляют большинство государств членов. В течение одного
лишь 1960 года 17 африканских стран, только что получивших
независимость, вступили в ЮНЕСКО. Таков путь, пройден
ный ЮНЕСКО со времени ее официального создания.
Как Организация Объединенных Наций и ряд других спе
циализированных учреждений, входящих в «семью ООН»,
ЮНЕСКО была создана в результате огромного стремления к
миру, порожденного одним из самых резких кризисов в исто
рии человечества: «Ужасная мировая война стала возможной
вследствие отказа от демократических принципов уважения
достоинства человеческой личности, равноправия и взаимно
го уважения людей...».
С этого времени ЮНЕСКО остается верной идеалу, кото
рый провозглашен в первой фразе ее Устава, сформулирован
ной во время открытия Учредительной конференции Органи
зации премьер министром Великобритании Клементом Эт
тли и американским поэтом Арчибальдом Мак Лишем,
членом Комиссии, разработавшей Устав: «Мысли о войне воз
никают в умах людей, поэтому в сознании людей следует уко
ренять идею защиты мира».
Таким образом, ЮНЕСКО ставит себе задачей «содейство
вать укреплению мира и безопасности путем расширения со
трудничества народов в области образования, науки и культуры
в интересах обеспечения всеобщего уважения справедливости,
законности и прав человека, а также основных свобод, провоз
глашенных в Уставе Организации Объединенных Наций, для
всех народов без различия расы, пола, языка или религии».
Невозможно подвести полный итог многолетней борьбы и
деятельности во имя идеалов Организации. Но несколько
примеров, взятых из истории ЮНЕСКО, позволят определить
широту сферы ее деятельности и реальность достигнутых ре
зультатов.
Образование: приоритет деятельности
Первостепенной целью создания ЮНЕСКО было образо
вание, — передаваемое буквой “Е” в сокращении ЮНЕСКО, —
214
признанное во Всеобщей декларации прав человека 1948 г. од
ним из основных его прав.
Первоначально речь шла о восстановлении школ, разру
шенных во время Второй мировой войны, и возобновлении
обменов между работниками образования, прерванных вой
ной. Затем подготовка учителей в странах третьего мира стала
важным этапом в деле создания систем образования, соответ
ствующих конкретным потребностям каждой страны, с тем
чтобы позволить государствам членам выработать, осущест
вить свою политику в области образования и определить ее ре
зультаты. Наконец, в наше время основные цели деятельности
ЮНЕСКО прослеживаются в трех областях, считающихся
важнейшими: âñåîáùíîñòü íà÷àëüíîãî îáðàçîâàíèÿ, ëèêâèäàöèÿ
íåãðàìîòíîñòè è äåìîêðàòèçàöèÿ îáðàçîâàíèÿ.
Так, из 40 миллионов детей школьного возраста, прожива
вших в пятидесятые годы в Латинской Америке, менее поло
вины получили начальное образование из за нехватки учите
лей — их требовалось на 500 000 человек больше, чем было, —
и из за нехватки школ — их число необходимо было удвоить.
Это положение, катастрофическое для будущего данного кон
тинента, обусловило появление Îñíîâíîãî ïðîåêòà ïî ðàñïðîñòðàíåíèþ è ñîâåðøåíñòâîâàíèþ íà÷àëüíîãî îáðàçîâàíèÿ, одоб
ренного Региональной конференцией по бесплатному и обя
зательному образованию (Лима, 1956 г.). В течение почти
десяти лет эксперты ЮНЕСКО участвовали в организации со
тен семинаров и курсов по подготовке кадров для повышения
уровня подготовки учителей и эффективности преподавания.
Было создано 2000 педагогических училищ; предоставление
стипендий позволило подготовить тысячи специалистов в об
ласти школьных учебников, статистики и педагогических ис
следований. В рамках этого проекта 87–95% населения в воз
расте от 7 до 14 лет получили начальное образование.
Несмотря на эти значительные результаты, еще не все
проблемы этого континента в области образования решены. В
1979 г. в Мехико ЮНЕСКО провела Конференцию министров
просвещения и министров, ответственных за экономическое
215
планирование, в 1981 г. в Кито — межправительственное сове
щание с целью определения основных направлений и видов íîâîãî Îñíîâíîãî ïðîåêòà. Он направлен на постепенное увеличе
ние бюджетных расходов на образование, которые должны воз
расти с 3,9% от общего бюджета в 1977 г. до 8% к концу
осуществления Основного проекта. Эти дополнительные сред
ства будут в первую очередь предоставлены жителям сельских
районов и жителям бедных предместий больших городов, мало
охваченных сетью школ. Связь между планированием образова
ния и планированием экономического и социального развития
станет более тесной, с тем чтобы школа лучше готовила к сфере
труда. И, наконец, научно техническое обучение и его неизбеж
ное следствие — подготовка квалифицированных преподавате
лей — получат дальнейшее развитие. Проект предусматривает
также «ликвидацию неграмотности к концу века» в районе ми
ра, где 30% из 159 миллионов взрослых остаются неграмотными.
Через два года после принятия Организацией африканско
го единства «Лагосского плана», в котором определяются дей
ствия, направленные на развитие Африки, через двадцать лет
после первой Аддис Абебской конференции, которая вырабо
тала план развития образования в Африке, в 1982 г. в Хараре
(Зимбабве) состоялась пятая Конференция министров образо
вания и министров, ответственных за экономическое планиро
вание стран Африки. В результате критического анализа поли
тики в области образования министры приняли Äåêëàðàöèþ Õàðàðå, в которой заложены основы новой политики в области
образования на черном континенте. В Декларации, в частнос
ти, подчеркивается необходимость увеличить возможности на
учных исследований и исследований в области технологии, с
тем чтобы ускорить освоение всех еще не использованных ре
сурсов с целью осуществления самообеспечения.
Образование, приспособление к местным условиям
Итак, задачи ЮНЕСКО в области образования варьиру
ются â çàâèñèìîñòè îò îñîáåííîñòåé ðàçëè÷íûõ ñòðàí. В Евро
пе, например, Организация занимается в основном координа
216
цией деятельности в области образования. Созданный в 1972
году в Бухаресте Европейский центр высшего образования
осуществляет программы в области информации, документа
ции и обменов для университетов и высших учебных заведе
ний. Находящееся в Париже, в Штаб квартире Организации,
Бюро научного сотрудничества для Европы является связую
щим звеном между заинтересованными организациями и ока
зывает постоянную помощь Европейскому центру досуга и об
разования в Праге.
Наряду с этим в настоящее время ЮНЕСКО готовит меж
дународную государственную конференцию, которая должна
принять Ðåãèîíàëüíóþ êîíâåíöèþ î ïðèçíàíèè ó÷åáíûõ êóðñîâ è
äèïëîìîâ î âûñøåì îáðàçîâàíèè в государствах Азии и Тихого
океана. Подобные конвенции были уже приняты в большин
стве регионов, что является подготовительным этапом к при
нятию всемирной конвенции по этому вопросу. Эти конвен
ции направлены на увеличение мобильности работников выс
шего образования, а также на признание их учебных курсов и
дипломов; они способствуют предупреждению «утечки моз
гов», позволяя, например, дипломированному специалисту,
приехавшему из развивающейся страны, продолжать учебу в
промышленно развитой стране и быстрее вернуться на родину.
Наконец, особенно со времени последней Белградской Ге
неральной конференции (1980 г.), Организация стремится
претворить в жизнь, посредством конкретных мероприятий в
области образования, следующие основные принципы: уваже
ние прав человека и, в частности, право на образование, борь
бу против всех форм дискриминации, защита мира, установ
ление нового международного экономического порядка. Этот
вопрос будет основной темой крупной межправительственной
конференции, которая должна состояться в апреле 1983 г.
Точные и естественные науки на службе развития
Если бы не сила убеждения английского биолога сэра
Джулиана Хаксли, который стал первым Генеральным дирек
тором Организации, ЮНЕСКО называлась бы ЮНЕКО. Дей
217
ствительно, на первой конференции министров просвещения
союзных стран (Лондон 1942 г.) предусматривалось ограни
читься областями образования и культуры. Введенная не
сколько позже в поле деятельности Организации наука приоб
рела в ней право гражданства. С этого времени программы в
области науки были ориентированы на две основные цели:
ïðîãðåññ â îáëàñòè íàóêè è òåõíèêè äëÿ âñåõ íàðîäîâ è ñ èõ ïîìîùüþ; îâëàäåíèå íàóêîé è òåõíèêîé ñ öåëüþ ãàðìîíè÷åñêîãî ðàçâèòèÿ âñåõ îáùåñòâ.
Интеллектуальное сотрудничество между всеми народа
ми, развитию которого ЮНЕСКО стремится способствовать,
оказалось наиболее активным и многообещающим в области
точных и естественных наук.
В этой области международное сотрудничество получило
конкретное развитие и продолжает обогащаться. Программа
ЮНЕСКО по вопросам политики в области науки и техники
должна, прежде всего, способствовать овладению развиваю
щимися странами богатствами современной науки и техники.
В результате осуществления политики в области науки и тех
ники на службе эндогенного развития и нового международ
ного экономического порядка государства члены могли бы
найти конкретные решения своих проблем производства, за
нятости, повышения уровня жизни. Таким образом они посте
пенно освободились бы от технической зависимости, что пре
пятствует их развитию.
«Крупные программы»
Деятельность, касающаяся точных и естественных наук,
затрагивает прежде всего политику в области науки и техники,
научно технические исследования и подготовку специалис
тов, а также «крупные программы».
Среди êðóïíûõ ìåæäóíàðîäíûõ íàó÷íûõ ïðîãðàìì следует
назвать следующие: Человек и биосфера (МАЕ), Международ
ная гидрологическая программа (МГП), Международная про
грамма геологической корреляции (МПГК) и Межправитель
ственная океанографическая комиссия (МОК). Например, в
218
результате осуществления в Африке и в арабских государствах
проекта по прикладной биотехнике и прикладной микробио
логии во многих африканских странах была создана сеть уч
реждений и лабораторий. Этот проект укрепляет сотрудниче
ство в области ризобиологии и производства биологических
удобрений. Основной проект по прикладной геологии в целях
развития Африки предусматривает составление металлогени
ческой карты Африки, что будет способствовать проведению
работы, касающейся рудных месторождений.
Поиск и применение новых форм деятельности с целью
создания ýíäîãåííûõ èíôðàñòðóêòóð â îáëàñòÿõ íàóêè è òåõíèêè привели к разработке девяти основных региональных про
ектов. В них рассматриваются проблемы интеграции исследо
ваний в области технологии, подготовки технических кадров и
развития в государствах Юго Восточной Азии и Тихого океа
на. В этих проектах речь идет также о развитии биотехники и
микробиологии в Африке и арабских странах, прикладной
геологии в целях развития Африки, комплексном освоении
влажных тропических зон, комплексном освоении засушли
вых и полузасушливых зон, рациональном использовании
водных ресурсов в сельской местности (Латинская Америка,
арабские страны, Сахель), исследовании и подготовке кадров
с целью освоения прибрежных систем. Например, 975 научно
исследовательских проектов на местах, в которых участвует
более 10 000 специалистов из 79 стран, входили в середине
1981 г. в программу МАБ. Международная экспедиция в Ин
дийском океане (1959–1965 гг.), несомненно, явилась одной
из наиболее завершенных программ научного исследования
моря. Эксперты из 25 стран, 40 научно исследовательских су
дов, осуществивших 180 плаваний, приняли участие в этом
предприятии, которое êîîðäèíèðîâàëîñü Ìåæïðàâèòåëüñòâåííîé îêåàíîãðàôè÷åñêîé êîìèññèåé.
Действительно, значение морских наук будет возрастать,
если принимать во внимание, в частности, тот факт, что луч
шее управление ресурсами моря могло бы надежнее обеспе
чить продовольственные потребности значительной части че
219
ловечества. Поскольку одновременно с этим Конвенцию по
морскому праву должны ратифицировать все государства чле
ны, ЮНЕСКО стремится укрепить инфраструктуры, связан
ные с исследованиями и подготовкой специалистов в области
морских наук, с тем чтобы в рамках новой юридической регла
ментации государства члены ìîãëè áû ëó÷øå èñïîëüçîâàòü ìîðñêèå ðåñóðñû. Например, Организация впервые взяла на себя
обязательство построить океанографическое судно, передан
ное в конце 1982 г. Катарскому университету.
Однако научные программы ЮНЕСКО охватывают бес
численное количество других областей деятельности — от
прогнозирования землетрясений до развития инженерных на
ук, от развития информатики до исследования новых и вос
станавливаемых источников энергии, от гидрологии до наук о
земле. О результатах этих исследований рассказывается в сот
нях публикаций, появляющихся в периодических изданиях,
таких как Èìïàêò, Íàóêà è îáùåñòâî или Ïðèðîäà è ðåñóðñû.
Социальные науки — инструмент эндогенного развития
Другое издание — Ìåæäóíàðîäíûé æóðíàë ñîöèàëüíûõ íàóê —
отражает важное место, которое занимают эти науки.
По видимому, более чем в какой либо другой области, де
ятельность Сектора социальных наук направлена на то, чтобы
обеспечить подлинное развитие и, в частности, мобилизовать
все духовные ресурсы людей.
Прежде всего, следует отметить своеобразие ЮНЕСКО,
единственной организации в системе ООН, которая занимает
ся этими вопросами. Необходимо также подчеркнуть тот
смысл, который вкладывает ЮНЕСКО в понятие ðàçâèòèå,
рассматриваемое как результат действия сил, преимуществен
но внутренне присущих каждой стране и направленных преж
де всего на то, чтобы удовлетворить конкретные потребности
данной страны. Эта концепция «ýíäîãåííîãî» развития была
разработана и популяризирована Организацией.
В этой связи никакое развитие немыслимо без предвари
тельного, ïîäðîáíîãî îçíàêîìëåíèÿ ñ òîé ñðåäîé, в которой оно
220
осуществляется. Исходя из этого, Сектор социальных наук
стремится проводить исследования, касающиеся, например,
взаимоотношений человека с окружающей средой, миграций и
демографических проблем. В более широком плане Организа
ция стремится оценить и определить роль, которую могут сыг
рать образование, наука, культура и коммуникация в деле раз
вития. Овладение этими данными позволит, в свою очередь,
ðàçðàáîòàòü ïîëèòèêó â îáëàñòè ïëàíèðîâàíèÿ, необходимую
для того, чтобы направить в нужное русло имеющиеся ресурсы.
Именно поэтому работа Сектора направлена на подготовку
специалистов, способных применять на практике методы и
приемы планирования, и специалистов, способных улучшить и
лучше организовать пространство, в котором живут люди, на
пример, специалистов в области архитектуры и урбанизма.
Расцвет личности
И наоборот, Организация считает своей задачей изучение
воздействия на окружающую среду результатов политики и
программ в области развития. Она стремится внести свой
вклад в разработку соответствующих методов и подготовку
экспертов, необходимых для проведения подобных исследо
ваний.
Однако развитие не ограничивается экономическим рос
том: оно должно способствовать расцвету личности, и тем са
мым предполагает утверждение ряда общепризнанных прав
человека.
ЮНЕСКО особо настаивает на том, чтобы государства и
отдельные лица ïðèíèìàëè âî âíèìàíèå íîâûå ïðàâà ÷åëîâåêà,
такие как право на мир, право на развитие, право на образова
ние и на коммуникацию, право на здоровую окружающую
среду. Руководствуясь этими положениями, Сектор социаль
ных наук стремится очертить круг преград, которые не позво
ляют поставленным в неблагоприятные условия группам на
селения — например, жителям бидонвилей, национальным
меньшинствам или маргинальным группам, таким как имми
гранты или беженцы — осуществить свои права. Наряду с
221
этим, программа в области социальных наук должна способст
вовать осуществлению женщинами их экономических, соци
альных, политических и культурных прав во всей их полноте.
Именно с этих позиций ЮНЕСКО со времени своего со
здания âûñòóïàëà è áîðîëàñü ïðîòèâ ðàñîâûõ òåîðèé и их по
следствий. Документы, которые она публиковала по этому во
просу в пятидесятые годы, заставили Южно Африканскую
Республику выйти из организации. В 1981 г. 23 деятеля науки
рассмотрели расистские теории на симпозиуме, организован
ном ЮНЕСКО в Афинах. В своем заключительном заявлении
они решительно опровергли псевдонаучные аргументы, оп
равдывающие любую расовую дискриминацию. Однако сле
дует еще активнее мобилизовать общественное мнение на
конкретную борьбу против расизма и апартеида.
Осуществление важных мероприятий, связанных с изуче
нием социальной активности молодежи, ее деятельность в об
ласти образования и культуры, свидетельствует об интересе
ЮНЕСКО к проблемам места и роли молодежи в современ
ном обществе. Предметом беспокойства ЮНЕСКО является,
в частности, явление маргинализации большого числа моло
дых людей, вызванное безработицей и неполной занятостью, а
также растерянность молодежи перед лицом безудержной ур
банизации, возрастающей стандартизации и чрезмерной авто
матизации современного общества.
В настоящее время ЮНЕСКО ведет активную подготовку к
Международному году молодежи, который будет проводиться в
1985 году. В рамках этой работы круглый стол на тему «Моло
дежь в 80 е годы», состоявшийся в мае 1982 г. в Кортинештах, в
Румынии, одобрил путем консенсуса «Обращение», в котором
подчеркивается нестабильность условий жизни молодых людей
во многих странах, в то время как их численность и их роль, с
точки зрения социальной динамики, увеличиваются.
В этом плане неправительственные молодежные органи
зации, с которыми ЮНЕСКО поддерживает особенно тесные
и живые контакты, являются лучшими партнерами в деле под
готовки программ Организации.
222
Культурная самобытность и диалог между культурами
Оказать помощь в создании музеев в Каире и Асуане, от
метить годовщину Пикассо, Бела Бартока или Симона Боли
вара, сохранить устное народное творчество в Африке, при
нять участие в фестивале искусств стран Тихого океана, ока
зать содействие наряду с этим развитию славянских,
кельтских, арабских и исламских культур, охранять памятни
ки и исторические места, являющиеся общим наследием че
ловечества, — таковы среди тысяч других некоторые меропри
ятия, проведенные ЮНЕСКО в области культуры в разных
районах мира.
Все эти мероприятия определяются двумя взаимосвязан
ными темами: óìíîæèòü îáìåíû ìåæäó âñåìè êóëüòóðàìè с це
лью их взаимного обогащения и утвердить культурную само
бытность всех обществ, с тем чтобы отчетливее выявить их
своеобразие. Действительно, ЮНЕСКО полагает, что диалог
между обществами и одновременно расцвет каждого из них
является основой международного сотрудничества в области
культуры.
Ровно через двенадцать лет после Конференции в Вене
ции по организационным, административным и финансовым
вопросам политики в области культуры вторая Всемирная
конференция по политике в области культуры, состоявшаяся в
июле 1982 г. в Мехико, стала крупным событием. На ней было
отмечено развитие понимания в мире определяющей роли,
которую играет в нашу эпоху культура во всех областях, в том
числе и в тех, по отношению к которым до последнего време
ни она не считалась определяющей, как, например, развитие
всех народов.
Спасение õðàìîâ åãèïåòñêîé è ñóäàíñêîé Íóáèè в результа
те двадцатилетней кампании (март 1960 г. — март 1980 г.) явля
ется ярким свидетельством намерения ñîõðàíèòü êóëüòóðíîå
íàñëåäèå каждой страны благодаря помощи Международного
сообщества. Два выдающихся этапа этой кампании, первый из
которых вызвал такое мощное движение солидарности, оста
223
нутся в памяти у всех: демонтаж, перевозка и восстановление
храмов Абу Симбела и храмов священного острова Филе,
«жемчужины Египта». Весьма показательными в этом отно
шении являются цифры: расчлененные на 1036 блоков, веся
щих от 7 до 30 тонн каждый, храмы Абу Симбела были восста
новлены на горе, возвышающейся над их первоначальным ме
стонахождением, в соответствии с направлением, заданным
строителями более трех тысячетелетий назад так, чтобы два
раза в год лучи солнца проникали в самую глубину святилища.
Храмы Филе были разобраны на 40 000 блоков, перевезенных
и затем собранных на соседнем острове Агилькиа, территория
которого была увеличена приблизительно на 13 000 квадрат
ных метров и специально оборудована, чтобы походить на
территорию в Филе. Стоимость только этих двух операций со
ставила 72 миллиона долларов США, половина из которых
была выделена египетским правительством, а остальная часть
собрана благодаря движению солидарности, которое было на
чато и поддержано ЮНЕСКО.
Крупные международные кампании
Одновременно Нубия стала ñàìûì áîëüøèì çà âñþ èñòîðèþ
ìåñòîì àðõåîëîãè÷åñêèõ ðàñêîïîê. Международная кампания
должна способствовать созданию двух новых музеев в Египте:
музея Нубии в Асуане и национального музея памятников
Древнего Египта в Каире.
Подобные кампании позволят или позволили спасти, на
пример, Венецию или Боробудур, Мохенджодаро и Карфаген,
долину Катманду и Фес, а также различные исторические ме
ста на Гаити и на Мальте, в Мавритании и в Мачу Пикчу, кам
пании, значение которых определил г н Амаду Махтар М’Боу,
Генеральный директор ЮНЕСКО с 1974 г.: «Прежде всего, со
хранить для нас и для будущих поколений памятники, кото
рые свидетельствуют о созидательном гении человека, о его
борьбе и надеждах, а также о его стремлении к совершенству,
о его поисках абсолюта; затем сделать эти сокровища доступ
ными самой широкой публике».
224
В этой связи следует напомнить о том, что в настоящее
время 112 памятников культурного и природного наследия
всех районов мира входят в Ïåðå÷åíü âñåìèðíîãî íàñëåäèÿ и яв
ляются предметом особого внимания со стороны международ
ного сообщества.
Однако превратности истории, такие как продолжающая
ся íåçàêîííàÿ òîðãîâëÿ êóëüòóðíûìè öåííîñòÿìè, привели к
тому, что народы утратили предметы искусства, которые сви
детельствовали о богатстве их прошлого. Вот почему в 1978 г.
был учрежден Межправительственный комитет по оказанию
содействия возвращению культурных ценностей в страны их
происхождения или их реституции в случае незаконного
присвоения. Он уже добился значительных результатов в
этом деле.
Ìåæäóíàðîäíûé ôîíä ðàçâèòèÿ êóëüòóðû, созданный в
1974 г., уже одобрил 132 проекта общей стоимостью в 1 996 500
долларов, касающихся 50 государств членов ЮНЕСКО и
многих международных и региональных учреждений по
культурному сотрудничеству. Эти проекты, цели которых
весьма разнообразны, охватывают различные области — от
содействия развитию традиционных культур на острове Па
схи до перевода и издания на широко распространенных
языках произведений, представляющих около 60 культур.
На сегодняшний день было переведено около 650 наимено
ваний книг с 50 восточных языков, с 25 европейских язы
ков, с различных африканских языков и языков стран Океа
нии.
И, наконец, настоящая программа углубляет межкультур
ные исследования и изыскания, касающиеся отдельных куль
тур. Так, например, в 1981 г. вышли два первых тома Îáùåé èñòîðèè Àôðèêè. В 1985 г. благодаря сотрудничеству самых круп
ных современных африканистов будет завершена работа над
восемью намеченными к изданию томами этого труда. Наряду
с этим перерабатывается изданная в 1967–1969 гг. Èñòîðèÿ íàóêè è êóëüòóðû ÷åëîâå÷åñòâà.
225
За свободное и лучшим образом сбалансированное
распространение информации
Термины «информация» и «коммуникация» не представ
лены в сокращении ЮНЕСКО. Но ñîäåéñòâèå ñâîáîäíîìó ðàñïðîñòðàíåíèþ èäåé ñ ïîìîùüþ ñëîâà è èçîáðàæåíèÿ является од
ной из целей, записанных в Уставе Организации.
Эта цель прослеживается с 1950 г. — времени заключения
Ôëîðåíòèéñêîãî ñîãëàøåíèÿ, затем с 1976 г., когда был принят
Протокол к Соглашению о ввозе материалов просветительно
го, научного и культурного характера.
Однако возрастающую роль коммуникации во всех облас
тях жизни всех обществ и в деле развития разного рода обме
нов между народами всего мира особенно поняли в 70 е годы.
Ðåâîëþöèÿ â îáëàñòè êîììóíèêàöèè оказала большое воздейст
вие на практическую работу и теоретическую деятельность
Организации. Они развернулись в двух основных направлени
ях: исследования и практические действия.
Межправительственные конференции, организованные
во многих крупных географических зонах, в Коста Рике (1976 г.)
для стран Латинской Америки и Карибского бассейна, в Куа
ла Лумпуре (1978 г.) для стран Азии и Тихого океана, в Яунде
(1980 г.) для африканских государств, выявили усиление связи
между способами и системами коммуникации, с одной сторо
ны, и развитием, с другой стороны. На этих конференциях была
также отмечена âåëè÷èíà äèñïðîïîðöèé, существующих внутри
большинства стран и в международном масштабе, в деле произ
водства и распространения сообщений. Конференции высказа
лись в пользу ñâîáîäíîãî, áîëåå øèðîêîãî è ëó÷øèì îáðàçîì ñáàëàíñèðîâàííîãî ðàñïðîñòðàíåíèÿ èíôîðìàöèè. Таким образом, под
твердилась необходимость создания нового всемирного порядка
в области информации и коммуникации, с тем чтобы постепен
но ликвидировать эти значительные диспропорции и предоста
вить каждому индивидууму, каждому сообществу, каждому госу
дарству возможность высказаться, рассказать своими словами о
своих трудностях, надеждах и потребностях.
226
Созданная в 1978 г. Ìåæäóíàðîäíàÿ êîìèññèÿ ïî èçó÷åíèþ
ïðîáëåì êîììóíèêàöèè составила соответствующий официаль
ный документ и сделала аналогичные выводы. Работая под ру
ководством Шона Мак Брайда, лауреата Нобелевской премии
мира и Международной Ленинской премии, комиссия, состо
ящая из 16 членов, являющихся людьми самых различных
убеждений и представляющих самые разные районы мира,
обобщила свою работу в докладе, озаглавленном «Многоголо
сый, но единый мир — коммуникация и общество сегодня и
завтра». Он является одновременно первым результатом пред
принятых исследований и во всех вопросах, которые еще оста
ются не решенными, направлением для последующей работы.
Развивать возможности всех стран участвовать
в процессе коммуникации
Еще задолго до этого ЮНЕСКО начала проводить работу
с целью оказания ïîìîùè ñòðàíàì ñ íàèáîëåå íèçêèì ýêîíîìè÷åñêèì ïîòåíöèàëîì в деле развития их собственных возмож
ностей коммуникации. Именно поэтому, например, ныне дей
ствующая программа в течение десяти лет дает значительные
результаты, появление которых обусловлено тем комплексом
потребностей, которым она отвечает, и это несмотря на отно
сительную скудность ее ресурсов: речь идет о ñåëüñêîé ïå÷àòè
â Àôðèêå. Большинство газет было создано в качестве средства
закрепления грамотности, и сложность их содержания соот
ветствует уровню образования читателей. В наши дни к этим
первоначальным направлениям добавляются новые цели, так
как сельская печать стремится дать читателям практическую
информацию, чтобы помочь им улучшить методы ведения
сельского хозяйства, навыки личной гигиены, их общие усло
вия жизни; обеспечить их участие в развитии общины; спо
собствовать диалогу между органами власти и сельским насе
лением; поощрять привычку к чтению. В настоящее время су
ществует около шестидесяти ежемесячных изданий подобного
рода, выходящих в шестнадцати странах более чем на 20 афри
канских языках; их тираж варьируется от 100 до... 60 000 эк
227
земпляров! В такой стране, как Нигер, насчитывается около
пятнадцати таких газет, выходящих на 8 языках.
В более широком плане оперативная деятельность
ЮНЕСКО в области коммуникации приобрела новый размах
с появлением в 1980 г. Ìåæäóíàðîäíîé ïðîãðàììû ðàçâèòèÿ
êîììóíèêàöèè (ÌÏÐÊ). Имеющая целью «расширение со
трудничества и помощи в области развития инфраструктур
коммуникации», МПРК вступила в стадию выполнения.
Межправительственный совет МПРК на совещании в Ака
пулько (1980 г.) утвердил бюджет, позволяющий осуществить
12 региональных проектов, среди которых проект об укреп
лении Панафриканского информационного агентства и 2 меж
региональных проекта.
Стремление построить мир прогресса,
справедливости, мир без войн
Межправительственные конференции, региональные сове
щания или совещания экспертов, тысячи публикаций, исследо
вания и изыскания, программы международного масштаба или
микропроекты, опросы и подготовка специалистов — вот неко
торые из многочисленных форм повседневной работы, прово
димой ЮНЕСКО с целью приближения конкретных целей,
которые были поставлены перед ней ее учредителями.
В свете этой широкой программы поражает контраст между
грандиозностью целей и недостаточностью людских и финансо
вых ресурсов: около 3400 мужчин и женщин 122 национальнос
тей работают в Штаб квартире в Париже, в региональных бюро
или в рамках программ сотрудничества, осуществляемых во
всем мире. Обычный бюджет для осуществления этой про
граммы составляет лишь 625 млн долларов на период
1981–1983 гг., к этой сумме следует добавить фонды различно
го происхождения, поступающие, в частности, от других меж
дународных организаций.
Невозможно не упомянуть сотни тысяч внештатных сотруд
ников, которые поддерживают деятельность ЮНЕСКО во всех
странах: члены национальных комиссий по делам ЮНЕСКО
228
каждого государства члена, члены более 450 международных
неправительственных организаций, поддерживающих с Орга
низацией постоянные деловые отношения, преподаватели и
учащиеся сотен школ, сотрудничающих с ЮНЕСКО и работа
ющих по учебным программам, пронизанным духом мира и
уважения прав человека, члены более 2000 Клубов и Ассоциа
ций друзей ЮНЕСКО, которые отдают все свои силы борьбе
за идеалы Организации.
На заре третьего тысячелетия нашей эры, когда над нами
нависла угроза уничтожения всей планеты, когда миллионы
людей ежедневно ведут борьбу за то, чтобы выжить, следует
обратиться к мудрости людей, надеясь достичь в скором буду
щем цели ЮНЕСКО: «Найти смысл в том, чтобы жить вместе,
смысл, который бы постепенно преодолел наши эгоистичес
кие интересы и установил солидарность в масштабе всего ми
ра, который бы объединил наши различия вокруг разделяемых
ценностей...»
ÀÌÀÄÓ-ÌÀÕÒÀÐ Ì’ÁÎÓ
Ãåíåðàëüíûé äèðåêòîð ÞÍÅÑÊÎ
Âûñòóïëåíèå âî âðåìÿ âèçèòà â Øòàá-êâàðòèðó
Îðãàíèçàöèè ïàïû Èîàííà Ïàâëà II
BACKGROUNDER: UNESCO
‘UNESCO has to face essentially different challenges all at the
same time and must try to combine them all in a view of things in
which the unity of man is inseparable from his diversity. It has to
bring about co operation between people who have neither the same
historical background nor the same daily concerns. It has to try to
make all parties receptive to ways of thinking differing from their
own in respect of their cultural, religious or philosophical founda
tions, while ensuring that none becomes established to the detri
ment of the others...
229
‘...It is now for them to set out upon the many paths opening
before them in UNESCO’s spheres of competence, towards a
humanism commensurate with all mankind and towards an ethic
whereby each people, each individual, will at last be able to assume
full responsibility while at the same time weaving the fabric of fel
lowship throughout the world... During the years to come, we shall
have, together, the Member States and the Secretariat, to determine
by what means UNESCO should endeavor, to the best of its abili
ties, to meet the new expectations of people ‘and of nations. It will
be our responsibility to see that the Organization sets up exchanges
and communication, broadening both to match the scale of the
present day world, which is essentially a plural entity. Finally, it will
be our responsibility, on our own ground, which is that of the mind,
to combine our strength and our determination in the tireless quest
of mankind, so that humanity may be responsible for its own destiny,
conscious of the fellowship that unifies it, and inspired by concern
for peace.’
AMADOU-MAHTAR M’BOW,
Unesco Director-General,
21st Session of the General
Conference, Belgrade, October 1980
On October 26, 1983, St Christopher and Nevis signed the
UNESCO Constitution, thus becoming the 161st Member State of
the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization.
By November 4,1946, only twenty States had accepted the
Constitution drawn up a year earlier in London. The founding
States included only one country in Africa, and three from Asia.
Following the decolonization process begun in the 1950’s and
1960’s, the developing countries today form the majority of Member
States. In the year 1960 alone, seventeen African countries who had
just achieved independence entered UNESCO. Such is the distance
traveled since the official creation of UNESCO.
Like the United Nations itself, and others of the many special
ized agencies which compose what is known as the “United Nations
230
family”, UNESCO was born of an immense aspiration towards
peace arising from one of the most dramatic crises in man’s history:
‘the great arid terrible war... made possible by the denial of the dem
ocratic principles of dignity, equality and mutual respect of men...’
Since those early years, UNESCO has remained faithful to the
ideal proclaimed in the first clause of its Constitution, inspired by
British Prime Minister Clement Attlee at the opening conference
which created the organization, and by the American poet
Archibald MacLeish, a Member of the Committee which drew up
the Constitution: ‘Since wars begin in the minds of men, it is in the
minds of men that the defenses of peace must be constructed.’
By the same token, UNESCO has kept as objectives ‘to con
tribute to peace and security by promoting collaboration among the
nations through education, science and culture in order to further
universal respect for justice, for the rule of law and for the human
rights and fundamental freedoms which are affirmed for the peoples
of the world, without distinction of race, sex, language or religion...’
It is virtually impossible to draw up a complete record for 38
years of struggle and activity devoted to the realization of the
Organization’s ideals, but a few examples from the history of
UNESCO can throw light on the immensity of what has been
undertaken and the significance of the results obtained.
EDUCATION: ACTION A PRIORITY
The Organization’s first reason for existence was Education —
the ‘E’ of the UNESCO acronym— recognized in 1948 by the
Universal Declaration of Human Rights as one of the fundamental
human rights.
To begin with, the aim was to reconstruct the schools destroyed
by the Second World War and re establish teacher exchanges dis
rupted by the conflict. Training teachers in the Third World soon
became a top priority with the launching of educational systems
adapted to the particular needs of each country. In concrete terms,
this meant enabling Member States to devise and apply their own
231
educational policies and to assess the results of such policies. This
objective applies to three essential areas: the universalization of elementary education, the abolition of illiteracy and the democratization
of education.
In the Latin America of the 1950’s, for example, scarcely 19
million of the 40 million children of school age received any ele
mentary education, due to lack of teaching staff. Half a million
teachers had to be trained and the same number of schools to be
built. Responding to a situation, which threatened disaster for the
future of the continent, UNESCO called a regional conference on
free and compulsory education (Lima, 1956.) This gave birth to the
‘Major Project relative to the extension and improvement of primary
education.’ For almost ten years, experts recruited by UNESCO
took part in the organization of hundreds of seminars and training
courses designed to improve the caliber of educational staff and the
efficiency of teaching. Two thousand training colleges were opened
and a programmed of scholarships was created to help train several
thousand specialists in the preparation of schoolbooks, statistics and
pedagogic research. By the time this ‘Major Project’ came
To an end, between 87% and 95% of the population ranging
from seven to fourteen years of age was receiving an elementary edu
cation.
Despite these remarkable results, the educational problems of
the Latin American continent are far from being solved. That is why
UNESCO convened a conference in Mexico (1979) of ministers of
education and ministers responsible for economic planning, and an
intergovernmental meeting in Quito (1981) to define the strategies
and conditions of a new ‘Major Project.’ The objective of the Project
is the progressive growth of educational budgets, from 3.9% in 1977
to 7% or 8% of overall national budgets. These increased sums are
aimed first and foremost at aiding the populations of rural areas and
of city shantytowns, regions that so far have been largely neglected
by educational efforts. Attempts will also be made to establish a clos
er liaison between educational planning and that of economic and
social development, in order to gear education more toward the
needs of the labor market. Scientific and technical instruction and
232
its corollary, the training of qualified teachers, will also be extended
and improved. In a region where 30% of the 159 million adult pop
ulation does not know how to read or write, the Project also aims at
eliminating illiteracy between now and the end of the century.
Two years after the Organization of African Unity ratified the
‘Lagos Plan of Action1, which lays down the strategies for develop
ment in Africa, and twenty years after the first conference in Addis
Ababa, which set forth a development plan for education in Africa,
the fifth Conference of ministers of education and ministers respon
sible for planning in Africa met in 1982 at Harare (Zimbabwe.)
Based on a critical assessment of the effort made in education, the
ministers signed the ‘Declaration of Harare’, which lays the founda
tions for a new education policy on the African continent. In partic
ular, the Declaration emphasizes the need to increase the scope of
scientific and technological research. The aim of this is to accelerate
the exploitation of all the resources so far left untouched, with a view
to fostering self reliance.
An Education Adapted to Local Needs
In the field of education, UNESCO’s role may therefore be said
to take different forms according to the country concerned. In Europe,
for example, the Organization concentrates on the co ordination of
educational programmers. The ‘European Center for Higher
Education’, opened in Bucharest in 1972, runs programmers for
information, documentation, and academic exchanges between
universities and institutes of higher education. At its Paris headquar
ters, UNESCO has created a ‘Scientific Co operation Bureau for
Europe’, which links the various bodies concerned. It also provides
permanent assistance to the European Center for Leisure and Edu
cation, in Prague.
In addition to this, UNESCO is currently preparing the
International Conference of States with the aim of adopting the
Regional Convention on the recognition of studies, diplomas and
degrees in higher education in Asia and the Pacific. Similar conven
tions have already been ratified in most other regions and these form
a prelude to the adoption of a world convention in this field of acti
233
vity. Conventions of this kind are geared toward the increased
mobility of staff in higher education and the recognition of their
studies and diplomas. They also help prevent the exodus of trained
personnel by enabling, for example, a qualified person from a devel
oping country who has come to an industrialized country for the
advancement of his studies, to reintegrate more quickly once he
returns to his country of origin.
Particularly since the General Conference in Belgrade (1980),
the Organization has tried to translate into concrete educational
action the fostering of certain essential principles: respect for
Human Rights, especially the right to education; the struggle against
all forms of discrimination; the defense of peace; the institution of a
New International Economic Order. This formed the theme of a
major intergovernmental conference held in April, 1983.
The Natural Sciences and Their Application to Development
Without the persuasiveness of the British biologist, Sir Julian
Huxley, who became UNESCO’s first Director General, the
Organization could well have remained UNESCO.’ Indeed, the very
first Conference of Allied ministers of education (London, 1942)
proposed to limit themselves to education and culture. Science was
introduced a little later as a field that the new international organi
zation aimed to foster, and it quickly became integrated into the
Organization. From the start, science programmers were directed
towards two closely linked objectives: the development, by and for all
peoples, of science and technology; the application of science and technology to the harmonious development of all societies.
The international intellectual co operation UNESCO seeks to
promote has proved to be most active and promising in the scientif
ic field.
In all of these areas, international co operation has developed
in concrete terms and its scope has continued to grow. The
UNESCO programmed covering scientific and technological poli
cies is primarily aimed at fostering easier access for the developing
countries to the great fund of modern scientific and technological
knowledge. The practical application of a scientific and technologi
234
cal policy to endogenous development and the New International
Economic Order should enable Member States to find concrete
solutions to their serious problems of production, employment and
the improvement of living standards. Thus they will gradually be able
to emancipate themselves from the technological dependence that is
impeding their development.
The “Major Programmers”
Activities in the field of natural science manly affect scientific
and technological policies, training and research, and the “major
programmers”.
Among the major international scientific programs, mention
must be made of the following: Man and the Biosphere (MAB), the
International Hydrological Program (IMP), the International
Geological Correlation Program (IGCP) and the Intergovern
mental Oceanographic Commission (IOC). To cite an example, the
project carried out in Africa and the Arab States concerning applied
biotechnology and microbiology led to the creation of a network of
institutions and laboratories in several African countries. This has
strengthened co operation in the field of rhizobiology and the pro
duction of biological fertilizers. The major project on the applica
tion of geology to development in Africa includes the preparation of
a metallogenic map of Africa which will be of help in the work that
affects metallic deposits.
The research and application of new ways of creating endogenous infrastructures in the field of science and technology have led to
the launching of nine major regional projects. They deal with the
integration of technological research, technical training, and devel
opment in Southeast Asia and the Pacific. They are also geared
towards biotechnology and microbiology in Africa and the Arab
States, the application of geology to African development, the inte
grated organization of humid tropical zones, the rational use of
water resources in rural areas (Latin America, the Arab States, the
Sahel), and research and training for the organization of offshore
systems. For example, 975 field research projects, involving 10,000
researchers, were carried out within the MAB program in mid 1981.
235
The Indian Ocean Expedition (1959 1965) undoubtedly represents
one of the most successful programs in the scientific exploration of
the sea. Under the co-ordination of the Intergovernmental
Oceanographic Commission, twenty five countries took part in the
enterprise, and some forty ships carried out a total of 180 expedi
tions.
The importance of the marine sciences will indeed continue to
grow, particularly since better exploitation of the sea can help meet
the food needs of a large part of mankind. Because, at the same
time, the Convention on the Law of the Sea should be ratified by all
of the Member States, UNESCO is particularly keen to strengthen
infrastructures for research and training in the marine sciences, so
that within the new legal context that is to emerge, the Member
States will be better able to exploit their marine resources. By way of
example, the Organization has for the first time accepted to order an
Oceanographic ship, which was delivered to the University of Qatar
in late 1982.
UNESCO’s scientific programs include countless other fields
of action, ranging from earthquake forecasting to the development
of engineering sciences; from computer science to research for new
and renewable sources of energy; from hydrology to the earth sci
ences. Hundreds of specialist publications spread the results of these
studies through periodicals such as “Impact of Science on Society”
or “Nature and Resources.”
The Social Sciences: a Means of Endogenous Development
Another publication, the International Social Science Journal,
reflects the central place these sciences have in UNESCO’s activi
ties.
Perhaps more than in any other field, the programs of the Social
Sciences section are aimed at ensuring authentic development, and
in particular, to mobilizing all the spiritual resources of mankind.
First and foremost, the originality of UNESCO’s role is to be
noted, for it is the only organization within the United Nations sys
tem to deal with these questions. Another important point is the
meaning attached by UNESCO to the concept of extended devel
236
opment, resulting from the dynamics of essentially internal forces
within each country, in giving priority treatment to specific needs.
The concept of “endogenous” development was devised and popular
ized by the Organization.
In this context, no development program is conceivable without
first proceeding to an intimate knowledge of the setting in which the
development is to take place. The Social Sciences section is there
fore concerned with carrying out research bearing, for example, on
man’s relationship with his environment, on migration patterns, or
on demographic problems. In a wider context, the Organization
attempts to assess and define the role that education, science, cul
ture and communication can play in development.
A command of these facts in turn paves the way for the preparation of planning policies, which are indispensable to the channeling
and orientation of available energies. The Social Sciences section
also helps train specialists capable of implementing planning tech
niques and technologies, as well as supervisors able to improve and
better organize human settlements, for example in the field of archi
tecture and town planning.
Individual Fulfillment for All
Conversely, the Organization is concerned with studying the
effects of development policies and programs on the surrounding
environment. It is trying to help set in place the relevant instruments
and train the experts required to carry out studies of this kind.
Development is not, however, limited to economic growth: It
must contribute towards the fulfillment of the individual, and there
fore demands the affirmation of a whole range of universally
acknowledged rights.
UNESCO particularly stresses the obligation of states and indi
viduals to lake account of new human rights, such as the right to
peace, the right to development, the right to education and commu
nication, and the right to a healthy environment. The “Social
Science section also aims at identifying the obstacles to” the exer
cise of human rights by the disadvantaged —those living in shanty
towns, for example, and minority or marginal groups such as immi
237
grants and refugees. The Social Science program is also concerned
with encouraging women to exercise their full economic, social,
political and cultural rights.
Also in the field of human rights, UNESCO has denounced
racism and racist theories from its earliest days. Its publications in
this field in the 1950’s led South Africa to leave the Organization. In
1981, twenty three scientists reviewed racist theories at a UNESCO
meeting in Athens. Their concluding statement demolished once
and for all the so called scientific justifications for racial discrimi
nation in any shape or form. Public opinion must, however, be more
strongly mobilized to take concrete steps in the struggle against
racism and apartheid.
The substantial programs affecting the role of youth in educa
tional, social and cultural activities are an indication of the interest
UNESCO takes in the place and part played by youth in contempo
rary society. In particular, UNESCO is preoccupied by the margin
alization of a large number of young people, resulting from unem
ployment or underemployment, as well as their confusion or
helplessness in the face of unbridled urbanization, and the growing
uniformity and inordinate automatization of many contemporary
societies.
UNESCO is already preparing the International Youth Year,
which will take place in 1985. The Roundtable Conference on
“Youth in the 1980” (Cortinesti, Romania, May 1982) adopted by
consensus a “Message” which stressed the unstable conditions in
which young people live in many countries, and noted that in both
numerical and socio dynamic terms, their numbers continue to
increase.
In this context, UNESCO maintains close and active links with
non governmental youth organizations. These constitute highly
valuable partners in the preparation of the Organization’s programs.
Cultural Identity and Exchanges between Cultures
Assistance in the creation of the Cairo and Aswan Museums,
the commemoration of the birth of Picasso, Bela Bartok and Simon
Bolivar, the preservation of the oral tradition in Africa, participation
238
in the Festival of Pacific Arts, the fostering, among others, of the
Slavic, Celtic, Arabic and Islamic cultures, the preservation of
monuments and sites belonging to the common heritage of
mankind — these are just some of the thousands of cultural pro
grams implemented by UNESCO throughout the world.
Two interdependent themes form the focal point of these pro
grams: the increase of exchanges between the world’s cultures, aimed
at mutual enrichment, and the affirmation of cultural identify in all
societies, directed toward the preservation of their originality.
UNESCO indeed regards the dialogue between societies and the
development of each respective society as the foundation for inter
national cultural co operation.
On this subject, the Second World Conference on Cultural
Policies (Mexico, July 1982), which took place just twelve years after
the Venice Conference on the institutional, administrative and
financial aspects of cultural policies, was an event of major impor
tance. It emphasized the growing awareness in the world of the
determinant role that culture now plays in every field —including
those which, until now, have not been regarded as linked to culture,
for example, the development of the peoples of the world.
The preservation of the temples of Egyptian and Sudanese Nubia
after a campaign of twenty years (March 1960 to March 1980) is a
marvelous illustration of this desire to protect the cultural heritage of
each country with the help of the international community. Two
spectacular stages in this vast campaign —the first in this domain to
have started so great a movement of solidarity— remain in every
one’s memory: the dismantling, removal and reconstruction of the
twin temples of Abu Simbel and the complex of buildings on the
sacred island of Philae, the ‘Pearl of Egypt’. Here again, statistics
are eloquent: The temples of Abu Simbel were carved into 1,036
blocks weighing between seven and 30 tons each. They were recon
structed on the cliffs dominating their original site according to the
orientation chosen by the builders 3,000 years ago, so that twice a
year, the sun’s rays penetrate into the heart of the sanctuaries. The
temples of Philae were also dismantled into 40,000 blocks, and
moved and reconstructed on the neighboring island of Agilkia, itself
239
increased in size by some 13,000 square meters and altered to look
like Philae. The cost of these two operations alone reached
$72,000,000; the Egyptian government covered half of it, and the
rest donated by other countries, thanks to the international solidar
ity inspired and maintained by UNESCO.
Other Major International Campaigns
In similar fashion, Nubia became the greatest archeological site
of all time. An international campaign is aimed at creating two new
museums in Egypt: the Museum of Nubia at Aswan, and the
National Museum of Egyptian Civilization in Cairo.
Similar campaigns have or will ensure the preservation of sites
such as Venice and Borobudur, Moenjodaro and Carthage; the
Katmandu Valley; Fez; Haiti and Malta; Machu Pichu and
Mauritania. Mr Amadou Mahtar M’Bow, Director General of
UNESCO since 1974, stressed the significance of these programs in
the following terms: “First to preserve for the present and the future
the monuments which bear witness to the creative genius of man, to
his struggles and hopes, but also to his desire to surpass himself and
his quest for the absolute; and secondly, to make these treasures
accessible to the widest possible public.”
It is important not to overlook the fact that 165 natural and cul
tural sites currently figure on the World Heritage List and therefore
receive particular attention from the international community.
The vagaries of history and the persistent illicit traffic of cultural
property have caused peoples to be deprived of art objects that bear
witness to the cultural wealth of their past. That is why the
“Intergovernmental Committee for Promoting the Return of
Cultural Property to its Countries of Origin or its Restitution in case
of Illicit Appropriation” was set up in 1978. The Committee has
already obtained significant results in this field.
The International Fund for the Promotion of Culture, which was
set up in 1974, has already approved 176 projects representing a total
cost of $2,553.000 and affecting 69 UNESCO Member States as
well as several regional and international institutions for cultural co
operation. The aim of these projects is extremely varied, ranging
240
from the fostering of traditional cultures in the Easter Island to the
translation and publication of literature from 60 cultures into the
world’s most widely spoken languages. So far, some 800 titles have
been published, translated from roughly 50 Oriental languages, 25
European languages and various African and Oceanic languages.
The present program is also furthering intercultural studies and
research into specific cultures. For example, the first two volumes of
a General History of Africa appeared in 1981. The planned series of
eight volumes should be completed by 1985 with the collaboration
of the most eminent African specialists of our time. Likewise, the
Scientific and Cultural History of Mankind, which was published
between 1967 and 1969, is currently being revised.
Towards a Free and More Balanced Circulation
of Information
Although the terms “information” and “communication” do
not appear in the UNESCO acronym, “to promote the free flow of
ideas by word and image” is a constitutional obligation for the
Organization.
This objective is reflected in the Florence Agreement (1950)
and its Protocol (1976), which seeks to ease the importation of
objects of educational, scientific or cultural interest.
In the 1970s, UNESCO became increasingly aware of the ever
larger part played by communications in the life of societies and in
the exchanges —of whatever kind— between the peoples of the
world as a whole. The communications revolution therefore had pro
found repercussions on the Organization’s thoughts and actions.
They affected two basic areas: research and operational programs.
Intergovernmental conferences organized in several major geo
graphical regions —Costa Rica (1976) for the Latin American coun
tries and the Caribbean; Kuala Lumpur (1978) for the Asian and
Pacific countries; Yaounde (1980) for the African States— have
pointed up the very close correlation between modes and systems of
communications, on one hand, and development on the other. They
have also shown up the profound imbalance that exists within most
countries and on the international scene in the production and dis
241
tribution of messages. They have called for a free circulation and a
wider, better balanced dissemination of information. They have shown
how urgent it is to set up a new world information and com
munication order so as gradually to reduce these grave imbalances
and to give each individual, each community and each nation the
possibility of making its voice heard, speaking for itself about its dif
ficulties, hopes and needs.
The International Commission for the Study of Communication
Problems, set up in 1978, issued a report which arrived at much the
same conclusions. With Sean MacBride, winner of the Nobel and
Lenin Peace Prizes, as chairman, the Commission was made up of six
teen members from different geographic and intellectual backgrounds.
Its findings were published in the report entitled “Many Voices, One
World — Communication and Society of Today and Tomorrow”. The
report is both the first result of the research undertaken, and, through
the many questions it raises, the vehicle for further studies.
Developing Communications Facilities for All
Long before this, however, UNESCO had already begun to help
the least provided countries to equip themselves with their own communications facilities. Thus, for example, a highly active program spread
over the last ten years has achieved notable success due to the range
of needs it satisfies, in spite of its fairly modest resources. The pro
gram concerns the rural press in Africa. Most newspapers were
launched to serve the newly literate, and the complexity of their
contents was adjusted to meet the educational level of their readers.
New objectives now complement these early aims; the rural press is
seeking to give its readers practical information to help them
improve farming techniques, hygiene and their general standard of
living; to ensure that they play their part in the development of the
community; to serve as an instrument of dialogue between the
administration and the rural populations; and to encourage the habit
of reading. There are currently over 60 monthlies of this kind, pub
lished in 16 countries in more than 20 African languages. Editions
range from 100 to 60,000 copies. A country such as Niger has 15
such newspapers, appearing in eight different languages.
242
In a wider context, UNESCO’s operational activities in the
communications field have received a new impetus with the launch
ing in 1980 of the International Program for the Development of
Communication (IPDC). Aimed at helping “to increase co opera
tion and assistance for the development of communication infra
structures”, the IPDC has now entered its operational stage. A
meeting of the Intergovernmental Council of the Program
(Acapulco, 1982) approved a budget for the implementation of 12
regional projects — among them the enhancement of the Pan
African News Agency — and two interregional projects.
THE DETERMINATION TO BUILD A WORLD OF PROGRESS,
JUSTICE AND PEACE
Intergovernmental conferences, small committees or meetings
of specialists, publications printed by the thousand, research and
studies, programs of international scope or microprojects, surveys
and training schemes — these are a few of the many means that
UNESCO uses daily in the pursuit of the aims laid down by the
Organization’s founders.
In view of the magnitude of the program, the discrepancy
between the ambitious aims and limited human and financial means
is striking: some 3,400 men and women of 131 nationalities work at
the Paris headquarters of the Organization, in regional bureau or in
co operation programs throughout the world. The regular budget for
the implementation of the Program does not amount to more than
$374,410,000 for the period spanning 1984–1985. To these are
added funds from various sources, in particular, amounts con
tributed by other international organizations.
It is impossible not to mention the hundreds of thousands of
volunteers who help UNESCO all over the world: members of
National Commissions for UNESCO in each Member State, mem
bers of more than 480 international non governmental organiza
tions in constant touch with UNESCO, teachers and pupils in hun
dreds of schools associated with UNESCO, who carry out programs
243
of education for peace and the respect for human rights, members of
more than 2,000 Clubs or Associations friendly to UNESCO, who
devote their best efforts to the propagation of the UNESCO ideal.
“On the threshold of the third millennium, as the threat looms
of the total destruction of the planet, and as millions of people wage
a daily struggle for survival, one can have confidence in men’s wis
dom, and hope that one day in the not too distant future, the objec
tive of UNESCO will be attained: to find a “reason for living togeth
er” which will gradually transcend our selfishness and establish sol
idarity on a world wide scale, reconciling all our differences around
shared values...”
AMADOU-MAHTAR M’BOW,
Unesco Director-General,
during the visit
of Pope John Paul II
to UNESCO Headquarters
ÏÐÈËÎÆÅÍÈß
Èëëþñòðàòèâíûé ìàòåðèàë
Ðèñ. 1. Флаг Таиланда
Ðèñ. 2. Карта Таиланда
245
Ðèñ. 3. Флаг Мьянма
Ðèñ. 4. Карта Мьянма
246
Ðèñ. 5. Карта Малайзии
Ðèñ. 6. Карта Малайзии
247
Ðèñ. 7. Карта Индонезии
Ðèñ. 8. Карта Индонезии
248
Ðèñ. 9. Карта АТР
Ðèñ. 10. Эмблема ООН
Ðèñ. 12.
UNESCAP
Комиссия
ООН для АТР
Ðèñ. 11. Фасад штаб
квартиры ООН
в Нью Йорке
Ðèñ. 13. Эмблема АРЕС,
Ðèñ. 14. Эмблема АСЕАН, одного
одного из подразделений ООН
из подразделений ООН
249
I. ÎÑÍÎÂÍÛÅ ÄÅÔÈÍÈÖÈÈ ÏÅÐÅÂÎÄ×ÅÑÊÈÕ
ÒÐÀÍÑÔÎÐÌÀÖÈÉ
Как уже говорилось в предисловии, данное пособие адре
совано студентам неязыковых вузов, которые специализиру
ются в области политических наук, международных отноше
ний и регионоведения. Для них не так важно умение прово
дить теоретические исследования в области переводческих
комментариев или выявлять тонкие различия между отдель
ными видами трансформаций, как способность применять на
практике переводческие трансформации и приемы. Именно
поэтому автор пособия решила предложить своим читателям
очень краткие определения пояснения переводческих транс
формаций в приложении.
Итак, переводческие трансформации — это преобразования
текста, с помощью которых переводчик (как письменный, так и
устный) осуществляет переход от единиц текста оригинала к
коммуникативно равноценным им единицам текста перевода.
Переводческие трансформации необходимы, когда невозможно
использовать регулярные соответствия для определенных еди
ниц оригинала в конкретном тексте перевода (Фирсов, 2003: 8).
Когда мы говорим о переводческих трансформациях, под
этим, как правило, следует понимать решения переводчика,
направленные на преодоление текстовых несоответствий
между двумя языками, на которых написаны тексты оригина
ла и перевода. Решения переводчика по преодолению трудно
стей понимания и/или перевода направлены на то, как:
выявить конструкции, обороты, слова и выражения в тек
сте оригинала, которые обусловили несоответствие по отно
шению к тексту перевода;
выбрать определенный способ(ы) преобразования текста,
применяя переводческие приёмы, которые обеспечат адекват
ный перевод единиц текста оригинала на переводной язык.
Переводческие трансформации подразделяются на грам
матические (èëè ëåêñèêî-ñèíòàêñè÷åñêèå), лексические (èëè
250
ëåêñèêî-ñåìàíòè÷åñêèå) и стилистические (ìåòàôîðà, ìåòîíèìèÿ, ïîâòîðû, ýïèòåòû è ò.ä.) ïðè¸ìû в зависимости от ха
рактера единиц языка оригинала и функционального стиля
речи. Отсюда можно сделать вывод, что переводческая транс
формация является более широким понятием, чем переводче
ский приём, который выступает лишь компонентом преобра
зований при переводе.
ÃÐÀÌÌÀÒÈ÷ÅÑÊÈÅ ÏÐȸÌÛ
• Членение предложений — это преобразование структуры
предложения текста оригинала в процессе его перевода в
два или более предложений (или структур) в языке перево
да, например: My uncle was a tall man. He had a long nose. Over
his right eye he had a deep scar. Нет сомнений в том, что язык
оригинала, который дал нам в процессе перевода три рас
члененных предложения выглядел следующим образом:
Ìîé äÿäÿ, âûñîêèé ìóæ÷èíà ñ äëèííûì íîñîì, îòëè÷àëñÿ çàìåòíûì øðàìîì íàä ïðàâîé áðîâüþ.
• Объединение предложений — это способ перевода, проти
воположный вышеизложенному, при котором синтакси
ческая структура оригинала преобразуется путем соедине
ния двух (и более) простых предложений в одно сложное
(сложносочинённое или сложноподчинённое), например:
Deep blue grass carpeted the whole lawn. Можно предполо
жить, что данный перевод объединил в одном сложном
предложении три простых, как то: Òðàâà ëåæàëà ïîä íîãàìè ïîäîáíî êîâðó. Îíà ïîêðûâàëà âñþ ëóæàéêó. È öâåò ýòîé
òðàâû óäèâëÿë âçîð, èáî îí áûë òåìíî-ãîëóáîãî öâåòà.
• Грамматические замены (замена членов предложения, ча
стей речи, формы слова; числа существительного, накло
нения глагола, типа предложения и т.д.) — это такие пре
образования, при которых грамматические единицы в
тексте оригинала меняются на единицы иного граммати
ческого значения в тексте перевода.
251
Следует подчеркнуть, что переводческий приём грамма
тических замен наиболее часто употребляется при переводе.
Например, давайте рассмотрим перевод с русского на анг
лийский язык несложного предложения: Çà â÷åðàøíèé äåíü
âûñòàâêó ïîñåòèëî áîëåå 5000 ÷åëîâåê. Применяя все вышеука
занные грамматические приемы, мы смогли получить 5 вари
антов перевода:
(1) Over 5,000 people yesterday visited the Exhibition.
(2) Yesterday the Exhibition was visited by over 5,000 people.
(3) Yesterday’s visitors to the Exhibition numbered over 5,000.
(4) There were over 5,000 visitors at the Exhibition yesterday.
(5) There were over 5,000 visitors who attended the Exhibition yesterday.
ËÅÊÑÈ÷ÅÑÊÈÅ ÏÐȸÌÛ
• Транскрибирование — переводчик пофонемно воссоздает
исходную лексическую единицу с помощью фонем пере
водящего языка. Иными словами, звуковая оболочка сло
ва из языка оригинала передается через буквы языка пере
вода, например, английское имя собственное Crighton или
Auel по канонам транскрибирования будут переведены на
русский как Êðàéòîí и Îë соответственно.
• Транслитерация — перевод лексической единицы текс
та оригинала путем реконструкции её графической фор
мы с помощью букв языка перевода, например, те же са
мые английские имена собственные Crighton è Auel по
канонам приема транслитерации должны были быть пе
реведены как Êðèãõòîí и Àóýë.
• Калькирование — переводчик передает дословно лекси
ческую единицу текста оригинала лексическими соот
ветствиями в языке перевода, например, используя пра
вила калькирования, следовало бы перевести англий
ское имя собственное Mason как Êàìåíùèê или Êàìåíåâ
на русский язык. В обычной практике перевода мы это
252
не делаем, это был бы неверный прием, но бывают ис
ключения. Например, в зависимости от жанра перево
димого текста и с целью достижения определенной мо
дальности переводного текста, шутливо ироничного,
разговорно просторечного, а иногда и откровенно сар
кастично ироничного, переводчик с удовольствием
воспользуется калькой имени. Перевод английского
имени, например, Denis John Boyle, на русский язык
калькировался друзьями данного носителя имени как
«Денис Иванович Êèïÿòêîâ». В качестве примера пере
вода кальки с русского языка на английский язык мож
но привести слово ëîáîòðÿñ и его калька forehead shaker.
• Лексико семантические приёмы (генерализация, кон
кретизация, синонимия) — это такие способы перевода
лексических единиц текста оригинала, когда перевод
чик использует в языке переводного текста такие едини
цы, значения которых НЕ СОВПАДАЮТ со значения
ми исходных единиц, но логически из них выводятся.
Дефиниции данных лексико семантических приемов
самоочевидны.
• Генерализация — это замена единицы текста языка ори
гинала с более узким значением единицей в языке текс
та перевода с более широким значением. Например,
русские единицы ñèíèé и ãîëóáîé будут переведены на
английский язык единицей с более широким значением
слова blue.
• Конкретизация — замена единицы исходного языка с
более широким значением единицей языка перевода с
более узким значением, например, такие английские
слова с широким значением как establishment, community
практически всегда конкретизируют при переводе на
русский язык как àäìèíèñòðàöèÿ, ðóêîâîäñòâî, èñòýáëèøìåíò и ãîðîä, îáùåñòâî, ãðàæäàíå соответственно.
• Синонимия — это замена лексической единицы исход
ного языка на единицу языка перевода, которая â äàííîì êîíòåêñòå èëè ñèòóàöèè выступает её синонимом
253
(более известный термин êîíòåêñòíàÿ ñèíîíèìèÿ), на
пример, при переводе с русского языка выражения áîðîòüñÿ çà ÷òî-òî, часто его лучше передавать англий
ским словом work for.
• Лексико грамматические трансформации (антонимич
ный перевод, компенсация) — переводчик прибегает к
одновременным заменам лексических и грамматичес
ких единиц текста оригинала и переводного текста БЕЗ
ИЗМЕНЕНИЯ СМЫСЛА предложения или высказы
вания, например, It remains to be done может быть пере
ведено как: Ýòî åùå ïðåäñòîèò âûïîëíèòü/Ýòî åùå ÍÅ
âûïîëíåíî. Часто именно этот переводческий прием
служит основой каламбура, шутки, игры слов. Напри
мер, îïòèìèñò — это «òîò, êòî âèäèò ñòàêàí íàïîëîâèíó ïîëíûì», а ïåññèìèñò — это человек, «êîòîðûé âèäèò
ñòàêàí íàïîëîâèíó ïóñòûì».
• Антонимичный перевод — замена утвердительной фор
мы в оригинальном тесте на отрицательную форму в
тексте перевода, или наоборот, с одновременной заме
ной лексических единиц в текстах двух языков, но с со
хранением смысла предложения, например: It is not so
uncommon to see these animals in this latitude. Âïîëíå âåðîÿòíî âñòðåòèòü ýòèõ æèâîòíûõ â äàííûõ øèðîòàõ. Дру
гой пример, когда английский глагол fail переводится на
русский язык антонимично, это íå ñóìåòü.
• Компенсация — очень произвольный способ/приём пе
ревода, когда переводчик позволяет себе восстанавли
вать и передавать утраченные при переводе оригинала
элементы смысла через введение в текст перевода дру
гих единиц. Эти единицы могут вводиться не обязатель
но в том же самом порядке или в те же самые изначаль
но принадлежавшие им места, например, при переводе
с русского на английский сочетаний типа: ðàöèîíàëèçàòîðñêîå ïðåäëîæåíèå будет Higher efficiency proposal; или
òðóäîâàÿ âàõòà будет переведено Enhanced (higher)production drive.
254
ÑÒÈËÈÑÒÈ÷ÅÑÊÈÅ ÑÐÅÄÑÒÂÀ/ÏÐȸÌÛ
Использование стилистических средств и приемов при
двустороннем переводе всегда представляло значительную пе
реводческую трудность. Основная область применения этих
средств — художественная литература. Однако в деловой, на
учной и публицистической речи, включая, в частности, обще
ственно политические и газетные тексты, стилистические ин
струменты весьма распространены.
Стилистические средства, или, иначе выражаясь, образ
но эмоциональные средства, любого языка складываются ве
ками и непосредственно связаны с языковой и культурной
традицией. Именно поэтому характер, удельный вес и образ
ное содержание этих средств часто не совпадают. Ниже мы да
дим краткое определение некоторых из стилистических при
емов, которые чаще других используются в политической и
публицистической риторике.
• Метафора — это перенос свойств одного предмета на
другой, если использовать очень упрощенное определе
ние. В этом плане метафора сопоставима с другими сти
листическими языковыми категориями, такими как
сравнение или его частный случай эпитет. Эти образные
средства, определения и/или сравнения, придают текс
ту или высказыванию яркую эмоциональную окраску,
например, бывшего Премьер министра Великобрита
нии госпожу М. Тэтчер иначе, чем “iron lady”, «æåëåçíàÿ
ëåäè» не называли. Интересно также рассмотреть, но
труднее передать на русский язык английское выраже
ние “nettlesome issue of Taiwan”. Это, несомненно, мета
фора, где имеет место перенос свойства крапивы как
жалящей/колющей травы на решение политического
вопроса: «áîëüíîé âîïðîñ, ñâÿçàííûé ñ Òàéâàíåì». Анг
лийское выражение “rogue-state” передается на русском
языке как «íåáëàãîíàäåæíîå ãîñóäàðñòâî».
• Развёрнутая метафора — подобные метафоры служат
для оживления традиционных или стершихся метафор,
255
их следует непременно сохранять в переводе, ибо они
придают свежесть изложению и отличаются оригиналь
ностью. Они часто строятся на обыгрывании устойчи
вых словосочетаний и пословиц и в русском языке
встречаются реже, чем в английском языке, например:
«Японии не от кого обороняться и никакой нужды в “обо
ронительном” договоре нет. Он нужен Японии, как òåëåãå ïÿòîå êîëåñî. Куда же покатит это “пятое колесо”, увлекая за со
бой страну? Только по пути агрессии».
“Japan has nobody to defend herself against and therefore has
no need of any “defence” pact. She needs such a pact no more than
a cart needs a fifth wheel. Whither can such a wheel lead the coun
try? Only along the road of aggression”.
1. Метонимия — это перенос названия с одного предмета
на другой на основе наличия между ними реальных свя
зей. Как и метафоры, метонимические слова и обороты
редко совпадают по форме и содержанию в различных
языках, за исключением сравнительно небольшого числа
интернациональных по характеру слов, например:
(1) Даунинг стрит 10 — Downing Street 10 — это àíãëèéñêîå
ïðàâèòåëüñòâî (по названию улицы и номеру дома, где
помещается резиденция премьер министра);
(2) Уолл стрит — Wall Street — это àìåðèêàíñêàÿ ôèíàíñîâàÿ
îëèãàðõèÿ (по названию улицы в Нью Йорке, на которой
расположены крупнейшие в США банки и фондовая
биржа);
(3) Белый дом — the White House — это Ïðàâèòåëüñòâî ÑØÀ
(по названию резиденции президента США в Вашингтоне).
ÊÐÀÒÊÈÉ ÎÁÇÎÐ ÔÓÍÊÖÈÎÍÀËÜÍÛÕ ÑÒÈËÅÉ
В задачи автора данного учебного пособия не входит ана
лиз общей функциональной дифференциации литературного
256
языка и развитие функциональных стилей в различные исто
рические периоды. Тем не менее мы посчитали нужным и це
лесообразным привести краткие дефиниции наиболее широко
распространенных функциональных стилей/жанров, так как
умение хотя бы на поверхностном уровне различать принад
лежность текста и/или высказывания к той или иной его
функциональной разновидности всегда помогут переводчику
в правильном выборе переводческих трансформаций. Каждый
из приводимых ниже пяти основных стилей характеризуется
специально отобранными и с годами отработанными языко
выми средствами, и использование многих из этих лексико
грамматических или стилистических инструментов привело к
появлению øàáëîíîâ (øòàìïîâ, êëèøå), знание которых при
ходит на помощь переводчику в том или ином контексте или
конситуации.
Вслед за известными лингвистами И. Гальпериным,
Н. Разинкиной, М. Кожиной и многими другими, которые
выделяют пять базовых функциональных стилей и точку зре
ния которых автор данной книги разделяет, мы попытаемся
дать краткие определения следующим стилям:
1. íàó÷íîìó ôóíêöèîíàëüíîìó ñòèëþ;
2. îôèöèàëüíî-äåëîâîìó ñòèëþ;
3. ïóáëèöèñòè÷åñêîìó ñòèëþ;
4. õóäîæåñòâåííîìó ñòèëþ;
5. ðàçãîâîðíî-áûòîâîìó ñòèëþ.
Íàó÷íûé ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü (ÍÔÑ) — это такая форма
высказывания, которая постоянно отражает рассудочную дея
тельность, а язык науки, как и само научное исследование, ха
рактеризуется безличностью, объективностью, рассудочнос
тью и неярко выраженной образностью. В свою очередь, æàíðàìè ÍÔÑ выступают монография, научная статья, рецензия,
лекция, патентно техническое описание или спецификация.
Характерными структурно синтаксическими конструкциями
НФС выступают такие как: обилие придаточных предложе
ний, причастные и деепричастные обороты, вводные предло
257
жения, которые утяжеляют текст. К лексико грамматическим
и стилистическим особенностям НФС обычно относят пас
сивный залог (например, «Â èíñòèòóòå áûëî ïðîâåäåíî èññëåäîâàíèå» “The study was done in the Institute”), неопределенно
личные предложения (например, «Ïîëó÷åííûå ðåçóëüòàòû çàñëóæèâàþò ïðèñòàëüíîãî àíàëèçà» “The results obtained are
considered to be thoroughly analyzed / We should thoroughly analyze
the results obtained ”). Употребление терминологии, однознач
ных слов, практическое отсутствие синонимии и переносных
значений — это тоже прерогатива НФС. С другой стороны, в
научном стиле речи в зависимости от индивидуальности авто
ра или области знаний (в гуманитарной области в большей
степени, чем в естественно научных или точных науках) мож
но встретить случаи употребления образности, например: ÿçû÷îê, ïåñòèê, ìóôòà, ïëå÷î, íîãà, ïîäîøâà.
Îôèöèàëüíî-äåëîâîé ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü (ÎÄÑ) — это
возможность через языковые средства выразить отношения
между индивидуумами, учреждениями и странами. Точность
формулировок (а мы в нашем случае можем говорить о точно
сти и/или адекватности перевода этих формулировок с языка
на язык), например, дипломатических или правовых норм, ха
рактеризуется долженствованием, обязательностью исполне
ния, точностью, не допускающей противоречивого толкова
ния. ОДС не приемлет размытости или личностного отноше
ния к высказываниям, его отличают четкость, строгость и
неличностный характер. Всё это находит свое выражение в
многочисленных øàáëîíàõ (êëèøå), цель которых — через дан
ную стандартизацию помочь участникам общения (и перевод
чикам в процессе их перевода подобного общения!) найти об
щий язык. В качестве лексико грамматических особенностей
ОДС можно указать на чрезмерно большое количество èíôèíèòèâîâ, цепочка которых иногда достигает 10 или даже боль
шего числа. Обилие îòãëàãîëüíûõ ñóùåñòâèòåëüíûõ, наличие
óñòîé÷èâûõ îáîðîòîâ äåëîâîé ðå÷è, как то: «в установленном
порядке», «пойти по инстанциям», «в случае неявки/неиспол
нения», «предъявить иск», «взыскать задолженность», «дого
258
вор вступает в силу» и т.д. То же самое можно наблюдать и в
английском языке, например: “future meetings format”, “subject
to the terms and conditions”, “this Agreement will be executed
simultaneously”, “hereafter”.
Ïóáëèöèñòè÷åñêèé ôóíêöèîíàëüíûé ñòèëü (ÏÔÑ) — это,
можно сказать, дань общепринятым названиям функциональ
ных стилей. В реальном своем воплощении ПФС — это ком
плекс способов или моделей организации языковых средств
для специфических целей общения. Некоторыми наиболее
социально значимыми сферами человеческой деятельности
являются наука, литература, область массовых коммуника
ций — газеты, журналы, ТВ и т.д. Способы передачи различ
ных отношений в обществе, будучи преломленными особым
образом с использованием определенных языковых средств,
прежде всего через СМИ, мы в этом учебном пособии условно
называем ПФС. Базовыми стилеобразующими функциями
ПФС выступают èíôîðìàöèîííîñòü, ýêñïðåññèâíîñòü, ðåêëàìíîñòü, äåêëàðàòèâíîñòь и âîçäåéñòâèå.
Èíôîðìàöèîííàÿ функция ПФС реализуется через логико
понятийную сторону речи, и ее яркими примерами может слу
жить прецизионная лексика, а именно: имена собственные,
включая географические названия, наименования учрежде
ний и организаций, названия газет и журналов и т.д. Аббреви
атуры (ЮНЕСКО, АТЭС, ООН и т.д.), а также проникновение
научной, официально деловой и общественно политической
лексики и штампов.
Характерная для ПФС ýêñïðåññèâíîñòü достигается, на
пример, через ìåòàôîðè÷åñêîå èñïîëüçîâàíèå òåðìèíîâ, напри
мер: “to derail the Arab-Israeli peace process” (to derail — пустить
под откос); или с помощью высокой книжной лексики, вклю
чая заимствования из других языков: “Mr. Bush committed a faux
pas of his own.” (Господин Буш допустил îøèáêó в речи”). До
вольно часты ñðàâíåíèÿ, çàèìñòâîâàííûå èç õóäîæåñòâåííîé
ëèòåðàòóðû, èç Áèáëèè, íàïðèìåð: “a James Bond-like aura”
(сравнение из книги Яна Флеминга — «âèòàë íèìá Äæåéìñà
Áîíäà»); “He is burning at his stake” — «Он сгорает на кресте».
259
Ðåêëàìíîñòü как характерная особенность ПФС чаще все
го находит свое отражение в клише и штампах, используемых
журналистами как в газетах, так и на ТВ. Äåêëàðàòèâíîñòü,
как правило, передается через подчеркнутую фактологичес
кую точность излагаемой информации, в то время как функ
ция âîçäåéñòâèÿ ПФС может, с одной стороны, быть призыв
но лозунговой и побудительной, и это всегда видно как в рос
сийских, так и в американских СМИ. С другой стороны, эта
функция воздействия может не находиться на поверхности из
лагаемого материала, например: “a parking meter concept” —
«концепция/устройство/подход арифмометра». Под предло
гом легкости и простоты в употреблении, а в США всем изве
стен парковочный счетчик, автор статьи пытался продвинуть
на рынок весьма сомнительный продукт.
Õóäîæåñòâåííîìó ñòèëþ (ÕÑ), который мы не ставим сво
ей целью здесь рассматривать, можно лишь кратко охаракте
ризовать как полифоничный, как вобравший в себя всю гамму
стилистических средств, характерных для четырех других.
Ðàçãîâîðíûé ñòèëü (ÐÑ) находит свое характерное отраже
ние в сфере бытовых повседневных отношений. Это стиль не
официальный, непринужденный, не требует подготовленнос
ти, поэтому в своей основе РС существует как устная форма
общения.
ÍÅÑÊÎËÜÊÎ ÏÐÀÂÈË ÈÑÏÎËÜÇÎÂÀÍÈß
ÎÏÐÅÄÅËÅÍÍÎÃÎ ÀÐÒÈÊËß “THE”
Ниже автор приводит несколько конкретных правил ис
пользования определенного артикля “the”, которые помогают
объяснить выбор данного артикля в англоязычных текстах
учебного пособия. Это предписывающие правила, они не ре
комендуют, а требуют постановки именно артикля “the”. Мы
настоятельно советуем придерживаться десяти правил ис
пользования этого артикля, которые приведены ниже. Эти
указания по использованию определенного артикля были по
260
заимствованы нами из книги Патриции У. Петерсон “Deve
loping Writing” (Patricia Wilcox Peterson), и мы с удовольствием
делимся ими с вами. Вот эти 10 случаев наиболее частого при
менения определенного артикля в текстах:
• Rule 1: Use the when the noun has already been mentioned.
• Rule 2: Use the when the noun that follows is already known.
• Rule 3: Use the when the noun is made definite by an adjec
tive clause or and adjective phrase.
• Rule 4: Use the in the names of countries that contain the
words united, union, kingdom, or republic.
• Rule 5: Do not use an article with names of countries, cities,
or states.
Exception to Rule 5: Use the in the Hague (Ãààãà).
• Rule 6: Use the when generalizing about an entire class of
animals.
• Rule 7: Use the when the noun is the only one that exists.
• Rule 8: Use the in special names, titles, and epithets.
• Rule 9: Use the with nouns for military institutions, such as
the army, the navy, the air force, the marines, the military, as
well as the fire department, the police, etc.
• Rule 10: Use the with large periods of historic time like the
2000’s, the Jet Age, the Dark Ages, the Jurassic Period, etc.
II. ÄÈÀÃÎÍÀËÜÍÀß ÑÈÑÒÅÌÀ ÇÀÏÈÑÈ ÒÅÊÑÒÀ
Диагональная система записи текста представляет собой
часть системы универсальной переводческой скорописи
(УПС) (Чужакин, 2002: 92–94).
Почему такое название? Потому что УПС располагается
по диагонали, а вернее сказать, её расположение ступенчато
диагональное и сверху вниз. Такой тип записи сделает помет
ки переводчика легко читаемыми и воспринимаемыми тогда,
когда у него/неё дефицит времени — а у переводчика всегда не
хватает времени!
261
Итак:
1. первая “ступенька” слева — это ãðóïïà ïîäëåæàùåãî;
2. вторая ступенька, ãðóïïà ñêàçóåìîãî, начинается стро
кой ниже от того места, где закончилась группа подле
жащего и с отступа;
3. третья ступенька — это ïðÿìîå äîïîëíåíèå и
4. четвертая ступенька — это êîñâåííîå äîïîëíåíèå.
В качестве примера, посмотрите, как эта диагональная си
стема записи наглядно выглядит, а затем запишем несколько
образцов предложений:
Ãðóïïà ïîäëåæàùåãî (SUBJECT)
Ãðóïïà ñêàçóåìîãî (VERB)
Ïðÿìîå äîïîëíåíèå (DIRECT OBJECT)
Êîñâåííîå äîïîëíåíèå (INDIRECT OBJECT)
ÏÐÈÌÅÐÛ ÄÈÀÃÎÍÀËÜÍÎÉ ÇÀÏÈÑÈ
1)
Grain export
cannot develop
to US
because
US
Imposed
Tariffs.
2)
W.T.
suffered
catastrophes:
winter storms,
flooding &
earthquakes.
1) Grain exports to the United States have been unable to devel
op because the United States have imposed import tariffs.
262
2) Western Turkey has suffered a series of natural catastrophes,
violent winter storms, flooding and earthquakes.
Ïðèìå÷àíèÿ:
(а) Îäíîðîäíûå ÷ëåíû ïðåäëîæåíèÿ записываются êîëîíêîé,
строго один под другим, с новой строки.
(в) Ступеньки для ãðóïïû îáñòîÿòåëüñòâ (ìåñòà, âðåìåíè, îáðàçà
äåéñòâèÿ) при диагональной записи не предусмотрено. Обстоятель
ство очень подвижный член предложения, и переводчик, как прави
ло, предпочитает ставить его либо на полях, либо рядом с тем словом
(группой слов), к которым оно относится.
(с) Диагональная запись не рассчитана на то, чтобы экономить
поле блокнота для записи. Запись размещается на странице свобод
но, оставляются большие поля для таких членов предложения, как
обстоятельства и/или любые другие переводческие пометы (âîïðîñèòåëüíûå çíàêè, если это вопрос, âîñêëèöàòåëüíûå çíàêè, если оратор
интонационно выделяет тему).
(d) Желательно либо нумеровать предложения, либо делать от
бивку между группами предложений/абзацами. Переводческая ско
ропись (ПС) выступает как незаменимая опора оперативной памяти.
При разработке своей системы ПС необходимо учесть и «зако
дировать» понятия как общеупотребительные, так и специальные
слова термины, например, для перевода политических выступлений
дипломатов. В переводческой записи фиксируются семы — основ
ные значения, входящие в состав разных слов. Такие, например, по
нятия, как
дать,
ñдать,
îòдать,
ïðèдать,
äîдать,
ïåðåдать,
âûдать,
ïðîдать,
íåäîдать
отличаются друг от друга. Тем не менее они имеют общее элементар
ное значение (сема): «ñäåëàòü òàê, ÷òîáû íåêòî èìåë íå÷òî». В при
веденных примерах этот общий знаменатель обозначен словом
«дать», а признаки, отличающие эти слова по значению, обозначены
приставками.
263
Ñõåìà.
Âûÿâëåíèå ñåìû ïðè ïåðåâîäå ñ ðîäíîãî ÿçûêà (ß-I) íà àíãëèéñêèé ÿçûê (ß-II):
Преимуще
ства такой за
писи очевидны:
множество сло
варных единиц,
выходящих да
леко за пределы
синонимичес
кого ряда, пере
даются одним
многозначным признаком. При этом текст не только “выжи
мается” семантически, но и сокращается (компрессируется)
физически. Иными словами, в процессе записи самое важ
ное — это отразить логическую связность (когезию) текста,
его модальность и прецизионную информацию.
III. ÊÎÌÏÐÅÑÑÈß ÊÀÊ ÑÏÎÑÎÁ
ÈÇÁÅÆÀÒÜ ÌÍÎÃÎÑËÎÂÈß Â ÒÅÊÑÒÅ
Под римской öèôðîé I приведено ис
ходное предложение или группа предло
жений, которые можно подвергать ком
прессии. С помощью данной пирамиды
автор хотела бы наглядно продемонстри
ровать направление компрессии в тексте.
В нашем примере два предложения,
подвергаемые компрессии, занимают мес
то у подножия пирамиды. Öåëü êîìïðåññèè — èçáåæàòü ìíîãîñëîâèÿ â òåêñòå.
Данный пример демонстрирует лекси
ко грамматические переводческие транс
264
формации, которые, как правило, в реальном процессе сокра
щения текста взаимодополняют друг друга. Обратите внима
ние на более высокие ярусы пирамиды, помеченные римски
ми öèôðàìè II, III, IV и V, которые указывают на более высо
кие уровни компрессии предложений и, следовательно,
текста. В результате структура предложений претерпевает ряд
таких изменений, которые позволяют нам два предложения из
16 слов сократить до одного предложения из 6 слов. Ниже
приводится один пример процесса поэтапной компрессии,
причем в скобках указывается (исключая I этап), какие кон
кретно переводческие трансформации или приёмы были ис
пользованы на каждом конкретном этапе:
I.
There was a mist which hung like a veil. It obscured the top of
the mountain. (Èñõîäíûå ïðåäëîæåíèÿ)
II. The mist hung like a veil and obscured the mountain top.
(×àñòü ñîñòàâíîãî ãëàãîëüíîãî ñêàçóåìîãî)
III. The mist, hanging like a veil, obscured the mountain top.
(Ïðè÷àñòíûé îáîðîò)
IV. The mist, like a veil, obscured the mountain top. (Ïðåäëîæíàÿ
ñòðóêòóðà)
V. The mist veiled the mountain top. (Ñëîâî)
Êîììåíòàðèé. Данный пример компрессии намеренно был вы
бран автором как образец функционального стиля речи, не принад
лежащего к общественно политическому жанру. Нам также хотелось
подчеркнуть и факт наличия стилистической переводческой транс
формации в предложении, в частности метафоры, как одного из ин
струментов переводчика, умение пользоваться которыми помогает
ему/ей органично осуществлять весь комплекс трансформаций: лек
сических, грамматических и стилистических. Так что, уважаемые
читатели данного пособия, можете соотносить свои возможности и
умения компрессировать текст, сравнивая их с ярусами пирамиды:
если вам удалось äîñòè÷ü вершины пирамиды, считайте, вы овладе
ли навыками высшего пилотажа в умении производить переводчес
кие трансформации!
265
IV. ÑÊÎÐÎÏÈÑÜ Â ÀÍÃËÈÉÑÊÎÌ ßÇÛÊÅ.
100 ÍÀÈÁÎËÅÅ ×ÀÑÒÎ ÈÑÏÎËÜÇÓÅÌÛÕ
ÑÊÎÐÎÏÈÑÍÛÕ ÇÍÀÊÎÂ
История возникновения и развития переводческой скоро
писи такова. Переводческая скоропись появилась на Западе в
1930 е годы, но ее принципы были научно обоснованы и раз
работаны в конце 1950 х годов в Швейцарии, впервые изложе
ны в книге Ж. Ф. Розана. В нашей стране система переводче
ской скорописи на основе русского языка была изложена в
1969 году Р. Миньяр Белоручевым. Переводческая скоропись —
вещь сугубо индивидуальная, хотя и имеет определенные за
кономерности. При этом она специфична, как специфичен
ваш почерк, хотя при этом буквы алфавита понятны всем вла
деющим грамотой, что дает нам возможность утверждать, что
скоропись — не самоцель, а средство. Она никому не нужна,
кроме вас самих. Вероятно, вам и решать, всегда ли её исполь
зовать и нужно ли использовать скоропись вообще (Чужакин,
2002: 91).
Тем не менее автор пособия посчитала нужным снаб
дить его системой упрощенной записи строчных букв анг
лийского алфавита (Òàáëèöà 1), упрощенной записью бук
восочетаний (Òàáëèöà 2) и упрощенной записью заглавных
букв.
Отдельно приводятся правила сокращения слов, 19 пра
вил с подробным объяснением на английском языке проце
дуры пропуска букв, гласных и согласных, и буквосочета
ний в начале, в середине и в конце слова. Правила заканчи
ваются, как им и положено, кратким обобщением того,
какие буквы или их сочетания можно безболезненно ÎÏÓÑÒÈÒÜ, а какие следует непременно ÑÎÕÐÀÍÈÒÜ в про
цессе написания слов.
Далее приводятся знаки скорописи, используемые при на
писании наиболее часто используемых суффиксов и приста
вок (Òàáëèöà 3), после которой следуют 100 наиболее часто ис
пользуемых сокращений (Òàáëèöà 4).
266
THE SIMPLIFIED ALPHABET
THE SIMPLIFIED SMALL LETTERS
Òàáëèöà 1
Initial:
Medial:
Final:
SIMPLIFIED LETTER COMBINATION
Òàáëèöà 2
Initial
Medial
Omit
au,ou:
Final
(rare)
Exceptions
Out
Outer
aw,ow
ly:
a
a
ty:
a
a
ph:
th:
that
wh:
What
This
SIMPLIFIED CAPITAL LETTERS
267
Òàáëèöà 3
EXAMPLES:
Aug.
For
Is
Ouch
Away
Of
It
Owe
Be
From
Just
Phone
By
Go
My
Please
Do
If
An,On
Are, Or, Our
Day
In
Any
As
Say
That
Thing
You
To
This
What
Your
Take
There
Who
Yours truly
RULES FOR WORD ABBREVIATION
Internal Vowels
Rule1.
Omit internal vowels. As this rule implies, initial and final vow
els are not to be omitted/ unless special rules apply to them or there
is a special abbreviation (as s for as, b for be, and sm for some). The
following abbreviations which you have already learned are regular
abbreviations resulting from the application of Rule 1:
Suggestion: Retain any vowel (or consonant) at your discretion
when you think you might not recognize the abbreviation without it.
Rule 2.
Never omit w; omit a vowel preceding w except at the beginning
of a word.
Exception: own as 1) in my own but 2) I own
Rule 3.
Omit internal y if it is not preceded by another vowel. Retain y
but omit the preceding vowel in internal and final ay, ey, oy, and uy.
(Rule 3 applies to y as a vowel, y as a consonant /canyon, vineyard/,
is, of course, always retained).
Special abbreviations: by
, eye
(eyelid
, etc.)
Final E, Vowels before the Ending S
268
Rule 4.
Drop final e after l when l is preceded by another consonant
except silent s.
Rule 5.
Drop final e after v and z.
Rule 6.
When the ending s is added to an abbreviation, retain the final
vowel s of the abbreviation.
Rule 7.
For the word endings ies and ious use
.
Initial and Final Diphthongs
Retain initial and final diphthongs unless the following rules
apply. See, also, Rule 3 regarding final ay, ey, oy and uy. And do not
forget to apply Rule 6 if s is added.
Rule 8.
Omit a in initial diphthongs ea and oa, omit a in final diphthong
ea if pronounced ee.
Rule 9.
Omit one e in initial, and final ee and in final oe and ue if pro
nounced oh and oo. Do not forget to apply Rule 6 if s is added.
Rule 10.
Omit final silent ue.
Rule 11.
Omit u after q. (In English, q is always followed by u)
Rule 12.
Omit one consonant in a double consonant.
269
Rule 13.
Omit c before k and q.
Rule 14.
Omit silent gh before t.
Òàáëèöà 4
SPECIAL ABBREVIATIONS:
enough
high
though
although
through
throughout
Rule 15.
Omit n in the word endings nce and ncy except in short words.
Rule 16.
Omit n before g and when these letters form the sound of ng in sing.
Rule 17.
Omit n before d and t except after initial vowels.
Rule 18.
Omit silent n after m.
Rule 19.
Omit r before another consonant except after initial vowels.
REVIEW
OMIT
1. Internal vowels.
2. One consonant in a double consonant.
3. a, e, o, u in internal and final ay, ey, oy, uy.
4. Final e after l preceded by another consonant.
5. Final e after v and z.
270
6. a in initial ea and oa and in final ea (pronounced ee).
7. One e in initial and final ee.
8. e in final oe (oh) and ue (oo).
9. Final silent ue.
10. u after q.
11. c before k and q.
12. Silent gh before t.
13. n in endings nce, ncy except in short words.
14. n before d and t except in short words.
15. Silent n after m.
16. r before another consonant except after in initial vowels and
in some short words.
RETAIN:
w in all words
Internal y if preceded by another vowel.
Final vowel s of abbreviation when s is added.
Any letter(s) you may need in order to read your notes.
Òàáëèöà 5
PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES
after
ante
anti
arch
circum
co
com
con
contra
contro
counter
de
down
ever
every
ex
extra
for
afterglow
anteroom
antisocial
archbishop
circumstance
coauthor
combine
concoction
contradict
controversial
counterattack
decision
downstairs
evergreen
everybody
explain
extraordinary
forget
271
fore
forth
grand
hyper
hypo
inter
intra
intro
meta
non
out
over
para
per
peril
poly
post
pre
pro
pseudo
re
retro
semi
super
tran(s)
ultra
under
with
able, ible
ance, ence
ancy, ency
ant, ent
esque
less
ment
ness
ture
tion
upon
ize
272
forecast
forthcoming
grandchild
hyperactive
hypocritical
interfere
intravenous
introduce
metaphysics
noncommittal
outcome
overcoat
parallel
persecute
period
polygamy
postwar
precede
produce
pseudonym
reformation
retrospect
semifinal
supervise
transform
ultramodern
underground
withdraw
SPECIAL ABBREVIATIONS FOR SUFFIXES
after
down
ling
out
over
ship
some
under
ward(s)
with
Òàáëèöà 6
hereafter
breakdown
weakling
throughout
holdover
leadership
handsome
thereunder
backward(s)
herewith
Òàáëèöà 7
REVIEW OF THE 100 MOST FREQUENTLY USED WORDS
a
about
after
all
an
and
any
are
as
at
be
been
but
by
can
could
day
dear
do
for
from
go
good
had
has
have
he
her
here
him
his
house
I
if
in
is
it
its
just
last
letter
make
may
me
more
my
night
no
not
now
of
on
one
or
other
our
out
over
please
say
send
she
should
sir
so
some
take
than
thank
that
the
their
them
then
there
they
thing
think
this
time
to
truly
two
up
very
was
we
week
were
what
when
which
who
will
with
work
would
write
you
your
273
Note
Dear Sir
Dear Mr. C.
it’s
ones
Yours truly
use 3 for three etc.
written
writing
writer, wrote
,
one’s
V. ÑËÎÂÀÐÜ-ÌÈÍÈÌÓÌ ËÅÊÑÈÊÈ ÎÁÙÅÑÒÂÅÍÍÎÏÎËÈÒÈ×ÅÑÊÈÕ È ÝÊÎÍÎÌÈ×ÅÑÊÈÕ ÒÅÊÑÒÎÂ
Ñ ÑÈÍÎÍÈÌÈ×ÅÑÊÈÌÈ ÐßÄÀÌÈ (ÄËß ÑÒÓÄÅÍÒÎÂ
ÏÎ ÑÏÅÖÈÀËÜÍÎÑÒßÌ ÌÅÆÄÓÍÀÐÎÄÍÛÅ ÎÒÍÎØÅÍÈß
È ÏÎËÈÒÎËÎÃÈß)
abolish verb to do away with; put an end to; annul; make void: to
abolish slavery. — Syn. suppress, nullify, cancel; annihilate,
obliterate, extinguish; exterminate, extirpate, eliminate, eradi
cate, stamp out. — Ant. establish.
Usage note
ABOLISH, ERADICATE, STAMP OUT mean to do away completely
with something. To ABOLISH is to cause to cease, often by a summary
order: to abolish a requirement. STAMP OUT implies forcibly making an
end to something considered undesirable or harmful: to stamp out the
opium traffic. ERADICATE (literally, to tear out by the roots), a formal
word, suggests extirpation, leaving no vestige or trace: to eradicate all use
of child labor.
accomplish verb 1) to bring to its goal or conclusion; carry out; per
form; finish: to accomplish one’s mission. — Syn. complete, ful
274
fill; execute, effect. — Ant. block, defeat, fail. 2) to complete (a
distance or period of time): to have accomplished the age of 70;
We accomplished the journey in little more than an hour.
account for phrasal verb 1) to give an explanation (usually fol. by for ): to
account for the accident. 2) to answer concerning one’s con
duct, duties, etc. (usually fol. by for): to account for the missing typewriters. 3) to provide a report on money received,
kept, and spent. 4) to cause (usually fol. by for): The humidity accounts for our discomfort. His reckless driving accounted
for the accident.
administrative entity political subdivision.
advance/progress noun a forward movement or to a further or high
er stage; change, discovery, or invention that brings progress.
Syn. — development, improvement. Ant. — decline, regress.
advocate verb to speak or write in favor of; support or urge by argu
ment; recommend publicly: He advocated higher salaries for
teachers.
advocacy noun the act of pleading for, supporting, or recommend
ing; active espousal: He was known for his advocacy of states’
rights.
affect meat industry to act on; produce an effect on meat industry.
Usage note
AFFECT1 and EFFECT, each both noun and verb, share the sense of
“influence,” and because of their similarity in pronunciation are some
times confused in writing. As a verb AFFECT1 means “to act on” or “to
move” (His words affected the crowd so deeply that many wept);
AFFECT2 means “to pretend” or “to assume” (new students affecting a
nonchalance they didn’t feel). The verb EFFECT means “to bring about,
accomplish”: Her administration effected radical changes. The noun
EFFECT means “result, consequence”: the serious effects of the oil
spill. The noun AFFECT1 pronounced with the stress on the first sylla
ble, is a technical term in psychology and psychiatry. AFFECT2 is not
used as a noun.
aid (humanitarian aid) help given by one nation to another for pur
poses of relief and rehabilitation.
275
ancestor noun 1) a person from whom one is descended; forebear;
progenitor. 2) an object, idea, style, or occurrence serving as a
prototype, forerunner, or inspiration to a later one: The balloon
is an ancestor of the modern dirigible. 3) a person who serves as an
influence or model for another; one from whom mental, artis
tic, spiritual, etc., descent is claimed: a philosophical ancestor.
ancient adjective 1) of or in time long past, esp. before the end of the
Western Roman Empire A.D. 476: ancient history. 2) dating
from a remote period; of great age: ancient rocks; ancient trees.
3) very old; aged: an ancient folk tale. 4) being old in wisdom and
experience; venerable. 5) old fashioned or antique.
appoint verb 1) to name or assign to a position, an office, or the like;
designate: to appoint a new treasurer; to appoint a judge to the
bench. — Syn. choose, select. — Ant. dismiss, discharge. 2) to
determine by authority or agreement; fix; set: to appoint a time
for the meeting. — Syn. prescribe, establish.
APEC Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation.
ASEAN Association of South East Asian Nations.
astounding adjective capable of overwhelming with amazement;
stunningly surprising.
at high elevation at high level.
authorities noun, pl. persons having the legal power to make and
enforce the law; government: They finally persuaded the authorities that they were not involved in espionage.
authority noun 1) the power to determine, adjudicate, or otherwise
settle issues or disputes; jurisdiction; the right to control, com
mand, or determine. 2) a power or right delegated or given;
authorization: Who has the authority to grant permission?. 3) a
person or body of persons in whom authority is vested, as a gov
ernmental agency. 4) a quotation or citation from such a source.
5) an expert on a subject: He is an authority on baseball. 6) per
suasive force; conviction: She spoke with authority.
authorize 1) to give authority or official power to; empower: to
authorize an employee to sign purchase orders. 2) to give
authority for; formally sanction (an act or proceeding):
Congress authorized the new tax on tobacco. 3) to establish by
276
authority or usage: an arrangement long authorized by etiquette
books.
average verb 1) to find an average value for (a variable quantity);
reduce to a mean: We averaged the price of milk in five neighborhood stores. 2) (of a variable quantity) to have as its arithmetic
mean: Wheat averages 56 pounds to a bushel. 3) to do or have on
the average: He averages seven hours of sleep a night. 4) to have
or show an average: to average as expected. 5) average down, to
purchase more of a security or commodity at a lower price to
reduce the average cost of one’s holdings. 6) average out, a) to
come out of a security or commodity transaction with a profit or
without a loss. b) to reach an average or other figure: His taxes
should average out to about a fifth of his income. 7) average up, to
purchase more of a security or commodity at a higher price to
take advantage of a contemplated further rise in prices.
balance the scales 1) to try to give equal importance to two things.
2) to get into a steady position, without falling to one side or the
other, or to put something into this position.
ban verb 1) to prohibit, forbid, or bar; interdict: to ban nuclear
weapons; The dictator banned all newspapers and books that criticized his regime. — Syn. taboo, outlaw, proscribe. — Ant. allow.
ban noun 2) the act of prohibiting by law; interdiction. — Syn.
prohibition, proscription, interdict, taboo. 3) informal denunci
ation or prohibition, as by public opinion: society’s ban on racial
discrimination. — Syn. taboo.
be confined to/ by 1) limited or restricted. 2) unable to leave a place
because of illness, imprisonment, etc. — Ant. free.
be on the rise to experience elevation or increase in rank, fortune,
influence, power, etc.
be responsible for 1) answerable or accountable, as for something
within one’s power, control, or management (often fol. by to or
for): He is responsible to the president for his decisions. — Syn.
liable. 2) having a capacity for moral decisions and therefore
accountable; capable of rational thought or action: The defendant is not responsible for his actions. — Syn. competent.
be underrepresented not presented widely enough.
277
bet verb to wager with (something or someone). — Syn. gamble,
stake, risk, hazard, venture.
blaze a trail to lead in forming or finding (a new method, course,
etc.): The company has blazed a trail in robotic technology.
border noun 1) the part or edge of a surface or area that forms its
outer boundary. — Syn. rim, periphery, verge. 2) the line that
separates one country, state, province, etc., from another; fron
tier line: You cannot cross the border without a visa. — Syn.
boundary.
branches of power it means three most important branches of
Government: legislative, executive, judiciary. Sometimes mass
media is called the fourth branch.
bulldoze (a decision) to force officials to make a decision. — Sin. to
twist an arm of.
call for phrasal verb 1) to go or come to get; pick up; fetch. 2) to
request; summon. 3) to require; demand; need: The occasion
calls for a cool head.
Usage note
CALL, INVITE, SUMMON imply requesting the presence or atten
dance of someone at a particular place. CALL is the general word: to call
a meeting. To INVITE is to ask someone courteously to come as a guest,
a participant, etc., leaving the person free to refuse: to invite guests to a
concert; to invite them to contribute to a fund. SUMMON implies sending
for someone, using authority or formality in making the request and
(theoretically) not leaving the person free to refuse: to summon a witness,
members of a committee, etc.
(camp)site noun a place, position or location used or suitable for
camping.
capacity noun 1) the ability to receive or contain: This hotel has a
large capacity. 2) the maximum amount or number that can be
received or contained; cubic contents; volume: The inn is filled
to capacity. The gasoline tank has a capacity of 20 gallons. — Syn.
dimensions, amplitude. 3) power of receiving impressions,
knowledge, etc.; mental ability: the capacity to learn calculus. —
Syn. endowment, talent, gifts. 4) actual or potential ability to
278
perform, yield, or withstand: He has a capacity for hard work.
The capacity of the oil well was 150 barrels a day. She has the
capacity to go two days without sleep. — Syn. aptitude, adequacy,
competence, capability. 5) quality or state of being susceptible
to a given treatment or action: Steel has a high capacity to withstand. 6) position; function; role: He served in the capacity of
legal adviser. 7) legal qualification.
catch a glimpse of to see someone or something for a short time: I
caught only a glimpse of the president’s car.
chain (chain of commands) a series of commands connected or fol
lowing one after the other. Very often it means a hierarchy of
subordination.
chaos noun 1) a state of utter confusion or disorder; a total lack of
organization or order. — Syn. disarray, jumble, turmoil, tumult.
— Ant. order, peace, calm. 2) any confused, disorderly mass: a
chaos of meaningless phrases.
chair (chairperson, chairman) noun 1) a person who presides over a
meeting, committee, board, etc. 2) the administrative head of a
department in a high school, college, or university.
Usage note
CHAIRPERSON has, since the 1960s, come to be used widely as an
alternative to either CHAIRMAN or CHAIRWOMAN. This change
has sprung largely from a desire to avoid CHAIRMAN, which is felt by
many to be inappropriate and even sexually discriminatory when applied
to a woman. In some organizations, notably academic and, to a lesser
extent, governmental, CHAIRPERSON has been adopted as the official
term for anyone who fills the position in question. Some publishers and
publications specify the use of CHAIRPERSON in their style guides.
Despite such widespread acceptance, some newspapers, press associa
tions, and other news media do not use CHAIRPERSON at all, usually
on the grounds that it is awkward and that CHAIRMAN is a well estab
lished generic term covering both sexes. Some publications and organi
zations use the term CHAIR to designate the presiding officer, thus
avoiding charges of both sexism and awkwardness: Jim will be chair of the
entertainment committee this year, and Jane will be chair next year.
CHAIRPERSON is standard in all varieties of speech and writing.
279
checks and balances limits imposed on all branches of a government
by vesting in each branch the right to amend or void those acts
of another that fall within its purview.
chief of state the titular head of a nation, as a president or king.
chimney (smoke-screen) noun 1) a mass of dense smoke produced to
conceal an area, vessel, or plane from the enemy. 2) something
intended to disguise, conceal, or deceive; camouflage.
China noun 1) People’s Republic of, a country in E Asia. Cap.:
Beijing. 2) Republic of. Also called Nationalist China. a republic
consisting mainly of the island of Taiwan off the SE coast of
mainland China: under Nationalist control since 1948 but
claimed by the People’s Republic of China. Cap.: Taipei.
citizen noun 1) a native or naturalized member of a state or nation
who owes allegiance to its government and is entitled to its pro
tection (distinguished from alien). 2) an inhabitant of a city or
town, esp. one entitled to its privileges or franchises.
claim verb 1) to demand by or as by virtue of a right; demand as a
right or as due: to claim an estate by inheritance. 2) to assert and
demand the recognition of (a right, title, possession, etc.);
assert one’s right to: to claim payment for services. 3) to assert or
maintain as a fact: She claimed that he was telling the truth. 4) to
require as due or fitting: to claim respect. — claimant noun a per
son who makes a claim.
coalmine (a mine of wisdom) source, origin, or cause from which wis
dom is obtained.
collegial adjective 1) collegiate; involving or related to a college. 2) of
or characterized by the collective responsibility shared by each
of a group of colleagues, with minimal supervision from above.
come around/ round phrasal verb 1) to recover consciousness; revive.
2) to change one’s opinion, decision, etc., esp. to agree with
another’s. 3) to visit: Come around more often. 4) to cease being
angry, hurt, etc.
Commonwealth noun 1) a group of sovereign states and their depend
encies associated by their own choice and linked with common
objectives and interests: the British Commonwealth. 2) the
Commonwealth a voluntary association of independent nations
and dependent territories linked by historical ties (as parts of the
280
former British Empire) and cooperating on matters of mutual
concern, esp. regarding economics and trade. Also called
Commonwealth of Nations. Formerly, British Commonwealth,
British Commonwealth of Nations. 3) a federation of states: the
Commonwealth of Australia.
competition noun 1) the act of competing; rivalry for supremacy, a
prize, etc.: The competition between the two teams was bitter. 2) a
contest for some prize, honor, or advantage: Both girls entered
the competition. 3) the rivalry offered by a competitor: The small
merchant gets powerful competition from the chain stores. 4) a
competitor or competitors: What is your competition offering?
comprehensive campaign a campaign of large scope.
comprise 50% of the world population to form or constitute 50% of
the world population.
condemnation noun an expression of very strong disapproval of
someone or something: Condemnation of the latest violence came
from all political parties.
containment noun 1) the act of keeping something under control:
containment of public expenditure. 2) the use of political actions
to prevent an unfriendly country from becoming more powerful:
a policy of containment
contend verb 1) to struggle in opposition: to contend with the enemy
for control of the port. — Syn. wrestle, grapple, battle, fight. 2) to
strive in rivalry; compete; vie: to contend for first prize. — Syn.
struggle. 3) to strive in debate; dispute earnestly: to contend against
falsehood. — Syn. argue, wrangle. — Ant. agree 4) to assert or
maintain earnestly: He contended that taxes were too high. — Syn.
hold, claim.
Usage note
COMPETE, CONTEND, CONTEST mean to strive to outdo or excel.
COMPETE implies having a sense of rivalry and of striving to do one’s
best as well as to outdo another: to compete for a prize. CONTEND sug
gests opposition or disputing as well as rivalry: to contend with an opponent, against obstacles. CONTEST suggests struggling to gain or hold
something, as well as contending or disputing: to contest a position or
ground (in battle); to contest a decision.
281
council noun 1) an assembly of persons summoned or convened for
consultation, deliberation, or advice. 2) a body of persons spe
cially designated or selected to act in an advisory, administra
tive, or legislative capacity: the governor’s council on housing.
Usage note
COUNCIL, COUNSEL, and CONSUL are not interchangeable.
COUNCIL is a noun. Its most common sense is “an assembly of persons
convened for deliberation or the like.” It is generally used with a singular
verb. A member of such a group is a councilor. COUNSEL is both noun
and verb. Its most common meaning as a noun is “advice given to anoth
er”: His counsel on domestic relations is sound. A person giving such advice
is a counselor. In law, COUNSEL means “legal adviser or advisers” and
can be either singular or plural. As a verb, COUNSEL means “to advise.”
The noun CONSUL refers to the representative of a government who
guards the welfare of its citizens in a foreign country.
counterpart noun 1) a person or thing closely resembling another,
esp. in function: Our president is the counterpart of your prime
minister. 2) a copy; duplicate. 3) one of two parts that fit, com
plete, or complement one another. — counterargument noun a
contrasting, opposing, or refuting argument. — counterproductive adjective thwarting the achievement of an intended goal;
tending to defeat one’s purpose: Living on credit while trying to
save money is counterproductive.
Usage note
counter used with the meanings 1) “against,” “contrary,” “opposite,”
“in opposition or response to” (countermand; counterargument; counterproductive); 2) “complementary,” “in reciprocation,” “corresponding,”
“parallel” (counterfoil; counterbalance; counterpart-3); 3) “substitute,”
“duplicate” (counterfeit; counterpart-2).
crew noun a group of persons involved in a particular kind of work or
working together: the crew of a train; a wrecking crew.
curb verb to control as with a curb; restrain; check. — Syn. bridle,
repress. — Ant. encourage.
282
Usage note
CHECK, CURB, REPRESS, RESTRAIN refer to putting a control on
movement, progress, action, etc. CHECK implies arresting suddenly,
halting or causing to halt: to check a movement toward reform. CURB
implies the use of a means such as a chain, strap, frame, wall, etc., to
guide or control or to force to stay within definite limits: to curb a horse.
REPRESS, formerly meaning to suppress, now implies preventing the
action or development that might naturally be expected: to repress evi
dence of excitement. RESTRAIN implies the use of force to put under
control, or chiefly, to hold back: to restrain a person from violent acts.
debate strategies to argue or discuss strategies, as in a legislative or
public assembly.
debris noun the remains of anything broken down or destroyed;
ruins; rubble: the debris of buildings after an air raid. — Syn.
detritus, litter, trash.
decision-making noun the process of thinking about a problem, idea
etc, and then making a choice or judgment: an attempt to make
workers more involved in decision-making decision by the
President.
definition noun 1) the act of defining or making definite, distinct, or
clear. 2) the formal statement of the meaning or significance of
a word, phrase, etc. 3) the condition of being definite, distinct,
or clearly outlined.
dense adjective 1) having the component parts closely compacted
together; crowded or compact: dense population. — Syn. con
gested, crammed, teeming; impenetrable. 2) stupid; slow wit
ted; dull. 3) intense; extreme: dense ignorance. 4) relatively
opaque; transmitting little light, as a photographic negative,
optical glass, or color. 5) difficult to understand or follow
because of being closely packed with ideas or complexities of
style: a dense philosophical essay.
densely populated = a lot of people live in that place in relation to its size.
departure time time of leaving. Ant. — arrival time.
desert verb 1) to leave (a person, place, etc.) without intending to
return, esp. in violation of a duty, promise, or the like: He
283
deserted his wife. — Syn. abandon, forsake. 2) (of military per
sonnel) to leave or run away from (service, duty, etc.) with the
intention of never returning. 3) to fail (someone) at a time of
need: None of his friends had deserted him.
Usage note
DESERT, ABANDON, FORSAKE mean to leave behind persons,
places, or things. DESERT implies intentionally violating an oath,
formal obligation, or duty: to desert campaign pledges. ABANDON
suggests giving up wholly and finally, whether of necessity, unwillingly,
or through shirking responsibilities: to abandon a hopeless task; abandon a child. FORSAKE has emotional connotations, since it implies
violating obligations of affection or association: to forsake a noble
cause.
designated nominated or selected for a duty, office, purpose, etc.; —
Syn. appointed; assigned. designate adjective named or selected
for an office, position, etc., but not yet installed (often used in
combination following the noun it modifies): ambassador-designate.
destination noun 1) the place to which a person or thing travels or is
sent: Her destination was Rome. 2) the purpose for which some
thing is destined.
detention noun 1) the act of detaining. 2) the state of being detained.
3) maintenance of a person in custody or confinement, esp.
while awaiting a court decision. 4) the withholding of what
belongs to or is claimed by another.
detente noun a relaxing of tension, esp. between nations, as by
negotiations or agreements.
devastate verb 1) to lay waste; render desolate: The invaders devastated the city. — Syn. destroy, sack, despoil, ravage. 2) to over
whelm.
284
Usage note
RAVAGE, DEVASTATE, LAY WASTE all refer, in their literal applica
tion, to the wholesale destruction of a countryside by an invading army
(or something comparable). LAY WASTE has remained the closest to
the original meaning of destruction of land: The invading army laid waste
the towns along the coast. But RAVAGE and DEVASTATE are used in
reference to other types of violent destruction and may also have a pure
ly figurative application. RAVAGE is often used of the results of epi
demics: The Black Plague ravaged 14th-century Europe; and even of the
effect of disease or suffering on the human countenance: a face ravaged
by despair. DEVASTATE, in addition to its concrete meaning (vast areas
devastated by bombs), may be used figuratively: a devastating remark.
develop verb 1) to bring out the capabilities or possibilities of; bring
to a more advanced or effective state: to develop natural
resources. 2) to cause to grow or expand: to develop one’s muscles.
3) to elaborate or expand in detail: to develop a theory. 4) to bring
into being or activity; generate; evolve.
development noun 1) the act or process of developing; growth;
progress: economic development. — Syn. expansion, elaboration,
growth, evolution; unfolding, opening, maturing, matura
tion. — Ant. deterioration, disintegration.2) a significant conse
quence or event: recent developments in the field of science. 3) a
developed state or form: Drama reached its highest development
in the plays of Shakespeare. — Syn. maturity, ripeness.
dictator noun a person exercising absolute power, esp. a ruler who
has absolute, unrestricted control in a government without
hereditary succession.
directly-elected chosen by open vote, as for an office (contrasted
with appointed).
disarmament noun 1) the act or an instance of disarming. 2) the
reduction or limitation of the size, equipment, armament, etc.,
of the army, navy, or air force of a country.
disaster noun a calamitous event, esp. one occurring suddenly and
causing great loss of life, damage, or hardship, as a flood, airplane
crash, or business failure. — Syn. mischance, misfortune, misad
venture, mishap, accident, blow, reverse, adversity, affliction.
285
Usage note
DISASTER, CALAMITY, CATASTROPHE, CATACLYSM refer to
adverse happenings often occurring suddenly and unexpectedly. A
DISASTER may be caused by carelessness, negligence, bad judg
ment, or the like, or by natural forces, as a hurricane or flood: a rail
road disaster. CALAMITY suggests great affliction, either personal
or general; the emphasis is on the grief or sorrow caused: the calami
ty of losing a child. CATASTROPHE refers esp. to the tragic out
come of a personal or public situation; the emphasis is on the
destruction or irreplaceable loss: the catastrophe of a defeat in battle.
CATACLYSM, physically an earth shaking change, refers to a per
sonal or public upheaval of unparalleled violence: a cataclysm that
turned his life in a new direction.
dispute verb 1) to argue or debate about; discuss. 2) to argue against;
call in question: to dispute a proposal. 3) to quarrel or fight about;
contest. 4) to strive against; oppose: to dispute an advance of
troops.
disrupted 1) in disorder or in turmoil. 2) destroyed, usually tem
porarily; interrupted. 3) broken apart.
dissolve verb 1) to make a solution of, as by mixing with a liquid; pass
into solution: to dissolve salt in water. 2) to undo (a tie or bond);
break up (a connection, union, etc.) 3) to break up (an assem
bly or organization) ; dismiss; disperse. 4) Govt. to order the ter
mination of (a parliament or other legislative body). 5) to bring
to an end; terminate; destroy: to dissolve one’s hopes. 6) to sepa
rate into parts or elements; disintegrate. 7) to destroy the bind
ing power or influence of: to dissolve a spell.
distribute verb 1) to divide and give out in shares; deal out;
allot. — Syn. assign, mete, apportion, distribute, dispense.
2) to disperse through a space or over an area; spread; scatter.
3) to promote, sell, and ship or deliver (an item or line of mer
chandise) to individual customers, esp. in a specified region
or area.
286
Usage note
DISTRIBUTE, DISPENSE apply to giving out something. DIS
TRIBUTE implies apportioned, individualized giving, esp. of some
thing that is definite or limited in amount or number: The prizes were
distributed among ten winners. DISPENSE formerly implied indis
criminate, general, and liberal giving, esp. of something that was
more or less indefinite or unmeasured in amount: to dispense largess.
It now applies chiefly to giving according to need or deserts, from an
organized and official source: to dispense medicines and food to the
victims.
drop sb. off (at sth.) phrasal verb to take someone by car to a partic
ular place that you are driving past: She usually drops the kids off
at school on her way to work.
dual adjective 1) of, pertaining to, or noting two. 2) composed or
consisting of two people, items, parts, etc., together; twofold;
double: dual ownership. 3) having a twofold, or double, charac
ter or nature.
Eastern Orthodoxy the faith, practice, membership, and govern
ment of the Eastern Orthodox Church, one of the Christian
churches in eastern Europe and parts of Asia.
economy noun 1) thrifty management; frugality in the expenditure or
consumption of money, materials, etc. 2) the management of
the resources of a community, country, etc., esp. with a view to
its productivity. 3) the disposition or regulation of the parts or
functions of any organic whole; an organized system or method.
4) the efficient, sparing, or concise use of something: an economy of effort; an economy of movement.
elect verb 1) to choose or select by vote, as for an office: to elect
a mayor. — Ant. reject. 2) to determine in favor of (a
method, course of action, etc.) 3) to pick out; choose: Firstyear students may elect French, Spanish, or German. — Syn.
choose.
287
Usage note
CHOOSE, SELECT, PICK, ELECT, PREFER indicate a decision that
one or more possibilities are to be regarded more highly than others.
CHOOSE suggests a decision on one of a number of possibilities
because of its apparent superiority: to choose a course of action. SELECT
suggests a choice made for fitness: to select the proper golf club. PICK, an
informal word, suggests a selection on personal grounds: to pick a winner. The formal word ELECT suggests a kind of official action: to elect a
representative. PREFER, also formal, emphasizes the desire or liking for
one thing more than for another or others: to prefer coffee to tea.
election noun 1) the selection of a person or persons for office by
vote. 2) a public vote upon a proposition submitted.
embassy noun 1) a body of persons entrusted with a mission to a sov
ereign or government, esp. an ambassador and his or her staff.
2) the official headquarters of an ambassador. 3) the function or
office of an ambassador. 4) a mission headed by an ambassador.
emerge verb 1) to come forth into view or notice, as from conceal
ment or obscurity: a ship emerging from the fog. — Syn. emanate,
issue. 2) to rise or come forth from or as if from water or other
liquid. 3) to come up or arise, as a question or difficulty. 4) to
come into existence; develop. 5) to rise, as from an inferior or
unfortunate state or condition.
Usage note
EMERGE, EMANATE, ISSUE mean to come forth. EMERGE is
used of coming forth from a place shut off from view, or from conceal
ment, or the like, into sight and notice: The sun emerges from behind the
clouds. EMANATE is used of intangible things, as light or ideas, spread
ing from a source: Rumors often emanate from irresponsible persons.
ISSUE is often used of a number of persons, a mass of matter, or a vol
ume of smoke, sound, or the like, coming forth through any outlet or
outlets: The crowd issued from the building.
empty adjective 1) containing nothing; having none of the usual or
appropriate contents: an empty bottle. 2) vacant; unoccupied: an
empty house. 3) without cargo or load: an empty wagon. 4) desti
288
tute of people or human activity: We walked along the empty
streets of the city at night. 5) destitute of some quality or qualities;
devoid (usually fol. by of ): Theirs is a life now empty of happiness.
6) without force, effect, or significance; hollow; meaningless:
empty compliments; empty pleasures. 7) not employed in useful
activity or work; idle: empty summer days.
encounter verb 1) to come upon or meet with, esp. unexpectedly: to
encounter a new situation. 2) to meet with or contend against
(difficulties, opposition, etc.): We encounter so many problems in
our work. 3) to meet (a person, military force, etc.) in conflict:
We will encounter the enemy at dawn.
endemic to adjective belonging exclusively or confined to a particu
lar place: a fever endemic to the tropics.
enforce verb 1) to put or keep in force; compel obedience to: to
enforce a rule; Traffic laws will be strictly enforced. — Syn.
administer, impose, execute, apply. 2) to obtain (payment, obe
dience, etc.) by force or compulsion. 3) to impose (a course of
action) upon a person: The doctor enforced a strict dietary regimen. 4) to support (a demand, claim, etc.) by force: to enforce
one’s rights as a citizen. 5) to impress or urge (an argument,
contention, etc.) forcibly; lay stress upon: He enforced his argument by adding details.
ensure gender equality to guarantee gender equality.
environment noun 1) the aggregate of surrounding things, condi
tions, or influences; surroundings; milieu. — Syn. locale, envi
rons. 2) Ecol. the air, water, minerals, organisms, and all other
external factors surrounding and affecting a given organism at
any time. 3) the social and cultural forces that shape the life of
a person or a population.
Usage note
ENVIRONMENT, MILIEU, AMBIANCE, SETTING, SUR
ROUNDINGS all refer to what makes up the atmosphere or back
ground against which someone or something is seen. ENVIRONMENT
may refer either to actual physical surroundings or to social or cultural
background factors: an environment of crime and grinding poverty.
289
MILIEU, encountered most often in literary writing, refers to intangi
ble aspects of the environment: an exhilarating milieu of artistic ferment
and innovation. AMBIANCE applies to the atmosphere of the sur
roundings, their mood or tone: an ambiance of ease and elegance. SET
TING suggests a background that sets something off: a perfect setting for
the emerald. SURROUNDINGS alludes specifically to the physical
aspects of the environment: awoke in strange surroundings; blend in
with her surroundings.
equal adjective 1) as great as; the same as (often fol. by to or with ) : The
velocity of sound is not equal to that of light. 2) like or alike in quan
tity, degree, value, etc.; of the same rank, ability, merit, etc.: two
students of equal brilliance. 3) evenly proportioned or balanced: an
equal contest. 4) uniform in operation or effect: equal laws. 5) ade
quate or sufficient in quantity or degree: The supply is equal to the
demand. 6) having adequate powers, ability, or means: He was
equal to the task. 7) level, as a plain. 8) tranquil or undisturbed: to
confront death with an equal mind. 9) impartial or equitable.
equal access the same ability, right, or permission to approach,
enter, speak with, or use sth.; the same admittance.
erupt verb 1) to burst forth: Molten lava erupted from the top of the volcano. 2) (of a volcano, geyser, etc.) to eject matter. 3) to break
out of a pent up state, usually in a sudden and violent manner:
Words of anger erupted from her
eruption noun an issuing forth suddenly and violently; outburst; out
break.
estimate verb 1) to form an approximate judgment or opinion
regarding the worth, amount, size, weight, etc., of; calculate
approximately: to estimate the cost of a college education. — Syn.
compute, count, reckon, gauge, assess, value, evaluate,
appraise. 2) to form an opinion of; judge.
Ethiopia noun formerly, Abyssinia. a republic in E Africa: formerly a
monarchy. 30,200,000; 409,266 sq. mi. (1,060,000 sq. km).
Present boundaries include Eritrea. Cap.: Addis Ababa.
exciting adjective producing excitement; stirring; thrilling: an exciting account of his trip to Tibet.
290
executive noun 1) a person or group of persons having administrative
or supervisory authority in an organization. 2) the person or
persons in whom the supreme executive power of a government
is vested. 3) the executive branch of a government.
exile noun expulsion from one’s native land by authoritative decree.
exodus noun a going out; a departure or emigration, usually of a
large number of people: the summer exodus to the country and
shore.
experience verb 1) to have experience of; meet with; undergo; feel: to
experience nausea. — Syn. encounter, know, endure, suffer. 2) to
learn by experience. 3) experience religion to undergo a spiritu
al conversion by which one gains or regains faith in God.
Usage note
EXPERIENCE, UNDERGO refer to encountering situations, condi
tions, etc., in life, or to having certain sensations or feelings. EXPERI
ENCE implies being affected by what one meets with: to experience a
change of heart, bitter disappointment. UNDERGO usually refers to
the bearing or enduring of something hard, difficult, disagreeable, or
dangerous: to undergo severe hardships, an operation.
explore verb 1) to traverse or range over (a region, area, etc.) for the
purpose of discovery: to explore the island. 2) to look into close
ly; scrutinize; examine: Let us explore the possibilities for
improvement. — Syn. probe, study, research, investigate, survey.
facilitate verb to make easier or less difficult; help forward (an
action, a process, etc.) : Careful planning facilitates any kind of
work.
facilities noun 1) something designed, built, installed, etc., to serve a
specific function affording a convenience or service: transportation facilities; educational facilities; a new research facility.
2) something that permits the easier performance of an action,
course of conduct, etc.: to provide someone with every facility for
accomplishing a task; to lack facilities for handling bulk mail.
federal adjective 1) pertaining to or of the nature of a union of states
under a central government distinct from the individual govern
ments of the separate states: the federal government of the U.S
291
2) of, pertaining to, or noting such a central government: federal offices.
fend for oneself to look after yourself without needing help from
other people.
firefighter (fig. “troubleshooter”) noun a person with special skill in
resolving disputes, impasses, etc., as in business, national, or
international affairs: a diplomatic troubleshooter in the Middle East.
“first wave” of newly-industrializing economies (NICs) a group of
countries, as Singapore, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Korea in
Asia, and Brazil, Argentina and Mexico in Latin America.
flame (to inflame) verb 1) to kindle or excite (passions, desires, etc.)
2) to incite or rouse, as to violence: His words inflamed the angry
mob to riot.
frenzied 1) wildly excited or enthusiastic: frenzied applause. 2) vio
lently agitated; frantic; wild: a frenzied mob. Also, phrensied.
fuel (to fuel sth) verb to make a situation worse or make someone’s
feelings stronger: The attempts to stop the strike only fuelled the
workers’ resentment.
G-8 / G8 / Group-8 group of eight countries, as Germany, Canada,
the United States, France, Italy, Japan, the United Kingdom
and Russia, whose leaders are meeting annually to deal with the
major economic and political issues facing their domestic soci
eties and the international community as a whole.
gap noun 1) a break or opening, 2) a wide divergence or difference;
disparity: the gap between expenses and income; the gap between
ideals and actions. close a gap to stop or obstruct a gap, widen a
gap to make the gap wider.
generate verb to bring into existence; cause to be; produce: He
generates ideas that we all should consider. A good diplomat
generates good will. — Syn. create, evolve, originate, engen
der, institute.
get around phrasal verb 1) to circumvent; outwit. 2) to ingratiate
oneself with (someone) through flattery or cajolery. 3) to travel
from place to place; circulate: I don’t get around much anymore.
4) to be socially active: She’s been getting about much more since
her family moved to the city. Also, get about.
292
get out of date/obsolete 1) be no longer in general use; fallen into
disuse: an obsolete expression. 2) be of a discarded or outmoded
type: an obsolete battleship. — Syn. antiquated, ancient, old. —
Ant. new, modern.
give asylum (political asylum) to provide protection to political
refugees from another nation.
give one’s assent to 1) to agree or concur; subscribe to. 2) to give in;
yield; concede. — Syn. acquiesce.
governing body the group of people controlling an institution.
governor-general, pl. governors general, governor generals 1) a gov
ernor who is chief over subordinate or deputy governors. 2) the
representative of the crown, as in the Commonwealth of
Nations.
grant verb 1) to bestow or confer, esp. by a formal act: to grant a
charter. — Syn. award, vouchsafe. 2) to give or accord: to
grant permission. — Syn. concession, bequest. — Ant.1,
2) receive. 3) to agree or accede to: to grant a request. 4) to
admit or concede; accept for the sake of argument: I grant
that point. 5) to transfer or convey, esp. by deed or writing: to
grant property.
graveyard of history 1) an imaginary place in which obsolete or
derelict objects or ideas are kept. 2) sth. that is out of date.
grossly adverb 1) totally. 2) completely; rankly. 3) fragrantly and
extremely. 4) indecently and vulgarly.
gun (at a gun’s point) also at gunpoint under threat of being shot. In
politics it is usually used figuratively meaning use of force.
harsh (reality) grim or unpleasantly severe; stern; cruel; austere real
ity.
hereditary adjective 1) passing, or capable of passing, naturally from
parent to offspring through the genes: Blue eyes are hereditary in
our family. — Syn. Innate. 2) of or pertaining to inheritance or
heredity: a hereditary title. 3) existing by reason of feeling, opin
ions, or prejudices held by predecessors: a hereditary enemy —
Syn. ancestral, traditional.
293
Usage note
INNATE, INBORN, CONGENITAL, HEREDITARY describe qual
ities, characteristics, or possessions acquired before or at the time of
birth. INNATE, of Latin origin, and INBORN, a native English word,
share the literal basic sense “existing at the time of birth,” and they are
interchangeable in most contexts: innate (or inborn ) stodginess, agility,
gracefulness. CONGENITAL refers most often to characteristics
acquired during fetal development, especially defects or undesirable
conditions: a congenital deformity; congenital blindness. HEREDITARY
describes qualities or things passed on from ancestors, either through the
genes or by social or legal means: Hemophilia is a hereditary condition; a
hereditary title.
heterogeneous adjective 1) different in kind; unlike; incongruous.
2) composed of parts of different kinds; having widely dissimi
lar elements or constituents: The party was attended by a heterogeneous group of artists, politicians, and social climbers. — Syn.
varied, diverse. — Ant. homogeneous.
hike (hitch-hike) verb to travel by standing on the side of the road
and soliciting rides from passing vehicles.
hold office to fill a governmental position.
homogeneous adjective composed of parts or elements that are all
of the same kind; not heterogeneous: a homogeneous population.
House of Commons / Representatives House / Duma the elective,
lower legislative branch in many national and state bicameral
governing bodies.
House of Lords / Senate / Council of Federation the upper house of
the legislature.
humane adjective characterized by tenderness, compassion, and
sympathy for people and animals, esp. for the suffering or dis
tressed. — Syn. merciful, kind, kindly, kindhearted, tender,
compassionate, gentle, sympathetic; benevolent, benignant,
charitable, human. — Ant. brutal.
294
Usage note
Usage HUMAN, HUMANE may refer to that which is, or should be,
characteristic of human beings. In thus describing characteristics,
HUMAN may refer to good and bad traits of a person alike (human
kindness; human weakness). When emphasis is placed upon the latter,
HUMAN is thought of as contrasted to DIVINE: To err is human, to forgive divine. He was only human. HUMANE (the original spelling of
HUMAN, and since 1700 restricted in meaning) takes into account only
the nobler or gentler aspects of people and is often contrasted to their
more ignoble or brutish aspect. A HUMANE person is benevolent in
treating fellow humans or helpless animals; the word once had also con
notations of courtesy and refinement (hence, the application of
HUMANE to those branches of learning intended to refine the mind).
illegal adjective forbidden by law or statute. — Syn. unlawful; illegit
imate; illicit; unlicensed.
Usage note
ILLEGAL, UNLAWFUL, ILLEGITIMATE, ILLICIT, CRIMINAL
can all describe actions not in accord with law. ILLEGAL refers most
specifically to violations of statutes or, in organized athletics, codified
rules: an illegal seizure of property; an illegal block (in football). UNLAW
FUL means not sanctioned by or according to law: an unlawful claim to
the inheritance; to take unlawful advantage of the trading situation. ILLE
GITIMATE means lacking legal or traditional right or rights: an illegitimate child; illegitimate use of privileged knowledge. ILLICIT, which orig
inally meant simply “not permitted,” now most often applies to matters
regulated by law with specific emphasis on the way things are carried
out: illicit conversion of property; an illicit attempt to control the market.
CRIMINAL most often refers to violation of the statutes of penal as
opposed to civil law. All felonies are criminal as are all crimes some
times punishable by death such as murder, arson, and kidnapping: a
criminal act.
implications noun, pl. relationships of a close or intimate nature;
involvements: the religious implications of ancient astrology. —
Syn. associations, connections.
295
in abundance a large quantity of something: Wild flowers grow in
abundance on the hillsides.
increase women’s political power to make greater women’s political
strength. Very often it goes under gender issue, which means fair
and equal representation of women in political life.
influential adjective having or exerting influence, esp. great influ
ence: three influential educators. — Syn. consequential, forceful,
important.
inherit verb 1) to take or receive (property, a right, a title, etc.) by
succession or will, as an heir: to inherit the family business. 2) to
receive as if by succession from predecessors: the problems the
new government inherited from its predecessors. 3) to receive (a
genetic character) by the transmission of hereditary factors.
4) to succeed (a person) as heir. 5) to receive as one’s portion;
come into possession of: to inherit his brother’s old clothes.
injustice noun 1) the quality or fact of being unjust; inequity. 2) vio
lation of the rights of others; unjust or unfair action or treat
ment. — Syn. injury, wrong; tort.
insight noun 1) an instance of apprehending the true nature of a thing,
esp. through intuitive understanding: an insight into 18th-century
life. 2) penetrating mental vision or discernment; faculty of seeing
into inner character or underlying truth. — Syn. perception,
apprehension, intuition, understanding, grasp.
insoluble disputes a situation in which two countries or groups of
people have serious disagreements and cannot come to any con
cord.
inspectors noun, pl. 1) officials whose job is to check that something
is satisfactory and that rules are being obeyed. 2) police officers
of middle rank.
Islam noun 1) the religious faith of Muslims, based on the words and
religious system founded by the prophet Muhammad and
taught by the Koran, the basic principle of which is absolute
submission to a unique and personal god, Allah. 2) the whole
body of Muslim believers, their civilization, and the countries in
which theirs is the dominant religion. Also called Muhammadanism.
296
issue (subject/ problem) noun a problem or subject that people dis
cuss: Drugs testing of employees is a sensitive issue. | the immigration issue | raise the issue (=say that a problem should be dis
cussed): We should raise the issue of discrimination with the council. | sth is not the issue spoken (=used to say that something is
not the important part of what you are discussing):
Unemployment is not the issue — the real problem is the decline in
public morality. | not be an issue (=not be a problem): I just got a
raise, so money’s no longer an issue. | avoid/dodge/duck/evade the
issue (=avoid discussing a problem or subject): When asked
about the bill, the senator tried to duck the issue. | confuse/cloud
the issue (=make a problem or subject more difficult by talk
ing about things that are not directly connected with it):
clouding the issue with uninformed judgements | what’s the big
issue? spoken (=used when you do not think that something is
a problem and you cannot understand why people are worried
or arguing).
judiciary noun 1) the judicial branch of government. 2) the system
of courts of justice in a country. 3) judges collectively.
jurisdiction noun 1) the right, power, or authority to administer jus
tice by hearing and determining controversies. 2) power; autho
rity; control: He has jurisdiction over all American soldiers in the
area. 3) the extent or range of judicial, law enforcement, or
other authority: This case comes under the jurisdiction of the local
police. 4) the territory over which authority is exercised: All
islands to the northwest are his jurisdiction.
jury (grand jury, jury trial) noun such a group selected according to
law and sworn to inquire into or determine the facts concerning
a cause or an accusation submitted to them and to render a ver
dict to a court.
juror noun one of a group of persons sworn to deliver a verdict in a
case submitted to them; member of a jury.
keep from phrasal verb keep something from someone to not tell
someone something that you know. keep someone/something
297
from something to prevent someone from doing something or
prevent something happening: keep sb from doing sth: Mulligan
was the only person who kept us from running amok completely. |
keep (yourself) from doing sth: I could hardly keep from laughing,
it was so funny. | keep sth from doing sth: You put the potatoes in
salted water to keep them from turning black.
lack of oxygen deficiency or absence of oxygen.
landlocked (countries) having no direct access to the sea.
launch a military push/campaign to start a vigorous and determined
military attack or campaign.
launch initiative/ initiate sth to begin, set going, or originate.
leadership noun 1) the position or function of a leader: He managed
to maintain his leadership of the party despite heavy opposition.
2) ability to lead: She displayed leadership potential. 3) an act or
instance of leading; guidance; direction: They prospered under
his leadership. 4) the leaders of a group: The union leadership
agreed to arbitrate.
legislative body noun having the function of making laws.
legislature noun a deliberative body of persons, usually elective, who
are empowered to make, change, or repeal the laws of a country
or state; the branch of government having the power to make
laws, as distinguished from the executive and judicial branches
of government.
lick up phrasal verb 1) to lap up (to get a lot of pleasure and enjoy
ment from something, without worrying about whether it is
good, true etc.). 2) devour greedily.
life expectancy (life span) the probable number of years remain
ing in the life of an individual or class of persons determined
statistically, affected by such factors as heredity, physical
condition, nutrition, and occupation. Also called expectancy
of life.
locate verb 1) to identify or discover the place or location of: to locate
the bullet wound. 2) to set, fix, or establish in a position, situa
tion, or locality; place; settle: to locate our European office in
Paris. 3) to assign or ascribe a particular location to (some
298
thing), as by knowledge or opinion: Some scholars locate the
Garden of Eden in Babylonia. 4) to survey and enter a claim to a
tract of land; take possession of land.
long-distance (long-term) adjective covering a relatively long period
of time: a long-term lease.
look for phrasal verb 1) to seek; search for: Columbus was looking for
a shorter route to India when he discovered America. 2) to antici
pate; expect: I’ll be looking for you at the reception.
machinery of government the apparatus of government; a system of
government activities, functions, processes, etc.
majority noun 1) the greater part or number; the number larger than
half the total (opposed to minority ) : the majority of the population.
2) a number of voters or votes, jurors, or others in agreement,
constituting more than half of the total number. 3) the amount by
which the greater number, as of votes, surpasses the remainder
(distinguished from plurality). 4) the party or faction with the
majority vote: The Democratic party is the majority. 5) the state or
time of being of full legal age: to attain one’s majority.
Usage note
MAJORITY, PLURALITY, in the context of an election, poll, or other
voting situation resulting in a statistically based statement, both denote
an amount or number larger than some other. In situations in which only
two candidates, options, or positions are concerned, the terms are inter
changeable, though MAJORITY is by far the more commonly used: She
beat her opponent by a large majority. The proposal received a large plurality of “Yes” votes. When three or more choices are available, however,
a distinction is made between MAJORITY and PLURALITY. A
MAJORITY, then, consists of more than one half of all the votes cast,
while a PLURALITY is merely the number of votes one candidate
receives in excess of the votes for the candidate with the next largest
number. Thus, in an election in which three candidates receive respec
tively 500, 300, and 200 votes, the first candidate has a plurality of 200
votes, but not a majority of all the votes cast. If the three candidates
receive 600, 300, and 100 votes, the first has a majority of 100 votes (that
is 100 votes more than one half the total of 1000 cast) and a plurality of
300 votes over the nearest opponent.
299
make promises to tell someone that you will definitely do something
or that something will happen.
minority noun 1) the smaller part or number; a number, part, or
amount forming less than half of the whole. 2) a smaller party
or group opposed to a majority, as in voting or other action.
3) a group differing, esp. in race, religion, or ethnic back
ground, from the majority of a population: legislation aimed at
providing equal rights for minorities. 4) a member of such a
group. 5) the state or period of being under the legal age of full
responsibility.
modern/up-to-date/sophisticated adjective in accordance with the
latest or newest ideas, standards, techniques, styles, etc.
national park an area of scenic beauty, historical importance, or the
like, owned and maintained by a national government for the
use of the people.
nationalize/ privatize verb to bring under the ownership or control of
a nation, as industries and land: a movement to nationalize the oil
industry.
neighbor adjective situated or living near another: one of our neighbor
nations.
noble (goals, noble-minded) characterized by morally admirable
thought or motives; righteous; worthy.
non ferrous metals containing little or no iron.
non-profitable/ non-commercial/ public organization/ non-governmental organization (NGO) not established for the purpose of
making a profit; not entered into for money.
numerical adjective expressed or considered in numbers: a numerical
code | the numerical superiority of the government forces (=the
fact that they were greater in number).
official noun a person appointed or elected to an office or charged
with certain duties.
overcome the barriers /take up the hurdles deal successfully with
problems.
overture noun an opening or initiating move toward negotiations, a
new relationship, an agreement, etc.; a formal or informal pro
posal or offer: overtures of peace. — Syn. proposal.
300
Usage note
PROPOSAL, OVERTURE, PROPOSITION refer to something in the
nature of an offer. A PROPOSAL is a plan, a scheme, an offer to be
accepted or rejected: to make proposals for peace. An OVERTURE is a
friendly approach, an opening move (perhaps involving a proposal) ten
tatively looking toward the settlement of a controversy or else preparing
the way for a proposal or the like: to make overtures to an enemy.
PROPOSITION, used in mathematics to refer to a formal statement of
truth, and often including the proof or demonstration of the statement,
has something of this same meaning when used nontechnically (partic
ularly in business). A PROPOSITION is a PROPOSAL in which the
terms are clearly stated and their advantageous nature emphasized: His
proposition involved a large discount to the retailer.
ownership noun 1) the state or fact of being an owner. 2) legal right of
possession; proprietorship.
Pacific Rim countries/ Asian Pacific Region the countries or parts of
countries that border the Pacific Ocean, such as Japan,
Australia, and the west coast of the US, considered as an eco
nomic group.
pack sth up also pack sth in phrasal verb to relinquish or give up; quit:
One failure was no reason to pack the whole experiment in. After thirty years of touring, the violinist packed his career up and retired..
paradise noun 1) heaven, as the final abode of the righteous. 2) a
place of extreme beauty, delight, or happiness. 3) a state of
supreme happiness; bliss.
peak months (peak energy load) cold months when energy bears its
maximum load.
pit sb/sth against sb/sth phrasal verb to test your strength, ability,
power etc against someone else: a chance to pit our strength
against pro ball players.
pivotal economies developed countries that play a leading role in the
global economy.
pledge noun 1) a solemn promise or agreement to do or refrain from
doing something: a pledge of aid; a pledge not to wage war.
2) something delivered as security for the payment of a debt or
301
fulfillment of a promise, and subject to forfeiture on failure to
pay or fulfill the promise. — Syn. warranty, surety, guaranty.
plough through also plow through phrasal verb 1) to move forcefully
through something in the manner of a plow: The cop plowed
through the crowd, chasing after the thief. 2) to proceed in a
slow, laborious, and steady manner: The researcher plowed
through a pile of reports.
poultry products made of meat and eggs domesticated fowl, as chick
ens, turkeys, ducks, geese, and guinea fowl.
Presidency the office of President of the United States.
privately owned belonging to some particular person by the right of
ownership.
producers companies that create economic value, or produce goods
and services.
prosperous economies thriving; rich countries.
Protestantism noun 1) a part of the Christian church that separated
from the Roman Catholic church in the 16th century. 2) the
religion of Protestants. 3) the Protestant churches collectively.
4) adherence to Protestant principles.
public administration position a post of employment in the executive
branch of a government.
Usage note
POSITION, JOB, PLACE, SITUATION refer to a post of employ
ment. POSITION is any employment, though usually above manual
labor: a position as clerk. JOB is colloquial for POSITION, and applies
to any work from lowest to highest in an organization: a job as cook, as
manager. PLACE and SITUATION are both mainly used today in ref
erence to a position that is desired or being applied for; SITUATION is
the general word in the business world: Situations Wanted; PLACE is
used rather of domestic employment: He is looking for a place as a gardener.
put sth. on edge (to put one’s nerves on edge) to keep sb. acutely sen
sitive; nervous; tense.
rates of economic development the speed of economic development.
rebel verb 1) to reject, resist, or rise in arms against one’s government
or ruler. — Syn. revolt, mutiny. 2) to resist or rise against some
302
authority, control, or tradition. 3) to show or feel utter repug
nance: His very soul rebelled at spanking the child.
recession noun, Econ. a period of an economic contraction, some
times limited in scope or duration. (Compare: depression noun,
Econ. a period during which business, employment, and stock
market values decline severely or remain at a very low level of
activity).
relationship(s) noun 1) the way in which two people or two groups
behave towards each other [+ between]: an improved relationship
between the police and local people. [+ with]: We have a good working relationship with the managers. 2) the way in which two or more
things are connected and affect each other [+ between]: the relationship between poor housing and health problems. 3) a situation in
which two people spend time together or live together, and have
romantic or sexual feelings for each other. 4) the way in which you
are related to someone in your family.
Usage note
RELATIONSHIP, RELATIONS, RELATION, CONNECTION. A
relationship with someone or something is usually close, and may involve
strong feelings: Jane’s stormy relationship with her husband. | What kind
of relationship does she have with her mother? Relations between people,
groups, countries etc are often about working together or communicat
ing: Relations between industrialists and environmentalists have improved
recently. Relations is a more official word: friendly relations in the workplace/between East and West. A relation or relationship to someone or
something, like a connection, is usually about a simple fact: Jane’s relationship to/connection with Jeff is that he is her uncle/boss. | What relation
has temperature to humidity? A relationship between people and other
people or things may be either close and full of emotion, or simply a
matter of fact: the relationship between bosses and workers | What’s the
relationship between temperature and humidity?
relief agency an organization, company, or bureau that provides
money, food, or other help to those in poverty or need.
repel verb 1) to drive or force back (an assailant, invader, etc.). —
Syn. repulse, parry, ward off. — Ant. attract. 2) to thrust back or
303
away. 3) to resist effectively (an attack, onslaught, etc.) — Syn.
withstand, oppose, rebuff. 4). to refuse to have to do with;
resist involvement in: to repel temptation. 5) to refuse to accept
or admit; reject: to repel a suggestion. — Syn. decline, rebuff
6) to cause distaste or aversion in: Their untidy appearance
repelled us.
require verb 1) to have need of; need: He requires medical care. —
Syn. lack. 2) to ask for authoritatively or imperatively;
demand. — Ant. forgo.
Usage note
LACK, WANT, NEED, REQUIRE as verbs all stress the absence of
something desirable, important, or necessary. LACK means to be with
out or to have less than a desirable quantity of something: to lack
courage, sufficient money, enough members to make a quorum. WANT
may imply some urgency in fulfilling a requirement or a desire: Willing
workers are badly wanted. The room wants some final touch to make it
homey. NEED often suggests even more urgency than does WANT
stressing the necessity of supplying what is lacking: to need an operation,
better food, a match to light the fire. REQUIRE, which expresses neces
sity as strongly as NEED, occurs most frequently in serious or formal
contexts: Your presence at the hearing is required. Successful experimentation requires careful attention to detail. DEMAND, CLAIM imply mak
ing an authoritative request. To DEMAND is to ask in a bold, authori
tative way: to demand an explanation. To CLAIM is to assert a right to
something: He claimed it as his due.
reservations noun 1) a feeling of doubt because you do not agree
completely with a plan, idea, or suggestion: have/express reservations (about): I had serious reservations about his appointment
as captain. | without reservation (=completely): We condemn
their actions without reservation.
reside verb to live in a particular place. reside in sth/sb phrasal verb
1) to be present in something: For Fellini, the poetry of cinema
resides primarily in movement. 2) to rest or be vested, as powers,
rights, etc.
restrain verb 1) to hold back from action; keep in check or under
control; repress: to restrain one’s temper. — Syn. bridle, sup
304
press, constrain. — Ant. unbridle. 2) to deprive of liberty, as by
arrest or the like. — Syn. restrict, circumscribe, confine, hinder,
hamper. — Ant. free, liberate. 3) to limit or hamper the activity,
growth, or effect of: to restrain trade with Cuba.
result in phrasal verb 1) to spring, arise, or proceed as a consequence
of actions, circumstances, premises, etc.; be the outcome. 2) to
terminate or end in a specified manner or thing.
rotate verb 1) to cause to turn around an axis or center point; revolve.
2) to cause to go through a cycle of changes; cause to pass or fol
low in a fixed routine of succession: to rotate farm crops. 3) to
replace (a person, troops, etc.) by another or others, usually
according to a schedule or plan.
Usage note
TURN, REVOLVE, ROTATE, SPIN indicate moving in a more or less
rotary, circular fashion. TURN is the general and popular word for
motion on an axis or around a center, but it is used also of motion that
is less than a complete circle: A gate turns on its hinges. REVOLVE refers
esp. to movement in an orbit around a center, but is sometimes
exchangeable with ROTATE, which refers only to the motion of a body
around its own center or axis: The moon revolves about the earth. The
earth rotates on its axis. To SPIN is to rotate very rapidly: A top spins.
round out phrasal verb 1) to complete or perfect: The new coin rounded out his collection. 2) to fill out; become rounder: She rounded
out so nicely that everyone soon forgot she had been so ill.
route noun 1) a course, way, or road for passage or travel: What’s the
shortest route to Boston? 2) a customary or regular line of passage
or travel: a ship on the North Atlantic route. 3) a specific itinerary,
round, or number of stops regularly visited by a person in the
performance of his or her work or duty: a newspaper route; a
mail carrier’s route. — Syn. beat, circuit.
rule verb 1) to control or direct; exercise dominating power, author
ity, or influence over; govern: to rule the empire with severity. —
Syn. administer, command. 2) to decide or declare judicially or
305
authoritatively; decree: The judge ruled that he should be exiled.
3) to mark with lines, esp. parallel straight lines, with the aid of
a ruler or the like: to rule paper. 4) to be superior or preeminent
in (a specific field or group); dominate by superiority; hold sway
over: For centuries, England ruled the seas.
Usage note
RULE, ADMINISTER, COMMAND, GOVERN, MANAGE mean
to exercise authoritative guidance or direction. RULE implies the exer
cise of authority as by a sovereign: to rule a kingdom. ADMINISTER
places emphasis on the planned and orderly procedures used: to administer the finances of an institution. COMMAND suggests military author
ity and the power to exact obedience; to be in command of: to command
a ship. TO GOVERN is authoritatively to guide or direct persons or
things, esp. in the affairs of a large administrative unit: to govern a state.
TO MANAGE is to conduct affairs, i.e., to guide them in a unified way
toward a definite goal, or to direct or control people, often by tact,
address, or artifice: to manage a business.
rule out phrasal verb 1) to prove to be unrelated or not for consider
ation; eliminate; exclude: to rule out the possibility of error. 2) to
make impossible or impracticable: The rainstorm ruled out the
holiday camping. make a ruling to make a formal decision or rul
ing, as on a point at law.
scale noun 1) a succession or progression of steps or degrees; gradu
ated series: the scale of taxation; the social scale. 2) a table of
graduated rates, as of prices or wages: These unions use different
scales. 3) the ratio of distances or sometimes of areas on a map
to the corresponding values on the earth. 4) a certain relative or
proportionate size or extent: They built a residence on a yet more
magnificent scale. 5) a standard of measurement or estimation;
point of reference by which to gauge or rate: We have no scale by
which to judge his achievements.
seal sth off phrasal verb to stop people entering an area or building,
because it is dangerous: Following a bomb warning, police have
sealed off the whole area.
306
“second wave” of newly-industrializing economies also second tire
NICs a group of countries, as Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand
and Coastal China.
seek out phrasal verb to look very hard for someone or something,
especially someone who is avoiding you or hiding from you: Our
mission is to seek out the enemy and destroy them.
seize control of also seize power of to take control of a place sudden
ly and quickly, using military force: The rebels have seized power
in a violent coup.
seniority noun 1) the state of being senior; priority of birth; superior
age. 2) priority, precedence, or status obtained as the result of a
person’s length of service, as in a profession, trade, company, or
union: First choice of vacation time will be given to employees with
seniority.
separate verb 1) to keep apart or divide, as by an intervening barrier
or space: to separate two fields by a fence. 2) to put, bring, or
force apart; part: to separate two fighting boys. — Syn. 1,2. sever,
sunder, split. 3) to set apart; disconnect; dissociate: to separate
church and state. — Syn. disjoin, disengage. 4) to remove or
sever from association, service, etc., esp. legally or formally: He
was separated from the army right after V-E Day. 5) to sort, part,
divide, or disperse (an assemblage, mass, compound, etc.), as
into individual units, components, or elements.
Usage note
SEPARATE, DIVIDE imply a putting apart or keeping apart of things
from each other. To SEPARATE is to remove from each other things
previously associated: to separate a mother from her children. To DIVIDE
is to split or break up carefully according to measurement, rule, or plan:
to divide a cake into equal parts.
set out for phrasal verb to begin a journey or course.
set the target to designate as a goal.
shackle noun 1) the shackles of slavery/convention etc literary the
limits put on your freedom and happiness by slavery etc. 2) one
of a pair of metal rings joined by a chain that are used for fas
307
tening together a prisoner’s hands or feet.
shackle verb to restrain in action, thought, etc., as by restrictions;
restrict the freedom of. — Syn. trammel, impede, slow, stultify,
dull. — Ant. liberate, free.
share (lion’s share, shareholder) noun 1) the full or proper portion or
part allotted or belonging to or contributed or owed by an indi
vidual or group. 2) one of the equal fractional parts into which
the capital stock of a joint stock company or a corporation is
divided.
share in verb to have a share or part; take part.
Usage note
SHARE, PARTAKE, PARTICIPATE mean to join with others or to
receive in common with others. To SHARE is to give or receive a part of
something, or to enjoy or assume something in common: to share in
another’s experiences. To PARTAKE is to take for one’s own personal
use a portion of something: to partake of food. To PARTICIPATE is esp.
to join with others in some thought, feeling, or, particularly, some
action: to participate in a race, in a conversation.
shore noun 1) the land along the edge of a sea, lake, broad river, etc.
2) some particular country: my native shore. 3) land, as
opposed to sea or water: a marine serving on shore. off-shore
adjective 1) moving or tending away from the shore toward or
into a body of water: an offshore wind. 2) located or operating
on a body of water, at some distance from the shore: offshore
fisheries. 3) registered, located, conducted, or operated in a
foreign country: an off-shore investment company; off-shore
manufacture of car parts.
shoreline noun the line where shore and water meet.
short of adjective 1) less than; inferior to. 2) inadequately supplied
with (money, food, etc.) 3) without going to the length of; fail
ing of; excluding: Short of murder, there is nothing he wouldn’t
have tried to get what he wanted.
shuffle (a pack of cards, politicians, cabinet, etc.) verb to intermix so
as to change the relative positions of objects or people.
308
sign an agreement to show formally that you agree to do something,
by signing a legal document.
sink in phrasal verb to enter or permeate the mind; become known or
understood: He said it four times before the words really sank in.
slave noun 1) a person who is the property of and wholly subject to
another; a bond servant. 2) a person entirely under the domina
tion of some influence or person: a slave to a drug.
solidify verb 1) to become solid or make something solid: The volcanic lava solidifies as it cools. 2) to make an agreement, plan,
attitude etc firmer and less likely to change: The two countries
signed a treaty to solidify their alliance.
solution noun 1) a way of solving a problem or dealing with a diffi
cult situation: The best solution would be for them to separate.
[+ to/for]: There are no simple solutions to the problem of overpopulation. | find a solution: Both sides are trying to find a peaceful solution. 2) the correct answer to a problem in an exercise
or competition [+ to]: The solution to last week’s puzzle is on
page 12.
sovereign adjective 1) belonging to or characteristic of a sovereign or
sovereignty; royal. — Syn. regal, majestic, imperial, princely,
monarchical, kingly, queenly. 2) having supreme rank, power, or
authority. 3) supreme; preeminent; indisputable: a sovereign
right. — Syn. chief, paramount, principal, predominant.
4) greatest in degree; utmost or extreme. 5) being above all oth
ers in character, importance, excellence, etc. 6) efficacious;
potent: a sovereign remedy. — Syn. effective, effectual.
specify verb 1) to mention or name specifically or definitely; state in
detail: He did not specify the amount needed. — Syn. detail, indi
cate, enumerate, stipulate. 2) to give a specific character to.
3) to set forth as a specification. 4) to name or state as a condi
tion: He specified that he be given my power of attorney.
spectacular/ amazing/ breath-taking/ dramatic adjective very
impressive and exciting.
sponsor noun 1) a person who vouches or is responsible for a person
or thing. — Syn. patron, backer; guarantor. 2) a person, firm,
organization, etc., that finances and buys the time to broadcast
a radio or television program so as to advertise a product, a
309
political party, etc. — Syn. advertiser. 3) a person who makes a
pledge or promise on behalf of another. 4) a person who answers
for an infant at baptism, making the required professions and
assuming responsibility for the child’s religious upbringing;
godfather or godmother.
stalk verb 1) to follow a person or animal quietly in order to catch or
kill them: a tiger stalking its prey | We know the rapist stalks his
victims at night. 2) (always + adv/prep) to walk in a proud or
angry way, with long steps [+out/off/away]: Yvonne turned and
stalked out of the room in disgust.
state-owned being property of a state; or with a state or Government
as a major stakeholder.
stipulate verb 1) to arrange expressly or specify in terms of agree
ment: to stipulate a price. 2) to require as an essential condition
in making an agreement: Total disarmament was stipulated in the
peace treaty. — Syn.1, 2 specify, designate, indicate, cite. 3) to
promise, in making an agreement.
storeroom/warehouse noun a building, or a part of one, for the storage of goods, merchandise, etc.
streamline noun a teardrop line of contour offering the least possible
resistance to a current of air, water, etc. to streamline verb 1) to make
streamlined. 2) to alter in order to make more efficient or simple.
strenuous adjective 1) characterized by vigorous exertion, as action,
efforts, life, etc.: a strenuous afternoon of hunting. 2) demanding or
requiring vigorous exertion; laborious: To think deeply is a strenuous task. — Ant. easy. 3) vigorous, energetic, or zealously active: a
strenuous person; a strenuous intellect. — Syn. forceful, active.
Usage note
ACTIVE, ENERGETIC, STRENUOUS, VIGOROUS imply a liveli
ness and briskness in accomplishing something. ACTIVE suggests
quickness and diligence as opposed to laziness or dilatory methods: an
active and useful person. ENERGETIC suggests forceful and intense,
sometimes nervous, activity: conducting an energetic campaign. STREN
UOUS implies arduous and zealous activity with a sense of urgency: a
strenuous effort. VIGOROUS suggests strong, effective activity: using
vigorous measures to accomplish an end.
310
stretch verb 1) to extend, force, or make serve beyond the normal or
proper limits; strain: to stretch the imagination; to stretch the
facts; to stretch food to feed extra guests; to stretch money to keep
within a budget. 2) to extend or strain (oneself) to the utmost, as
by intense exertion; tax. 3) to increase the quantity of (a bever
age, food, paint, etc.) by dilution or admixing: They caught the
bartender stretching the gin with water. 4) to prolong or slow
down (action or pace) in order not to end too early: to stretch a
show; to stretch the action two minutes.
strip (of land) noun a narrow piece, comparatively long and usually
of uniform width: a strip of cloth, metal, land, etc.
summit noun 1) the highest state or degree. 2) the highest level of
diplomatic or other governmental officials: a meeting at the
summit. summit meeting 1) a meeting or conference of heads of
state, esp. to conduct diplomatic negotiations and ease inter
national tensions. 2) any meeting or conference of top level
officials, executives, etc. Also called summit, summit conference.
surfer noun a person who surfs. to surf through the Internet also to
surf the Internet to look quickly through information on the
computer internet for anything that interests you: surfing the net
with a high-speed modem.
surreal adjective having the disorienting, hallucinatory quality of a
dream; unreal; fantastic: surreal complexities of the bureaucracy.
sustain damage/ injuries/ losses verb to undergo, experience, or suf
fer (injury, loss, etc.) ; endure without giving way or yielding. —
Syn. bear.
sustainable development stable and ongoing development.
switchback noun a highway, as in a mountainous area, having many
hairpin curves. switchback verb (of a road, railroad track, etc.)
to progress through a series of hairpin curves; zigzag: The road
switchbacks up the mountain.
take a hike Slang. to go away because one’s company is not desired.
take one’s time to be slow or leisurely; dawdle: Speed was important
here, but he just took his time take sides. take sides to give one’s
support to one person or group in a dispute; be partial to one
311
side: We were careful not to take sides for fear of getting personally involved.
take refuge in sth to look for or find safety somewhere: During the
frequent air-raids people take refuge in their cellars.
take sth. into account to consider or include particular facts or
details when making a decision or judgment about something:
These figures do not take account of changes in the rate of inflation.
teem with phrasal verb (not in passive) to be full of people, animals
etc: be teeming with: Times Square was teeming with theatergoers.
terrain noun a tract of land, esp. as considered with reference to its
natural features, military advantages, etc.
The Netherlands noun a kingdom in W Europe, bordering on the
North Sea, Germany, and Belgium. 14,208,600; 13,433 sq. mi.
(34,790 sq. km). Capitals: Amsterdam and The Hague. Also
called Holland. Dutch, Nederland.
to poll verb 1) to take a sampling of the attitudes or opinions of. 2) to
receive at the polls (polls=the place where votes are taken), as
votes. 3) to enroll (someone) in a list or register, as for purposes
of taxing or voting. 4) to take or register the votes of (persons).
5) to deposit or cast at the polls, as a vote. 6) to bring to the polls,
as voters.
timber noun the wood of growing trees suitable for structural uses.
topple verb 1) to fall forward, as from having too heavy a top; pitch;
tumble down. 2) to overthrow, as from a position of authority: to
topple the king. — Syn. defeat, vanquish, overcome, overpower.
trail noun a path or track made across a wild region, over rough
country, or the like, by the passage of people or animals. trailblazer noun 1) a person who blazes a trail for others to follow
through unsettled country or wilderness; pathfinder. 2) a pio
neer in any field of endeavor: a trailblazer in science. Also called
trail-breaker.
trailhead the point where a trail starts.
transition to verb movement, passage, or change from one position,
state, stage, subject, concept, etc., to another; change: the tran312
sition from adolescence to adulthood. — Syn. changeover, pass
ing, conversion.
turmoil noun a state of great commotion, confusion, or disturbance;
tumult; agitation; disquiet: mental turmoil caused by difficult
decisions. — Syn. turbulence, disorder, uproar, agitation. — Ant.
order, quiet.
Usage note
AGITATION, DISTURBANCE, EXCITEMENT, TURMOIL imply
inner unrest, uneasiness, or apprehension. AGITATION implies a shak
en state of emotions, usually perceptible in the face or movements: With
evident agitation she opened the telegram. DISTURBANCE implies an
inner disquiet caused by worry, indecision, apprehension, or the like:
Long-continued mental disturbance is a cause of illness. EXCITEMENT
implies a highly emotional state caused by either agreeable or distressing
circumstances: excitement over a proposed trip, unexpected good news, a
fire. TURMOIL suggests such a struggle or conflict of emotions that one
is unable to think consecutively: Her thoughts were in a hopeless turmoil.
turn one’s back on to refuse to be involved with something: So many
of them just turn their backs on their religion when they leave
home.
under way (under discussion, under review, etc.) in the state or
process of: under repair; a matter under consideration.
undertake the changes to take upon oneself, as a task, changing the
situation.
undetected not discovered or noticed.
unitary adjective Govt. of or pertaining to a system of government in
which the executive, legislative, and judicial powers of each
state in a body of states are vested in a central authority.
unthinkable adjective 1) inconceivable; unimaginable: the unthinkable size of the universe. 2) not to be considered; out of the ques
tion: Such a suggestion is unthinkable.
upheaval noun strong or violent change or disturbance, as in a soci
ety: the upheaval of war.
urban (buildings, construction) of, pertaining to, or designating a city
or town.
313
vest verb to place or settle (something, esp. property, rights, powers,
etc.) in the possession or control of someone (usually fol. by in):
to vest authority in a new official. vested interest if you have a
vested interest in something happening, you have a strong rea
son for wanting it to happen because you will get an advantage
from it: The tobacco companies have a vested interest in claiming
that smoking isn’t harmful. vested interests pl. the groups of peo
ple who have a vested interest in something: The new reforms
were opposed by both vested interests and welfare groups.
violation of (health rules, codes, norms, agreements, etc.) a breach,
infringement, or transgression of.
Usage note
BREACH, INFRACTION, VIOLATION, TRANSGRESSION all
denote in some way the breaking of a rule or law or the upsetting of a
normal and desired state. BREACH is used infrequently in reference to
laws or rules, more often in connection with desirable conditions or
states of affairs: a breach of the peace, of good manners, of courtesy.
INFRACTION most often refers to clearly formulated rules or laws: an
infraction of the criminal code, of university regulations, of a labor contract.
VIOLATION, a stronger term than either of the preceding two, often
suggests intentional, even forceful or aggressive, refusal to obey the law
or to respect the rights of others: repeated violations of parking regulations; a human rights violation. TRANSGRESSION, with its root sense
of “a stepping across (of a boundary of some sort),” applies to any
behavior that exceeds the limits imposed by a law, especially a moral law,
a commandment, or an order; it often implies sinful behavior: a serious
transgression of social customs, of God’s commandments.
vote for to support by ones vote.
wade through phrasal verb to make one’s way slowly or laboriously:
Look at this pile of paperwork I have to wade through!
wander verb 1) to ramble without a definite purpose or objective;
roam, rove, or stray: to wander over the earth. 2) to extend in an
irregular course or direction: Foothills wandered off to the south.
3) (of the mind, thoughts, desires, etc.) to take one direction or
another without conscious intent or control: His attention wandered as the speaker droned on. 4) to stray from a path, place,
314
companions, etc.: During the storm the ship wandered from its
course. 5) to deviate in conduct, belief, etc.; err; go astray: Let
me not wander from Thy Commandments.
wealth (wealth of a nation, wealthy people) noun a great quantity or
store of money, valuable possessions, property, or other riches.
weapon (weapons of mass destruction) noun any instrument or device
for use in attack or defense in combat, fighting, or war, as a
sword, rifle, or cannon.
well-to-do/ well-off/ affluent adjective having sufficient money for
comfortable living; well to do.
wide-spread viewpoints an attitude of mind distributed over a wide
region, or occurring in many places or among many persons or
individuals. — Syn. far reaching, extensive, pervasive, far
flung.
wilderness noun a wild and uncultivated region, as of forest or desert,
uninhabited or inhabited only by wild animals; a tract of waste
land. cry in the wilderness to cry for help in vain.
worldwide adjective extending or spread throughout the world.
ÁÈÁËÈÎÃÐÀÔÈß
1. Àëåêñååâà È.Ñ. Профессиональный тренинг переводчика:
Учебное пособие по устному и письменному переводу для перевод
чиков и преподавателей. СПб., 2003.
2. Àðóòþíîâà Í.Ä., Æóðèíñêèé Ì.À. (Ред.) Теория метафоры. М.:
Прогресс, 1990.
3. Áàðõóäàðîâ Ë.Ñ. Язык и перевод. М.: Международные отноше
ния, 1975.
4. Áîðèñîâà Ë.Â. Практическое пособие по интерпретации текс
та. Минск: Высшая школа, 1987.
5. Áîðèñîâà Ë.È. Ложные друзья переводчика. Общенаучная лек
сика. Английский язык. М., 2002.
6. Âåéçå À.À. Чтение, реферирование и аннотирование иност
ранного текста. М.: Высшая школа, 1985.
7. Âèññîí Ëèíí. Практикум по синхронному переводу с русского
на английский. М., 2002.
8. Ãàëüïåðèí È.Ð. Текст как объект лингвистического исследова
ния. М.: Наука, 1981.
9. Êàçàêîâà Ò.À. Практические основы перевода. СПб., 2001.
10. Êàòöåð Þ., Êóíèí À. Письменный перевод с русского языка
на английский (Практический курс). М., 1964.
11. Êîìèññàðîâ Â.Í. Лингвистическое переводоведение в Рос
сии. М.: ЭТС, 2000.
12. Êóðîïàòêèí ß.Á. Читайте английские научные тексты. М.:
Высшая школа. 1992.
13. Êîæèíà Ì.Í. Стилистика русского языка. М.: Просвещение,
1983.
14. Ëàí÷èêîâ Â., ×óæàêèí À. Мир перевода 6. Трудности перево
да в примерах. М.: ВАЛЕНТ, 2001.
15. Ìèíüÿð-Áåëîðó÷åâà À.Ï., Ìèíüÿð-Áåëîðó÷åâ Ê.Â. Английский
язык: Учебник устного перевода. М.: Экзамен, 2003.
16. Ïîïîâè÷ Àíòîí. Проблемы художественного перевода. М.:
Высшая школа, 1980.
17. Ïðîøèíà Ç.Ã. Передача китайских, корейских и японских
слов при переводе с английского языка на русский и с русского язы
ка на английский: Теория и практика опосредованного перевода. М.:
Восток — Запад, 2005.
316
18. Ïðîøèíà Ç.Ã. Теория перевода (с английского на русский и с
русского на английский язык). Владивосток: ДВГУ, 1999.
19. Ïóìïÿíñêèé À.Ë. Введение в практику перевода научной тех
нической литературы на английском языке. М.: Наука, 1982.
20. Ðàçèíêèíà Í.Ì. Развитие языка английской научной литера
туры. М.: Наука, 1978.
21. Ðåöêåð ß.È. Пособие по переводу с английского языка на
русский. Л.: Просвещение, 1973.
22. Ðåöêåð ß.Ð. Теория перевода и переводная практика. М.:
Высшая школа, 1974.
23. Ðîçåíòàëü Ä.Ý. А как лучше сказать? М.: Просвещение, 1988.
24. Ñóäîâöåâ Â.À., Áîãäàíîâà Ã.Â. Учитесь читать литературу по
специальности. М.: Высшая школа, 1993.
25. Ôåäîðîâ À.Â. Основы общей теории перевода. М.: Высшая
школа, 1983.
26. Ôèðñîâ Î.À. Перевод с английского языка на русский и его
комментарий. М., 2003.
27. Ôîðìàíîâñêàÿ Í.È. Речевой этикет и культура общения. М.:
Высшая школа, 1989.
28. Õàíååâà È.È. Основы теории обучения пониманию иност
ранной речи. М.: Высшая школа, 1989.
29. ×åðíÿõîâñêàÿ Ë.À. Перевод и смысловая структура. М.: Меж
дународные отношения, 1976.
30. ×óæàêèí À. Общая теория перевода и переводческой скоро
писи. Курс лекций. М.: ВАЛЕНТ, 2002.
31. Øàëûïèíà Ñ.Ð. Чтение и составление контрактов на англий
ском языке. М.: Высшая школа, 1991.
32. Øâåéöåð À.Ä. Теория перевода, статус, проблемы, аспекты.
М.: Наука, 1988.
33. Baker Mona. In Other Words. A Course Book on Translation.
Routledge, 2002.
34. Bassnet Susan. Translation Studies. Revised Edition. Routledge,
2000.
35. Brazil David. The Communicative Value of Intonation in English.
Cambridge Univ. Press, 1997.
36. Dictionary: The New Webster’s Library of Practical Information.
TESAURUS. 1987.
37. Gile Daniel, V. Dam Helle, Dubslaff, Friedel, Martinsen, Bodil and
Schjoldager, Anne (eds.): Getting Started in Interpreting Research. John
Benjamins Publishing Company, 2001.
317
38. Gile Daniel. Basic Concepts and Models for Interpreter and
Translator Training. John Benjamins Publishing Company, 1995.
39. Larson Mildred L. Meaning based Translation: A Guide to Cross
language Equivalence. University Press of America, 1984.
40. Newmark Peter. About Translation. Multilingual Matters Ltd.,
2001.
41. Peterson Patricia Wilcox. Developing Writing. Washington D.C.,
USIA, 1996.
42. Robinson Douglas. Becoming a Translator: an accelerated course.
Routledge, 1999.
43. Robinson Douglas. What is Translation? Centrifugal Theories,
Critical Interventions. The Kent State University Press, Kent, Ohio, 1997.
44. Seleskovitch Danica and Lederer Marianne. A Systematic
Approach to teaching Interpretation. Paris, Didier Erudition, 1989.
Учебное издание
Терехова Евгения Викторовна
ДВУСТОРОННИЙ ПЕРЕВОД
ОБЩЕСТВЕННО-ПОЛИТИЧЕСКИХ ТЕКСТОВ
(С ЭЛЕМЕНТАМИ СКОРОПИСИ В АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ)
Учебное пособие
Подписано в печать 20.02.2012.
Электронное издание для распространения через Интернет.